Quarterlytics / Consumer Cyclical / Personal Products & Services / Reckitt Benckiser Group plc

Reckitt Benckiser Group plc

rb · LSE Consumer Cyclical
Claim this profile
Ticker rb
Exchange LSE
Sector Consumer Cyclical
Industry Personal Products & Services
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2012 Annual Report · Reckitt Benckiser Group plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
R

e

c

k

i

t

t

B

e

n

c

k

i

s

e

r

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

F

i

n

a

n

c

i

a

l

S

t

a

t

e

m

e

n

t

s

2

0

1

2

Healthier
Happier
Stronger

Reckitt Benckiser Group plc 
Annual Report and Financial Statements 2012 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Contents 

  1  Chairman’s Statement

  2  Chief Executive’s Statement

 10  Business Review 2012

 18  Board of Directors and Executive Committee

 19  Report of the Directors

 22  Chairman’s Statement on Corporate Governance

 24  Corporate Governance Report

 30  Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

 31  Directors’ Remuneration Report

 38   Independent Auditors’ Report to the members of  

Reckitt Benckiser Group plc 

 39  Group income statement

 39   Group statement of comprehensive income

 40  Group balance sheet

 41  Group statement of changes in equity

 42  Group cash flow statement 

 43  Notes to the financial statements

 75  Five-year summary

 76   Parent Company – Independent Auditors’ Report  
to the members of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc 

 77  Parent Company balance sheet

 78  Notes to the Parent Company financial statements

 84  Shareholder information

Chairman’s Statement

Strong Performance as Refreshed  
Strategy Delivers

I am pleased to report that our 
Company delivered a strong 
performance in 2012, with results 
coming both from the world’s 
emerging markets and also a return to 
growth in the developed markets of 
Europe and North America.

The Company announced a refreshed 
strategy last year, which sees it focusing its 
brand portfolio on the faster growth and 
higher margin consumer health and 
hygiene categories, and redeploying its 
resources to deliver a more evenly balanced 
revenue stream from emerging and 
developed markets. The Company’s results 
for 2012 are a testament to the quality of 
this strategy and the speed with which 
management has moved in support of it. 

Like-for-like1 sales (net revenue) growth 
was up +5% (both excluding and including 
RB Pharmaceuticals), adjusted operating 
profit2 grew +6% and adjusted diluted 
earnings per share2 was 264.4p which is 
+7% versus 2011. 

Acquisitions, Disposals and Cash
The Company made some strategic 
acquisitions in support of the health and 
hygiene focus, strengthening the 
Company’s health care capabilities in Latin 
America and China. Additionally, the 
Company made its first move into the 

largest consumer health care category in 
the world with the acquisition of Schiff 
Nutrition International, Inc. (Schiff) and  
its leading US brands in the vitamins, 
minerals and supplements market. There 
were also a few disposals of non core 
assets. Net debt at the end of 2012, after 
paying for dividends, net acquisitions and 
organisation restructuring, stood at 
£2,426m (2011: £1,795m). 

Your Board proposes an increase in the final 
dividend of +11%, taking it to 78p per 
share, and bringing the total dividend for 
2012 to 134p (which is +7% versus 2011). 

Social Responsibility 
The Company reached its goal of reducing 
its carbon emissions per dose of product 
by 20% several years ahead of plan.  
It has now set a further goal for 2020  
of reducing this by a further third, 
reducing its water impact by a third  
and ensuring that a third of sales comes 
from more sustainable products than 
previously existed. 

Additionally the Company has increased 
its support of Save the Children by 60% 
which has enabled a significant expansion 
of their work in bringing health through 
hygiene to many more vulnerable children, 
especially those under five years of age. 

2
0
0
0

Adjusted net income £m 

Board of Directors
Since the Annual General Meeting (AGM) 
held 3 May 2012 we have changed the 
Company’s Chief Financial Officer (CFO). 
On 12 February 2013 Liz Doherty stepped 
down from the Board and Adrian Hennah 
was appointed. The Board’s many thanks 
go to Liz for her contributions to Reckitt 
Benckiser (RB) during her tenure, and we 
welcome Adrian to the Company. Adrian 
was previously CFO of Smith & Nephew 
PLC, the international medical devices 
company. Adrian is also a Non-Executive 
Director of Reed Elsevier. There have been 
no other Board changes.
2010

1,938*

1,418*

1,143*

1,661*

1,818*

2009

2012

2011

2008

1
6
0
0

1
2
0
0

8
0
0

4
0
0

0

*adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 
  tax effects thereon

The Board conducted its regular reviews  
of the Company’s brands, geographic area 
and functional performance together with 
detailed reviews of its human resources. 
The Board also completed its annual 
assessment of corporate governance 
including Board performance, corporate 
responsibility, and reputational and  
business risk. 

AGM Resolutions
The resolutions, which will be voted  
upon at our AGM of 2 May 2013 are  
fully explained in the Notice of Meeting.  
I encourage all our Shareholders to attend 
our AGM.

Thanks 
On behalf of the Board, I would like to 
thank Rakesh Kapoor and his leadership 
team for their excellent management of  
the business and nurturing of its employee 
culture that drive such excellent results 
both commercially and in corporate 
responsibility. Many thanks go to our 
employees globally for their achievement  
in delivering such a strong year for RB.

Adjusted net income £m 

1,938*

1,661*

1,818*

2
0
0
0

1
6
0
0

1,418*

4
0
0

8
0
0

1
2
0
0

1,143*

My thanks go also to my Board colleagues 
for their continued commitment and 
guidance. The Board is grateful for the 
support of our Shareholders and we  
thank you for your ongoing confidence  
in our Company. 
2008
2009

2012
The strategy the Company is pursuing  
*adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 
is, in your Board’s view, the right one  
  tax effects thereon
and the management team has our  
utmost confidence. 

Diluted earnings per share pence

2011

2010

0

3
0
0

2000

Adrian Bellamy Chairman

264.4*

247.1*

1600

1200
157.8*

226.5*

194.7*

1  Like-for-like growth excludes the impact of  

800

changes in exchange rates, material acquisitions  
and disposals.

2 Adjusted results exclude exceptional items.

400

0

0
2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

*adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 
  tax effects thereon

2
4
0

1
8
0

1
2
0

6
0

Adjusted net income £m 

Diluted earnings per share pence

Declared dividend per share pence

134.0

125.0

115.0

100.0

2009

2010

2011

2012

1

1
5
0

1
2
0

9
0

6
0

3
0

0

300

240

180

80.0

120

60

0
2008

150

120

90

60

30

0

3
0
0

2
4
0

1
8
0

1
2
0

6
0

0

1
5
0

1

2

0

9

0

6

0

3

0

0

2
0
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
2
0
0

8
0
0

4
0
0

0

3
0
0

2

4

0

1

8

0

1

2

0

6

0

0

1

5

0

1

2

0

9

0

6

0

3

0

0

1,938*

1,818*

1,661*

1,418*

1,143*

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

*adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 
  tax effects thereon

Diluted earnings per share pence

264.4*

247.1*

226.5*

194.7*

157.8*

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

*adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 

  tax effects thereon

Declared dividend per share pence

134.0

125.0

115.0

100.0

80.0

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2000

1600

1200

157.8*

800

400

0
2008

264.4*

247.1*

226.5*

194.7*

2009

2010

2011

2012

*adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 
  tax effects thereon

Declared dividend per share pence

134.0

125.0

115.0

100.0

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

300

240

180

80.0

120

60

0

150

120

90

60

30

0

2000

1600

1200

800

400

0

300

240

180

120

60

0

150

120

90

60

30

0

2012Chief Executive’s Statement – Results Highlights

Outperformance continues

RB has once again met or exceeded its targets. 

•	 	Like-for-like	net	revenue	grew	+5%	to	£9,567m.	

•	 	Excellent	growth	in	emerging	market	areas	of	LAPAC1 & RUMEA1; 

•	 	ENA1 performance improved progressively and now back to growth 

over the year. The last quarter was +3% growth like-for-like. 

•	 	Health	&	hygiene	Powerbrands	Durex,	Gaviscon,	Strepsils,	Dettol,	

Lysol, Harpic and Finish led the growth.

•	 	Suboxone	film	reached	64%	volume	share	of	the	US	market.

•	 	Operating	margins2 increased by +70 bps, ahead of target.

•	 	Adjusted	net	income2 grew +7% (+10% constant); adjusted 

diluted earnings2 per share of 264.4p (+7%).

•	 	Strong	cash	flow	took	net	debt	to	£2,426m	after	dividends,	

acquisitions and restructuring.

These results are very encouraging and give us confidence that we 

have the right business strategy, the right organisation, the right 

£9,567m

our net revenue in 2012

£2,570m

growth platforms and the right culture to deliver our long-term goals.

adjusted operating profit in 2012

2013 targets 
•	 	Net	revenue	growth	of	5-6%	at	

Medium-term KPIs
•	 	Health	and	hygiene	revenues		

constant	exchange	rates,	excluding		
RB	Pharmaceuticals.	

to	be	72%	of	core3	net	revenue		
by	end	of	2015.

•	 	Maintain	operating	margin2,	
excluding	RB	Pharmaceuticals.

For	2012	our	health	and	hygiene	
revenues	were	68%	of	our	core3	
geographic	portfolio	(67%	in	2011)	
and	LAPAC	and	RUMEA	were	44%	of	
our	core3	geographic	portfolio	(42%	
in	2011).	This	strategic	reshaping	of	
our	portfolio	is	ahead	of	schedule	
and	we	have	accelerated	two	of	our	
medium-term	KPIs	from	2016	to	2015.	

•	 	LAPAC	and	RUMEA	combined	to	be	
equal	in	net	revenue	size	to	ENA	by	
end	of	2015.

•	 	Achieve	200	bps	pa	of	net	revenue	

growth	on	average	above	our	
market	growth.

•	 	Achieve	moderate	operating	
margin	expansion	(excluding		
RB	Pharmaceuticals).

1   Latin America, North Asia, South East Asia, and 

2   Adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items

Australia and New Zealand (LAPAC), Russia and CIS, 
Middle East, North Africa, Turkey and Sub-Saharan 
Africa (RUMEA), Europe and North America (ENA)

3    Core includes health, hygiene, home and  

portfolio brands

2
2

2012

2012 
Chief Executive’s Statement

Healthier lives
Happier homes 
Stronger business

2012 was a seminal year for RB. We announced our new vision 

and purpose, and laid out a strategy to deliver our second decade 

of market outperformance.

HEALTH

Our vision is a world where people are healthier and live better.

HYGIENE

HOME

Our purpose is to make a difference by giving people 

innovative solutions for healthier lives and happier homes. 

To do something, we need to stand for something. Our vision 

and clear purpose inspires everything we do. In the fast changing, 

consumer-led global world we live in, our purpose inspires our 

people to deliver health, hygiene and home products of superior 

quality, value and convenience, and creates demand for suppliers 

who rely on our success, and employment and wealth creation 

across the more than 60 countries in which we operate. Our 

purpose also inspires us to work in over 40 countries with mums, 

children and health-workers educating them on practices to 

improve hygiene and so health. 

The success of our strategy enables us also to give more 

to society by improving the sustainability of our products 

and by funding life-saving health and hygiene programmes 

through our global partnership with Save the Children.

In the early part of 2012, we rapidly reorganised ourselves 
and our resources behind our new strategy. As a result, 
we made very good progress across a number of areas.

Rakesh Kapoor Chief Executive

2012

3

 
Chief Executive’s Statement – RB Strategy

Powerbrands focus

A key pillar of RB’s strategy is to deliver 
outperformance – growth ahead of 
the rate prevailing in our markets – 
through a disproportionate focus on 19 
Powerbrands in the health, hygiene 
and home categories. 

As an example, even in the world’s 
most developed and highly penetrated 
markets, dishwashers are present in  
less than 65% of homes, compared 
with washing machines which are 
present in well over 90%. 

Representing the potent core of our 
total portfolio, these Powerbrands are 
in health: Durex, Gaviscon, Nurofen, 
Mucinex, Scholl and Strepsils. In 
hygiene: Bang, Clearasil, Dettol, Finish, 
Harpic, Lysol, Mortein and Veet. In 
home: Air Wick, Calgon, Vanish and 
Woolite. And French’s in Food. Mostly 
they are the global No.1 or No.2 brand 
in their category.

In 2012 our Powerbrands together 
delivered 70% of our net revenue. 

All our Powerbrands have significant 
potential for future growth through 
increased penetration, consumption 
and category expansion within markets 
where they already have a presence. 

In emerging markets the opportunities 
are even greater. The Powerbrands 
also have potential for growth through 
rollout into countries where we do not 
yet have a Powerbrand presence. On 
average, our Powerbrands are present 
in only 50 markets of the near 200 
available. That represents a sizeable 
opportunity for long-term growth.

Within our three categories it is health 
and hygiene that take precedence. They 
are faster growing across the world and 
offer higher margin opportunities. Our 
medium-term goal is to grow our health 
and hygiene categories faster so they 
become 72% of our core by 2015. By 
the end of 2012 they represented 68%.

Good health is the key to happiness.

Hygiene is the foundation of 
healthy living.

Home is the centre of family life.  

Food French’s remains an 
important Powerbrand and 
continues to be run as a  
broadly stand-alone business.

Better

Finish has had a very strong year in the US with a gain of 
+190 bps of market share in 2012. This was driven by the 
hard-hitting ‘Finish Revolution’ campaign celebrating the 
consumer momentum as millions switched to Finish after 
experiencing the superior results it provided.

4

2012

Powermarkets focus

AREAS

Another key pillar of our strategy is 

A FOCUS ON POWERMARKETS
Our brands are marketed and sold in 
nearly 200 markets across the world, 
but we know that the vast majority of 
our global growth will come from a  
few key areas. 

We have identified 16 Powermarkets, 
in both developed and emerging 
countries.

Here we have a strong presence and an 
ability to win.

A FOCUS ON EMERGING MARKETS

We see seven major consumer clusters, 
each of which have Powermarkets 
within them. Consumers within these 
clusters have significant similarities 
in how they use, choose and buy 
consumer goods and so it makes sense 
to group them together. 

We take a consumer-centric view of 
the world and we organise ourselves 
around our seven consumer clusters. 

LAPAC

North Asia

South East Asia

Australia & New Zealand

Latin America

RUMEA

Russia & CIS

Middle East, North Africa & Turkey

Sub-Saharan Africa

ENA

North America 

Central Europe

Northern Europe

Southern Europe

Western Europe

The first three of these consumer 
clusters are the consumers of Latin 
America, North Asia and South Asia 
– which we group together into one 
organisational structure named LAPAC. 
The next three clusters are Russia and 
CIS, Middle East and North Africa, 
and sub-Saharan Africa – and we 
group these three together into one 
organisational structure RUMEA. The 
seventh consumer cluster comprises 
Europe and North America. Across these 
two markets there are many similarities 
in behaviours, in brand development 
and in how the retail trade is organised. 
Hence ENA forms the third geographic 
organisational structure.

Our new medium-term goal is to grow 
the emerging market areas of LAPAC 
and RUMEA faster so that by 2015 they 
together represent 50% of our core 
revenues, equal in size to ENA. At the 
end of 2012 they represented 44%. 

Closer

An innovative crowd-sourcing global campaign 
by Durex attracted 1.4 million users in six weeks 
and resulted in a global pack design. The Naked 
Box campaign has won Gold at an award festival 
in China.

5

Chief Executive’s Statement continued

Stronger business

INVESTMENT IN INNOVATION &  
BRAND EQUITY
Delivering innovative products that meet 
consumer needs is a cornerstone of 
our success. We invest significantly in 
bringing new ideas to consumers.

We have one of the highest 
innovation rates within the industry. 

As important as providing great 
innovations that give more benefits and 
convenience to consumers is investing 
in education and communication on 
how to get the most from our products. 
It forms part of what we call brand 
equity investment (BEI).

This also comprises advertising in both 
traditional and digital media, and also 
investment in extensive consumer and 
professional education and information 
campaigns, such as new mother 
programmes, in-school hand washing 
and hygiene programmes, pharmacist 
education programmes and health 
professionals development programmes. 

Combined, these activities build the 
equity of, and trust in, our brands. 

This enables us to enjoy enduring 
relationships with our consumers. 

GENERATING SHAREHOLDER VALUE
We invest significantly behind our 
brands and innovation. Through our 
new focus on health and hygiene, and 
by maintaining relentless control over 
costs, we have created opportunities  
to expand our gross margins – already 
high within the industry. This drives  
the virtuous cycle of making increased 
funds available for reinvestment and 
growth, ultimately flowing through to 
improved profits. 

We run a lean and fast-moving 
organisation that can convert  
profit into cash efficiently through 
both cash and net working  
capital management.  

In 2012, we also returned cash to 
Shareholders through the buy back of 
14,991,643 of our shares.

M&A
Our strategy is firmly organic growth. 
We consider acquisitions where 
they offer a strategic opportunity to 

further accelerate growth and create 
Shareholder value. These might be high-
potential brands in adjacent categories 
or companies which strengthen our 
existing platform in a certain market. 

In 2012 we acquired Schiff. This 
gave us a powerful entry into the 
large and growing global vitamins, 
minerals and supplements market. 

This is one of the largest consumer 
health care categories in the world and 
we now have a strong platform in the 
US – the world’s largest market in this 
category – from which to grow in this 
new area. 

We also used M&A to strategically 
strengthen our health platforms and 
capabilities in the emerging markets 
of China and Brazil. 

We acquired China’s Oriental Medicine 
Company Limited, a manufacturer of 
traditional Chinese sore throat products 
and entered into a collaboration 
agreement with Bristol-Myers Squibb in 
Latin America.

Fitter

With the acquisition of Schiff  
in the US we have entered the  
large and growing global vitamins, 
minerals and supplements market. 
This is one of the largest consumer 
health care categories in the world.

6

2012

CATEGORY KPI

72%

of core1 Company net revenues from 
health and hygiene by end of 2015

GEOGRAPHIC KPI

50%

of core1 Company net revenues  
from LAPAC and RUMEA (equal  
to ENA) by end of 2015

NET REVENUE GROWTH KPI

200bps

a year, on average, ahead of  
the global market growth across  
RB’s categories and geographies

1  Core is health, hygiene, home and  
portfolio brands.

RB PHARMACEUTICALS
RB Pharmaceuticals, as a pioneer of 
innovative prescription treatments 
for chronic diseases of addiction, 
introduced Suboxone sublingual film in 
2010. The popularity of the sublingual 
film meant that by the end of 2012  
it had a 64% market share. The 
sublingual film has patent protection 
until at least 2020. Based on the 
enhanced benefits of the sublingual 
film and the significant reduction in 
unintended paediatric exposure due to 
its unit-dose child resistant packaging, 
RB Pharmaceuticals are voluntarily 
withdrawing their Suboxone tablets 
from the US market on 18 March 2013.

TALENTED, GLOBAL EMPLOYEES
Our strategy is supported by hugely 
talented and driven people from around 
the world. Their diverse backgrounds 
and mix of nationalities foster creativity 
and a culture of innovative thinking in 

every market. We have a highly geared, 
performance-driven remuneration 
structure for our leadership team.

Our people take a fresh view of 
what is possible in a market, what 
value they can create for consumers 
and how they can deliver healthier 
lives and happier homes. 

Then they take often radically different 
approaches to deliver it. We grant them 
the freedom to operate, to decide and 
to create; entrepreneurship is in their 
blood. This is combined with a high 
drive for achievement, a strong sense  
of ownership and a willingness to 
partner with anyone who can help 
deliver for consumers. 

My thanks go to all our employees and 
contractors all over the world who have 
contributed to our success in 2012. 

Smarter

Dettol South Africa changed the game of hand 
washing which was dominated by soap bars by 
successfully introducing the automatic liquid hand 
washing system No-Touch. The launch strengthened 
the No.1 position of Dettol in the category.

2012

7

Chief Executive’s Statement continued

Our wider responsibilities

Our focus on performance applies as 
much to our wider societal responsibility 
as it does to our financial parameters.

In 2012, in line with our vision and 
purpose, we announced our new 
sustainability strategy, having achieved 
our ambitious carbon reduction target 
significantly earlier than originally 
planned. In 2011 alone, our carbon 
reductions took the equivalent of 
2.4m cars off the road. We planted an 
additional 371,000 trees in 2012 keeping 
our manufacturing effectively carbon 
neutral, and were recognised as a leader 
in the Carbon Disclosure Project. 

For 2020 we have set ourselves 
another stretch target of reducing 
our water impact by a third, 
reducing our carbon emissions 
per dose of product by a further 
third and ensuring that a third of 
our net revenue comes from more 
sustainable products. 

We are also focused on reducing child 
mortality. Our global partnership with 
Save the Children sees us delivering 
funds, products and education 
programmes to reduce the number of 
children who die under the age of five.

In 2012, we gave £3.5m supporting 
Save the Children health and hygiene 
programmes in over 40 countries, 
up from £2.2m in 2011. Since our 
partnership began in 2003 we have 
reached nearly 900,000 children  
and families.

In 2013, we are expanding our sights. 

We are now partnering with Save 
the Children to deliver a vision of 
stopping preventable deaths from 
diarrhoea – one of the world’s 
biggest killers of children under five.

Confidence in the future

Despite continued tough trading conditions in many  

parts of the world, RB is confident about 2013 and has set  

a target of achieving 5-6% net revenue growth at constant 

exchange rate, excluding RB Pharmaceuticals. I am confident 

that our vision, purpose and strategy will continue 

to take us on the right path for continued 
outperformance in the years ahead.

Rakesh Kapoor Chief Executive

Stronger

Our Save the Children partnership helped  
fund health and hygiene programmes in  
40 countries, and reached nearly 325,000 
children and families in 2012.

8

2012

Annual Report and 
Financial Statements 2012

9

Report of the Directors2012Business Review 2012

This review for the financial year ended  
31 December 2012 conforms to the 
Business Review required under the 
Companies Act 2006 (2006 Act). It should 
be read in conjunction with the rest of  
this Annual Report, the Group’s latest 
Sustainability Report and the Group’s 
website (www.rb.com).

This review details the performance of the 
business under the new geographical 
segments and category structure in place 
during 2012. Prior periods have been 
restated to enable comparability. 

NATURE, OBJECTIVES AND STRATEGIES OF 
THE BUSINESS
RB is one of the world’s leading manufacturers 
and marketers of branded products in health, 
hygiene and home, selling a comprehensive 
range through over 60 operating companies 
into nearly 200 countries. In 2012, nearly 
three-quarters of net revenue was generated by 
brands that are either market leader or ranked 
second in their markets. 

RB’s vision is a world where people are healthier 
and live better. RB’s purpose is to make a 
difference by giving people innovative solutions 
for healthier lives and happier homes. 

In summary the strategy of the business 
pursued in  2012 was: 

•	 		Target	health	and	hygiene	Powerbrands:	
Continue the successful Powerbrands 
strategy but increase focus and investment 
on higher growth, higher margin health and 
hygiene brands, in addition to home. 

•	 	Target	fast	growing	markets:	Prioritise	16	

Powermarkets for disproportionate 
investment and growth. A significant number 
of these markets are emerging markets. 

•			New	organisation	structure:	Redeploy	
resources to increase focus on, and 
investment in, emerging markets. 

•			Target	medium-term	operating	margin	

expansion: Continue the strategy of steady 
margin expansion whilst increasing investment 
behind brand equity building activities. 

RB set three medium-term (five-year) key 
performance indicators (KPIs) in relation to the 
new strategy in 2012, with two of these now 
accelerated as discussed on page 2 of the Chief 
Executive’s Statement.

1)   200 bps of net revenue growth above 
market growth on average each year.

2)   Emerging market areas to be 50% of ‘core’ 

net revenue by 2016.

3)   Health and hygiene net revenue to be 72% 

of ‘core’ net revenue by 2016.

The Group also sought to complement these 
objectives with the exit of certain non core 
businesses and targeted strategic and 
financially compelling acquisitions. 

In February 2012 the Group announced its 
intention to undertake a strategic review of its 
private label business. This resulted in the 
withdrawal from the business during 2012.

10

In March 2012 the Group announced the sale 
of its non core Paras personal care business.

on a reported basis; on an adjusted diluted 
basis, the growth was +7% to 264.4p. 

The Group announced the acquisition of  
Schiff in Q4 2012. This transaction provides  
a powerful entry into the large and growing 
global vitamins, minerals and supplements 
(VMS) market. This market is the largest 
consumer health care sector in which the 
Group operates. It is an ideal addition to  
RB’s new strategic focus in global health and 
hygiene, and provides immediate scale in VMS 
in the US. 

PERFORMANCE OF THE BUSINESS IN 2012
The results include the business of Schiff from 
14 December 2012, the date of acquisition. 

Where appropriate, the term ‘like-for-like’ 
describes the performance of the business on a 
comparable basis, excluding the impact of 
major acquisitions, disposals, discontinued 
operations and foreign exchange. 

Where appropriate, the term ‘base business’ 
includes ENA, LAPAC, RUMEA and Food. Base 
business excludes RB Pharmaceuticals.

Where appropriate, the term ‘core’ includes 
health, hygiene, home and portfolio brands.

Where appropriate, the term ‘adjusted’ 
excludes the impact of exceptional items.

2012 net revenue increased at +4% at constant 
exchange rate (constant), to £9,567m, with 
like-for-like growth of +5% for the Group and 
+5% like-for-like for the base business. 

Total gross margin increased by +50 bps to 
57.9%, benefiting from cost optimisation 
programmes, pricing and positive mix. 
Investment behind brand equity building 
activities (BEI) was 12.7% of net revenue 
(excluding RB Pharmaceuticals), 70 bps higher 
than the previous year. Within this, pure media 
spend rose +9% (constant) to a level of 11.7% 
of net revenue (excluding RB Pharmaceuticals). 
On an adjusted basis, operating profit was 
ahead +3% (+6% constant) to £2,570m, with 
the adjusted operating margin +70 bps to 
26.9% due in part to the early achievement of 
planned cost savings. Operating profit as 
reported was £2,435m, +2% higher than last 
year (+5% constant). The Group took an 
exceptional pre-tax charge of £135m in respect 
of material one-off acquisitions and 
restructuring. For the base business, adjusted 
operating profit rose +3% (+7% constant) to 
£2,034m, equating to a +70 bps improvement 
in the operating margin.

Net finance expense was £15m (2011: £19m). 
Strong free cash flow generation during the 
year was offset by the payment for the 
acquisition of Schiff in December, and share 
repurchases of £535m. The effective tax rate 
was 24% (2011: 26%), the decrease was due 
to a 2% reduction in the UK corporate tax rate, 
associated deferred tax benefits, and the 
favourable settlement of certain tax cases.

Net income attributable to Shareholders was 
£1,829m, an increase of +5% (+8% constant) 
versus 2011; on an adjusted basis, net income 
was up +7% (+10% constant). Diluted 
earnings per share of 249.5p was +5% higher 

STRUCTURE OF GROUP OPERATIONS
The Group structures its business through a 
matrix of a centralised category development, 
global sales, supply and support functions 
(finance, human resources and information 
services), combined with three area 
organisations: ENA, LAPAC and RUMEA,  
plus Food and RB Pharmaceuticals. The  
central category development function is 
responsible for Powerbrand strategies, brand 
equity programmes and best practices, and  
new product development (including research 
and development (R&D) and consumer and 
market research), for implementation by the  
area organisations.

The supply function is responsible for all 
procurement (raw and packaging materials and 
services), production and logistics globally, and 
is directly responsible for the operation of the 
Group’s 45 production facilities worldwide. 
Facilities are located in Europe (16 facilities) and 
North America (six). The remaining facilities 
spread across Asia (16), Latin America (four), 
and Africa Middle East (three) include a small 
number of facilities in higher risk labour and 
social environments.

Information services is responsible for the 
Group’s global systems infrastructure and 
global systems, including the Group’s enterprise 
resource planning (ERP) systems.

SEGMENTAL PERFORMANCE AT CONSTANT 
EXCHANGE RATES
The three geographical areas are  
responsible for local execution of marketing 
and sales programmes:

ENA. This area covers the regions of North 
America, Northern Europe (UK, Ireland and 
Scandinavia), Central Europe (Germany, Austria, 
Switzerland, Poland, Hungary, Czech Republic, 
Slovakia, Adriatics), Southern Europe (Italy, 
Greece, Romania) and Western Europe (France, 
Spain, Portugal, Netherlands, Belgium). 2012 
total net revenue was £4,678m, with like-for-
like growth of +1%. We continue to witness 
difficult market conditions in many parts of 
Europe. Despite this the new organisation 
delivered a consistently improving performance 
through the year, supported with higher levels 
of BEI. Additionally, the second half witnessed  
a higher incidence of flu than in the 
comparable period. 

Growth in our health platform was driven by 
Durex, Gaviscon, Mucinex and Strepsils. 
Hygiene brands of Dettol, Lysol and Finish 
performed strongly, particularly in Europe 
behind Dettol No-Touch, and in the US behind 
Finish Quantum and All-in-1 gel packs and 
tablets. In the home category, Air Wick 
achieved good growth in the second half driven 
by a strong performance from the newly 
launched Filter & Fresh and Black Edition candles.    

Adjusted operating profit was £1,156m, an 
increase of +3% (constant). The adjusted 
operating margin increased +80 bps, with 
increased BEI more than offset by gross margin 
and fixed cost improvements. A large part of  
the improvements arose from the early 

2012achievement of planned cost savings. This  
has brought forward some of the planned cost 
savings originally targeted for 2013. 

the opioid-dependent population. In the US, 
Suboxone lost the exclusivity afforded by its 
orphan drug status on 8 October 2009. 

LAPAC. This area covers the markets of Latin 
America (including Brazil, Mexico, Chile, 
Argentina, the Andean Pact and Central 
America), North Asia (China, Korea, Japan, 
Taiwan, Hong Kong), South East Asia (India, 
Malaysia, Thailand, Singapore, Philippines, 
Indonesia, Sri Lanka) and Australia and  
New Zealand.

2012 total net revenue increased to £2,327m, 
with like-for-like growth of +11%. Growth 
came from Latin America, North Asia and South 
East Asia, driven by distribution expansion, 
innovation and increasing penetration. In 
health, all Powerbrands grew, with 
exceptionally strong performances from Durex 
in China, Scholl in Japan, Paras brands in India 
and Gaviscon roll outs in a number of markets. 
In hygiene, Dettol, Lysol, Harpic and Veet 
delivered strong growth from initiatives such as 
Dettol Daily Care and Re-energize, and Power 
Plus in Harpic. Vanish and Air Wick performed 
well in the home category. 

Adjusted operating profit increased +17% to 
£464m. Adjusted operating margin was +100 
bps higher at 19.9%. Increased investment 
behind BEI was more than offset by good  
gross margin, volume leverage and fixed  
cost containment.

RUMEA. This area covers the regions of Russia 
and CIS, Middle East, North Africa, Turkey and 
Sub-Saharan Africa.

2012 net revenue of £1,404m was ahead  
+8% on like-for-like basis (+7% total), driven 
by strong growth in Russia and CIS. In health, 
growth was driven by Durex, Gaviscon, and 
Strepsils. Hygiene Powerbrands Dettol, Finish, 
Harpic and Veet performed particularly well 
supported by initiatives such as Dettol Daily 
Care and Re-Energize. Air Wick performed well 
in the home category with growth driven by 
Freshmatic and Aqua Mist.

The second half saw the upscheduling of 
certain Nurofen products in Russia, an increased 
promotional environment and some operational 
and socio-political challenges in certain 
markets. These headwinds will continue 
through 2013 but we remain confident about 
the underlying strength of the business.

Adjusted operating profit increased by +3% to 
£290m. This resulted in a -80 bps decline in the 
adjusted operating margin to 20.7%. This was 
due to adverse FX impacting gross margin and 
increased investment in both BEI and the new 
area structure, to support the business and to 
drive future growth. 

The Group also has two non core businesses: 
RB Pharmaceuticals and Food.

Pharmaceuticals. RB Pharmaceuticals is 
responsible for the development of the Group’s 
Subutex and Suboxone prescription drug 
business. Both products are based on 
Buprenorphine for treatment of opiate 
dependence. Suboxone is a more advanced 
product compared to Subutex, as it has 
substantially better protection against abuse by 

On 31 August 2010, the Group announced 
that it had received approval from the US Food 
and Drug Administration for its New Drug 
Application to manufacture and market 
Suboxone sublingual film. Suboxone sublingual 
film has been developed through an exclusive 
agreement with MonoSol Rx, utilising its 
proprietary PharmFilm® technology, to deliver 
Suboxone in a fast-dissolving sublingual film. 

As with all prescription drugs, the protection of 
the business has a finite term unless replaced 
with new treatments or forms. 

RB Pharmaceuticals recently announced its 
voluntary discontinuation of Suboxone tablets 
in the US due to increasing concerns with 
paediatric exposure. The Group has recently 
been made aware that two manufacturers have 
received approval to produce generic Suboxone 
tablets in the US. The approval of generic 
tablets has been anticipated since the loss of 
orphan status in October 2009. Whilst the 
Group remains confident in the success of its 
patient-preferred Suboxone film, we do expect 
that increased price pressure will lead to a 
material reduction in sales revenue in the US.

2012 net revenue increased +10% to £837m. 
Growth came from continued strong volume 
growth in the US. This was offset by dilution 
from the increased film penetration, which is  
a lower priced product, and government  
price reductions in a number of European 
markets. Conversion from tablets to film in  
the US continued to increase with market 
volume share at the end of 2012 of 64%, up 
from 48% at the end of 2011, creating a 
significantly more sustainable business. 

Operating profit increased +3% (constant) to 
£536m. The operating margin was down -400 
bps to 64.0%, due to lower margins of the film 
variant, downward pricing pressure in Europe, 
and second half increase in BEI for advertising 
and marketing programmes to increase patient 
awareness about the film and treatment. We 
also increased investment in the clinical 
pipeline. We expect this gradual increase in 
investment to continue into 2013 and  
beyond as we build a strong, sustainable 
growth business. 

Food. The Group owns a largely North 
American food business, the principal brands of 

which are the Powerbrand French’s Mustard 
(the No.1 mustard), and Frank’s Red Hot Sauce 
(the No.1 hot sauce and wing sauce in  
North America).

2012 net revenue increased +2% to £321m 
underpinned by continued growth in French’s 
Mustard and Frank’s Red Hot Sauce. The 
second half was flat due to weaker US market 
conditions and increased private label activity, 
particularly around French’s Fried Onions. Our 
core French’s Mustard and Frank’s Red Hot 
franchises remain strong. 

Operating margins fell by -80 bps to 28.7% 
due to adverse mix and input costs.

THE GROUP’S BRAND PORTFOLIO, MARKET 
POSITION AND PERFORMANCE
The Group benefits from many very strong 
market positions for its brand portfolio and has 
leading positions in selected health, hygiene 
and home categories. These positions derive 
from the strength of the Group’s leading 
brands, described as Powerbrands, which are 
the flagship brands in the Group’s three major 
categories and on which the Group focuses the 
majority of its efforts and investment. The 
Group also has other portfolio brands which 
play a role as builders of scale in local markets.

These leading positions include:

Health
The health category consists of products that 
relieve or solve common health problems. 

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	medicated	sore	throat	
products with the Powerbrand Strepsils.

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	condoms	for	both	safe	

and more pleasurable sex, with the 
Powerbrand Durex.

•	 	No.2	worldwide	in	cold	and	flu	(including	

decongestants) with the Powerbrand Mucinex.

•	 	Leading	positions	in	analgesics	and	upper	
gastro-intestinal products in Europe and 
Australia with the Powerbrands Nurofen  
and Gaviscon.

•	 	Leading	positions	in	footcare	and	comfort	
footwear in many markets outside North 
America and Latin America, with the 
Powerbrand Scholl.

•	 	The	Group	also	has	local	leading	positions	 
in denture care, dry skin care and cold and 
flu products.

2012 Results excluding RB Pharmaceuticals
In light of the announcement of generic competition to Suboxone in the US, the Group provides  
the following information relating to the performance of the business in 2012 excluding  
RB Pharmaceuticals.

    RB ex RB 
Pharmaceuticals 
% 

£m 

    RB 
Pharmaceuticals 
%  

£m 

Net revenue 
Adjusted operating profit 
Adjusted operating margin 

8,730 
2,034 

+5%* 
+7%** 
+23.3% 

837 
536 

+10%* 
+3%** 
64.0% 

* like-for-like at constant exchange rates ** at constant exchange rates

£m 

9,567 
2,570 

Total RB
 %

+5%*
+6%**
+26.9%

11

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
Business Review 2012 continued

Net revenue increased to £2,068m, with 
like-for-like growth of +6%. Higher incidences 
of cold and flu in Q4 drove improved 
performances of our seasonal brands Mucinex 
and Strepsils. The non-seasonal Powerbrands 
performed well particularly Durex, Paras brands 
and Gaviscon. Growth in Nurofen was 
impacted by upscheduling of certain products 
in Russia. New initiatives such as Performax 
Intense condoms, plus increased distribution in 
China, drove Durex growth, and the roll out of 
Double Action in a number of emerging markets 
strengthened performance from Gaviscon.

Hygiene
•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	antiseptic	liquids	with	the	

Powerbrand Dettol.

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	depilatory	products	with	

the Powerbrand Veet.

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	automatic	dishwashing	
(products used in automatic dishwashers) 
with the Powerbrand Finish.

•	 	No.2	worldwide	in	pest	control	with	the	

Powerbrand Mortein, the Group’s 
international brand, supported by local  
brand franchises.

•	 	No.3	worldwide	in	acne	treatment	with	the	

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	fabric	treatment	(products	
to remove stains from clothes, carpets and 
upholstery) with the Powerbrand Vanish 
around the globe, and Resolve/Spray ‘n Wash 
in North America.

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	water	softeners	 

(products to prevent limescale build-up on 
washing machines and laundry) with the 
Powerbrand Calgon.

•	 	No.2	worldwide	in	garment	care	(laundry	

cleaning products for delicate garments) with 
the Powerbrand Woolite.

Net revenue increased to £1,966m with 
like-for-like growth of +2%. Growth came from 
Vanish where there has been excellent growth 
in a number of emerging market countries, 
combined with more stable market shares in 
ENA where we have lapped competitive entries. 
Growth was also driven by Air Wick which 
produced a good performance behind 
Freshmatic, candles and ‘Flip & Fresh’.

Portfolio
•	 	The	Group	has	a	number	of	local	market	
positions in laundry detergents and fabric 
softeners (for example, in Spain, Italy, certain 
East European markets and Korea). 

Powerbrand Clearasil.

•	 	The	Group	also	had	a	small	private	label	

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	the	overall	surface	care	
category due to leading positions across 
disinfectant cleaners, non-disinfectant 
multipurpose cleaners, lavatory care, 
speciality cleaners and polishes & waxes.

•	 	No.1	worldwide	in	disinfectant	cleaners	
(products which both clean and disinfect 
surfaces, killing 99.9% of germs) with the 
Powerbrand Lysol in North America and the 
surface care products in the Dettol range 
outside North America.

•	 	No.2	worldwide	in	lavatory	care	with	Lysol	in	
North America and the Powerbrand Harpic 
across Europe and emerging markets.

•	 	The	Group	has	a	number	of	local	leading	
brands in non-disinfectant multipurpose 
cleaners, speciality cleaners and  
polishes & waxes.

Net revenue increased +6% (like-for-like) to 
£3,682m, driven by strong growth in the 
Dettol/Lysol franchise across all three of our 
areas. New initiatives such as Dettol Daily care 
and Re-Energize in emerging markets and the 
recently launched Lysol No-Touch Kitchen 
System in ENA underpinned this strong 
performance. Finish continues to perform well 
in a number of markets globally, and 
particularly in the US where Quantum and 
All-In-1 tablets and gel packs have gained 
market share. Veet delivered good growth 
behind initiatives such as the Veet Easy Wax 
Electrical Roll-On. Harpic enjoyed very strong 
growth in LAPAC and RUMEA by driving 
category penetration via consumer education 
and increased distribution, backed by the 
continued success of Harpic Power Plus and 
Harpic Hygienic blocks in all geographies. 

Home
•	 	No.2	worldwide	in	air	care	with	the	

Powerbrand Air Wick.

12

business, which principally provided laundry 
detergents to major multinational retailers in 
Europe. This business was discontinued 
during the year.

•	 	No.2	worldwide	in	shoe	care	with	such	
brands as Cherry Blossom and Nugget.

Net revenue was £693m, with like-for-like 
growth of +1%. This growth was reduced by 
the withdrawal from the private label business 
where all contracts have now been terminated. 

THE INDUSTRY, MARKET AND COMPETITIVE 
ENVIRONMENT
The health, hygiene and home care industry  
is generally characterised by steady growth  
in demand, with some variation due to 
macro-economic factors, particularly in 
developed markets. Some emerging markets 
exhibit more volatile demand in reaction to 
macro-economic factors. The principal drivers 
of market growth in all markets are the rate  
of household formation, growth in the level  
of disposable income and demand for new 
products that offer improved performance  
or greater convenience.

The industry is intensely competitive, with a 
comparatively small number of major 
multinational competitors accounting for a 
large proportion of total global supply. The 
Group competes with numerous, well-
established, local, regional, national and 
international companies, some of which are 
very large and have significant resources with 
which to establish and defend their products, 
market shares and brands. Principal competitors 
include FMCG companies like Clorox, Colgate-
Palmolive, Henkel, Procter & Gamble, SC 
Johnson and Unilever, and such pharmaceutical 
companies as Bayer, GlaxoSmithKline, Johnson 
& Johnson and Novartis plus a number of 
strong local industry companies.

RB competes in strongly branded segments by 
focusing on its leading positions in higher 
growth categories. It is typically the market 
leader or a close follower, a position obtained 
through its ability to introduce new products 
(whether improved or newly developed), 
supported by a rising and substantial level of 
marketing and media investment. A lot of 
competition in the industry focuses on 
competing claims for product performance, 
rather than price or terms. For this reason, 
failure to introduce new products and gain 
acceptance may significantly impact the 
Group’s operating results. The Group must also 
defend itself against challenges to its leadership 
positions in markets: this requires significant 
marketing expenditure and promotional activity.

The Group’s products also compete with private 
label products sold by major retail companies. 
The Group does this by focusing on delivering 
innovative new products with real consumer 
benefits, which private label typically does  
not do. Consistent marketing investment 
communicates the benefits of the Group’s 
brands directly to consumers.

Technological change and product 
improvement can be a key determinant of the 
Group’s success. RB’s success in introducing 
new and improved products stems from its 
heavy focus on developing a pipeline of 
product innovation. The Group maintains a 
large category development organisation 
(including market and consumer research, R&D 
and marketing/sales best practice) to fuel the 
innovation pipeline and share category success 
factors and learnings. The Group invested 
£171m in R&D in 2012 (2011: £153m). While 
the Group believes R&D to be a key contributor 
to innovative new products, it does not believe 
it to be the dominant performance indicator for 
innovation success. 

INTERNATIONAL OPERATIONS AND 
REGULATORY POSITION
The health, hygiene and home care industry is 
heavily regulated by, inter alia, the European 
Union (EU) and individual country governments 
around the world. Ingredients, manufacturing 
standards, labour standards, product safety, 
marketing and advertising claims are all subject 
to detailed and developing regulation.

The Group has a comprehensive set of policies 
and procedures designed to govern its business 
methods and practices and protect its 
reputation. These cover, inter alia, a 
comprehensive Code of Conduct, an 
Environment Policy, a Global Manufacturing 
Standard, a Product Safety Policy including 
compliance with regulatory and product quality 
requirements. Internal controls on 
environmental, social, and governance (ESG) 
matters and reputational risk are further 
outlined in pages 14 to 16 of this Report.

RESOURCES
The major resources required by the business 
are an adequate supply of the raw and 
packaging materials consumed by the Group’s 
products and the necessary funds for 
developing new products and reinvestment in 
advertising and promoting those brands. The 

2012other principal resource is management. The 
Group considers that its primary raw materials, 
such as bulk chemicals (including a number of 
petrochemicals, plastics, pulp, metal cans etc), 
are generally in adequate global supply. The 
cost of these items fluctuates from time to time 
but not at levels that seriously impinge on the 
ability of the Group to supply its products or 
generate profit. The Group is profitable and 
cash generative. The Group believes that its 
ability to reinvest in supporting and building its 
brands is a significant competitive advantage.

Supply constraints do exist in the Group’s 
supply chain from time to time. These normally 
arise due to unexpected demand for new 
products or the time delay involved in stepping 
up production of new items to the levels 
required internationally. The Group’s supply 
chain is deliberately relatively well spread in 
terms of geography and technology, such that 
the reliance on any one facility is reduced. 
However, there are a number of facilities that 
remain critical to the Group’s supply chain, 
where major interruption to normal working 
could involve disruption to supply. The Group’s 
suppliers are similarly deliberately well spread in 
terms of geography and supplied items, but 
there are nonetheless some risks to continuity 
of supply arising from some specialised 
suppliers both of raw materials and of third 
party manufactured items.

The supply of strong management for the 
Group remains more than adequate. This is 
attributable to the Group’s culture and its 
highly performance oriented remuneration 
policy, based on paying for excellent 
performance. The Group believes that its ability 
to attract and retain the excellent management 
it needs to continue its success depends 
critically on this system. The Group trains and 
develops its management pipeline through 
formal training programmes focusing on three 
areas – leadership skills, functional skills and 
general skills – and through a deliberate policy 
of training on the job. The Group has 23 formal 
training modules for middle management and 
Top400 international managers (Top400). 

During 2012, the Group ran over 64 courses on 
these modules, training over 933 people. 
Management is international and is trained 
through rotation in international postings both 
in countries and in the Group’s central 
functions. Succession planning is a critical 
management discipline and is reviewed 
annually (at least) by the full Board and the 
Executive Committee.

The Group closely monitors and tracks its 
Top400. This is the core management team of 
the business and is a diverse group, consisting 
of over 40 nationalities. Over 60% of the 
Top400 is working in a country that is not their 
original domicile, consistent with the Group’s 
policy to develop a multinational management 
team. Turnover within this Top400 group in 
2012 was 8%, which the Group considers 
satisfactory given the need to retain high-
quality management offset by the benefits of 
refreshing the team with new talent. 2012 saw 
57 promotions, 78 moves, and 27 external 
recruits. The Group ended the year with a low 

level of vacancies within the Top400 of 14, or 
around 3% of the measured group.

materially adversely affect the Group’s ability to 
deliver its strategic objectives is low.

There is a comprehensive set of policies 
governing employment and employees to 
ensure that the Group remains an attractive 
employer. The Group is committed to the 
principle of equal opportunity in employment; 
no applicant or employee receives less 
favourable treatment on the grounds of 
nationality, age, gender, religion or disability. It 
is essential to the continued improvement in 
efficiency and productivity that each employee 
understands the Group’s strategies, policies and 
procedures. Open and regular communication 
with employees at all levels is an essential part 
of the management process. The Board 
encourages employees to become Shareholders 
and participate in the employee share 
ownership schemes.

The Group relies on its brand names and 
intellectual property. All of the Group’s major 
brand names are protected by nationally or 
internationally registered trademarks. The 
Group also maintains patents or other protection 
for its significant product formulations, designs 
and processing methods. The Group 
aggressively monitors these protections and 
pursues any apparent infringements.

RELATIONSHIPS AND PRINCIPAL RISKS
The Group’s key external relationships are 
broadly based with no single customer 
accounting for more than 10% of net revenue 
and the top ten customers accounting for less 
than one quarter of net revenue. Although 
these customers continue to become more 
concentrated in their chosen markets, the 
Group’s wide geographical spread and diversity 
of product lines provides a natural balance.

Equally, the Group sources its raw and 
packaging materials and finished goods from a 
wide variety of predominantly international 
chemical and packaging companies and 
co-packers. No single supplier accounts for 
more than 5% of cost of sales and the Group’s 
global purchasing function balances the need 
for competitive pricing with continuity of supply.

The Group’s brand portfolio is also broadly 
based with the most significant Powerbrand 
accounting for approximately 9% of net 
revenue. Each brand in turn is founded on a 
variety of appropriate technology platforms 
which drive a steady stream of product 
development. The individual brands are 
self-supporting and independent of the RB 
corporate brand, and each other. This reduces 
the potential for any brand reputation damage 
to impact across a broader front.

The financial stability of the Group is  
supported by a low level of leverage, as 
borrowings to finance acquisitions are paid 
down through strong cash flows, and a stable 
Shareholder base.

Given the combination of the financial strength 
and geographic spread of the Group, its range 
of brands and products, and its low level of 
reliance on individual key customers and 
suppliers, the Directors consider that its 
exposure to specific events which would 

The principal and specific risks that, in the 
opinion of the Directors, pose the most 
significant threat to the delivery of the Group’s 
strategic objectives are as follows:

Market Risks
Competition, economic conditions and customer 
consolidation may translate into increasing 
pressure on pricing and promotion levels and 
market growth rates, especially in Europe.

The Group seeks to mitigate this risk through 
active category, brand and customer 
relationship management programmes 
supported by ongoing investment into new 
product development.

The expiry of the Group’s exclusive licence  
for Suboxone in the United States in 2009 and 
the rest of the world in 2016 is likely to expose 
the business to further competition from 
generic variants.

The Group has developed a new and patented 
sublingual film delivery method for this product 
which partially mitigates the risk exposure to the 
expected generic variant entry against tablets.

Operational Risks
Business continuity plans may prove insufficient 
to protect the business in the face of a 
significant and unforeseen supply disruption.

Suppliers of key raw and packaging materials, 
co-packers of finished product and the Group’s 
manufacturing facilities and key technologies 
are risk assessed for their potential impact on 
supply disruption for branded products. 
Business continuity plans are in place 
throughout the Group and major sites are 
routinely and independently assessed towards 
achievement of a highly protected site status.

Key senior management may leave the Group, 
or management turnover increase significantly.

The Group structures its reward programme to 
attract and retain the best people. The formal 
succession planning process continues to evolve 
with plans being reviewed and updated 
regularly for key positions and individuals.

The combination of the Group’s recently 
initiated strategic business reorganisation and 
ERP programmes could result in sub-optimal 
implementations and reduced focus due to 
conflicting demands for management attention.

A governance structure has been put in place 
to ensure that milestones are clearly set and key 
objectives are tracked and followed up 
appropriately. Senior business leadership and 
professional programme management 
resources have been appointed to help deliver 
the programmes and ensure alignment and 
coordination between the various workstreams.

Information technology systems may be 
disrupted or may fail, interfering with the 
Group’s ability to conduct its business.

The Group has disaster recovery plans in place 
which are tested periodically. It also invests in 
security measures and anti-virus software to 
safeguard against this threat. Maintenance of 

13

2012Business Review 2012 continued

current systems throughout the execution of 
the ERP programme implementation is an 
ongoing priority.

Product quality failures or ingredient concerns 
could potentially result in the undermining of 
consumer confidence in the Group’s products 
and brands.

The Group has a comprehensive set of policies, 
processes and systems to manage and monitor 
quality assurance, including an appropriately 
resourced global quality audit team.

Regulatory decisions and changes in the legal 
and regulatory environment could limit  
business activities.

The Group has an ongoing Regulatory 
Excellence programme, which continues to 
make good progress. RB employs senior 
regulatory and legal specialists at a Group, 
regional and local level who are responsible for 
setting policies and ensuring that all employees 
are aware of, and comply with, both Group 
policies and the laws and regulations relevant 
to their roles.

Non-compliance with the 2011 UK Bribery Act.

A comprehensive prevention programme was 
put in place in 2011, including the refreshing of 
the Group’s Code of Conduct, the issuing of a 
new anti-bribery policy to all employees and an 
extension of the annual online training 
undertaken by employees to include a 
mandatory test on the new policy. This 
programme has been built on and reinforced 
through 2012.

If intensity or scale of acquisitions and disposals 
activity distracts management focus or 
undermines the control environment.

The 2010 SSL acquisition has been fully and 
successfully integrated. Recent acquisitions and 
disposals have been relatively smaller, largely 
focused on single categories/countries and at  
a pace to allow rapid integration. Group and 
area management oversee and provide 
additional resources to ensure continued local 
management focus and the maintenance of 
robust controls.

Financial Risks
Tax authorities are becoming more aggressive 
in disputing historically accepted financing and 
other structures and pursuing compensation for 
retroactive changes to tax laws.

The Group is proactive in responding to tax 
authorities, either through robust defence or 
through negotiated settlement. The Board 
considers that tax exposures are adequately 
provided for, whilst recognising that an element 
of risk will always remain. 

Government authorities have become more 
aggressive in levelling punitive fines for historic 
breaches of law.

The Group is proactive in addressing legal risks 
and responds to government authorities in a 
forthright and cooperative manner. When 
appropriate, the Group will present a robust 
defence to allegations it has breached 
applicable regulations or laws. The Board seeks 
to provide adequately for such legal exposures, 
whilst recognising that there is now a higher 

14

level of residual risk than has previously been 
the case.

COMPLIANCE AND ROUTINE RISKS
In order to manage the more numerous and 
routine risks, the Group maintains a complete 
and robust governance framework. This consists 
of a full set of policies, processes and systems 
covering all aspects of compliance, with 
international and local laws as well as with the 
Group’s stated minimum control standards.

Management provides primary assurance by 
driving risk compliance through their respective 
area, regional or functional responsibility. This is 
done through regular and detailed business 
reviews. Secondary assurance is provided 
independently through a combination of 
internal and external audit covering all aspects 
of the Group’s operations.

Financial Risk Management
The Group’s multinational operations expose it 
to a variety of financial risks that include the 
effects of changes in foreign currency exchange 
rates (foreign exchange risk), market prices, 
interest rates, credit risks and liquidity. 

The Group has in place a risk management 
programme that uses foreign currency financial 
instruments, including debt, and other 
instruments, to limit the impact of these risks 
on the financial performance of the Group.

The Group’s financing and financial risk 
management activities are centralised into 
Group Treasury (GT) to achieve benefits of scale 
and control. GT manages financial exposures of 
the Group centrally in a manner consistent with 
underlying business risks. GT manages only 
those risks and flows generated by the 
underlying commercial operations and 
speculative transactions are not undertaken. 

The Board reviews and agrees policies, 
guidelines and authority levels for all areas of 
Treasury activity and individually approves 
significant activities. GT operates under the 
close control of the CFO and is subject to 
periodic independent reviews and audits, both 
internal and external.

Foreign Exchange Risk
The Group prepares its financial statements in 
Sterling but conducts business in many foreign 
currencies. As a result, it is subject to foreign 
exchange risk due to the effects that exchange 
rate movements have on the translation of the 
results and the underlying net assets of its 
foreign subsidiaries.

contracts with GT to manage these exposures, 
where practical and allowed by local 
regulations. GT manages the Group exposures, 
and hedges the net position where possible, 
using spot and forward foreign currency 
exchange contracts.

Market Price Risk
Due to the nature of its business the Group is 
exposed to commodity price risk related to the 
production or packaging of finished goods such 
as oil-related, and a diverse range of other, raw 
materials. This risk is, however, managed 
primarily through medium-term contracts with 
certain key suppliers and is not viewed as being 
a material risk. The Group is not exposed to 
equity securities price risk.

Interest Rate Risk
The Group has both interest-bearing and non 
interest-bearing assets and liabilities. The Group 
monitors its interest expense rate exposure on a 
regular basis. The Group manages its interest 
rate exposure on its gross financial assets by 
using fixed rate term deposits.

Credit Risk
The Group has no significant concentrations of 
credit risk. Financial institution counterparties 
are subject to approval under the Group’s 
counterparty risk policy and such approval is 
limited to financial institutions with a BBB 
rating or above. The Group uses BBB+ and 
higher rated counterparties to manage risk and 
uses BBB rated counterparties by exception.  
The amount of exposure to any individual 
counterparty is subject to a limit defined within 
the counterparty risk policy, which is reassessed 
annually by the Board.

Liquidity Risk
The Group has bilateral credit facilities with 
high-quality international banks. All of these 
facilities have similar or equivalent terms and 
conditions, and have a financial covenant, 
which is not expected to restrict the Group’s 
future operations. The committed borrowing 
facilities, together with available uncommitted 
facilities and central cash and investments, are 
considered sufficient to meet the Group’s 
projected cash requirements. 

Funds over and above those required for 
short-term working capital purposes by the 
overseas businesses are generally remitted to 
GT. The Group uses the remittances to settle 
obligations, repay borrowings or, in the event 
of a surplus, invest in short-term instruments 
issued by institutions with a BBB rating or above.

The Group’s policy is to align interest costs and 
operating profit of its major currencies in order 
to provide some protection against the 
translation exposure on foreign currency profits 
after tax. The Group may undertake borrowings 
and other hedging methods in the currencies of 
the countries where most of its assets are located.

Capital Management
The Group’s objectives for managing capital are 
to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as 
a going concern, in order to provide returns for 
Shareholders and benefits for other 
stakeholders, and to maintain an efficient 
capital structure to optimise the cost of capital.

For transactions, it is the Group’s policy to 
monitor and, only where appropriate, hedge its 
foreign currency transaction exposures. These 
transaction exposures arise mainly from foreign 
currency receipts and payments for goods and 
services, and from the remittance of foreign 
currency dividends and loans. The local business 
units enter into forward foreign exchange 

In maintaining an appropriate capital  
structure and providing returns for 
Shareholders, in 2012 the Company has 
provided returns to Shareholders in the form  
of dividends, the current details of which are 
included in the Financial Review for the year on 
page 17, and the establishment of a share buy 
back programme.

2012The Group monitors net debt (total borrowings 
less cash and cash equivalents; short-term 
available for sale financial assets and financing 
derivative financial instruments) and at the  
year end the Group had net debt of £2,426m  
(2011: £1,795m). The Group seeks to pay 
down net debt using cash generated by the 
business to maintain an appropriate level of 
financial flexibility.

Details of numerical disclosures relating to the 
Group’s financial risk management are included 
in note 14 to the financial statements on pages 
59 to 63.

Sustainability: Environmental, Social and 
Governance (ESG) Matters and 
Reputational Risks 
In line with the requirements of the 2006 Act, a 
rationale has been developed and a review 
undertaken to determine what information to 
include in this Report as necessary for an 
understanding of the development, 
performance and position of the business of 
the Group relating to environmental matters 
(including the impact of the Group’s business 
on the environment), its employees, and social 
and community issues – referred to in this 
report as sustainability matters. 

The Board regularly considers and takes 
account of the significance of sustainability 
matters, their potential risks to the business of 
the Group and the opportunities to enhance 
value that may arise from an appropriate 
response including risks relating to 
environmental impacts, employees, society and 
communities, as well as reputational risks. The 
Board undertakes a formal review of 
sustainability matters at least annually. This 
includes providing oversight to ensure that the 
Group has in place effective policies, systems 
and procedures for managing sustainability 
matters and mitigating significant sustainability 
risks. The Board believes that it receives 
adequate information and training on 
sustainability matters and their potential risks 
and opportunities to the business of the Group. 
Additionally, the Audit Committee regularly 
reviews the arrangements for, and effectiveness 
of, risk management and internal audit 
including the full range of risks facing the 
Group such as risks relating to sustainability 
matters, reputational risks and risks relating  
to employees. 

The CEO has specific responsibility for 
sustainability. As part of established 
management processes, which include 
appropriate remuneration incentives, senior 
management reports directly to the CEO on 
sustainability matters on a regular basis. 

Our Director of Global Sustainability, 
Environment, Health & Safety manages the 
sustainability programme on a day-to-day basis. 
Our Senior Vice President (SVP) of Corporate 
Communication and Affairs is secretary to the 
Group’s Executive Committee. She is 
responsible for the Group’s community 
involvement. The R&D function includes the 
Global Regulatory Affairs (GRA) group, which is 
responsible for ensuring that our products meet 
regulatory requirements and are safe for their 

intended use. Our SVP Human Resources (HR) 
and the global HR function manage the Group’s 
human resources, employee remuneration and 
benefits, employment practices, organisational 
development, training and elements of health 
and safety (eg stress management). 

Key areas of sustainability performance, 
including sustainability disclosures, are 
independently reviewed and verified by both 
internal and external organisations, including 
Internal Audit, and their findings regularly 
reported to senior management, the CEO, the 
Audit Committee and the Board. The Board has 
identified and assessed the range of 
sustainability and associated reputational risks 
and concluded that there are limited material 
risks to the Group’s long- and short-term value 
arising from sustainability matters, other than 
potential risks common to similarly sized 
businesses operating in its industry sectors and 
with similarly well-known brands.

The Group has a full set of policies, 
programmes and control arrangements, 
building on its central Code of Conduct, that 
address the full range of sustainability matters 
and reputational risks. The Code itself is the 
subject of an annual training and awareness 
programme, and is covered by an annual review 
and certification process carried out by Internal 
Audit and the Legal Department. The Code and 
other Group policies relating to sustainability 
can be found at www.rb.com.

Sustainability Focus Areas
The Group has identified the material 
sustainability issues for the business, following 
Accountability’s 5-Part Materiality Test and the 
GRI Technical Protocol on Applying the Report 
content Principles. This process includes an 
assessment of the Group’s potential 
sustainability risks, the issues of greatest 
concern for the Group’s stakeholders, the issues 
that society has identified as important through 
regulation and international standards and 
those issues covered by our existing policies  
and commitments.

Strategic Sustainability Priorities
The aspects the Group has identified are 
common to many FMCG companies with 
well-known brands and are essentially 

determined by the Group’s industrial sectors 
(health, hygiene and home) and the products 
the Group manufactures and sells. The Group’s 
strategic priorities therefore remain to: 

1.  Achieve continual improvement in our overall 
environmental performance, focusing on 
those issues where we can make a significant 
difference; and

2.  Manage our business in a socially and 

ethically responsible manner.

In September 2012, the Group announced a 
new approach to sustainability, in support of 
the Group’s new vision, purpose and business 
strategy. This approach includes three key 
targets. By 2020, the Group aims to achieve:

•	 	1/3	reduction	in	water	impact	per	dose	of	

product; and

•	 	1/3	further	reduction	in	carbon	footprint	per	

dose of product; and

•	 	1/3	of	net	revenue	from	more	sustainable	

products.

These three high-level goals are supported by a 
number of functional goals. The Group focuses 
on a number of specific topics to deliver against 
the strategic priorities. These include, but are 
not limited to:

Supply Chain Responsibility
Most product, component and raw material 
supply chains present a number of potential 
reputational risks relating to: labour standards; 
health, safety and environmental standards; 
raw material sourcing; and the social, ethical 
and environmental performance of third party 
manufacturers and other suppliers. The  
Group’s Global Manufacturing Standard (GMS) 
mandates minimum requirements regarding 
employment arrangements, labour standards 
and health, safety and environmental 
management, in line with international 
guidelines, for the Group’s own manufacturing 
sites and, from the end of 2012, third party 
manufacturers and suppliers. Management 
processes and controls in place include  
Group, area and regional monitoring and 
assessment of compliance with the GMS  
(and other) requirements.

Key Issues with Potential to have 
Material Impacts on the Business

Environment
•	 Resource	availability	and	use
•		 Water	quantity	and	quality
•	 Greenhouse	gas	(GHG)	emissions	reduction
•		 Waste	management
•		 Natural	raw	materials	sourcing
•	 	Operational	environment,	regulatory	

compliance

Social
•		 Occupational	health	&	safety
•		 Human	rights	and	labour	practices
•		 Responsible	and	ethical	supply	chain
•		 Impacts	of	demographic	change
•		 Transparency	on	products	and	ingredients
•		 Consumer	behaviour	change
•		 Talent	attraction
•		 Employee	engagement
•		 Charitable	donations/philanthropy

•	 	Product	(and	packaging)	use	and	disposal
•		 Pollution	(including	contaminated	land)
•		 Energy	use	efficiency
•		 Carbon	offsetting
•		 Product	regulation
•		 Sustainable	product	innovations

Governance
•		 Sustainability
•		 Corporate	governance
•		 Bribery	and	corruption
•		 Code	of	conduct
•	 Product	quality	and	compliance

15

2012Business Review 2012 continued

Climate Change
The effects of climate change could disrupt the 
Group’s supply chain by affecting the Group’s 
ability to source raw materials, manufacture 
products and distribute products. Due to the 
Group’s industry sectors and product categories 
the GHG emissions originating from energy use 
at its direct operations are of medium-to-low 
impact in comparison to those of other similarly 
sized companies, as assessed for example in 
recent reports of the independent Carbon 
Disclosure Project (CDP, www.cdproject. net); 
specifically, the GHG emissions from the 
Group’s global manufacturing operations are 
circa 270,000 tonnes CO2-equivalents per annum.

The Group has taken a leadership position with 
regard to its products’ total carbon footprint, by 
seeking to understand, measure and reduce the 
GHG emissions generated by all stages of the 
product lifecycle for its global product portfolio, 
and including amongst other things: the raw 
and packaging materials provided by its 
suppliers; the Group’s own direct manufacturing 
and other operations; transportation of both raw 
materials and finished products; the retail sale of 
its products; consumers’ use of its products; and 
the disposal/recycling of those products and their 
packaging. The Group publicly launched this 
initiative in November 2007, comprising its 
Carbon20 programme and the target to reduce 
its global products’ total carbon footprint across 
their complete lifecycle by 20% per dose by 
2020 versus a 2007 baseline.  

Health & Safety Management
Accidents caused through a failure of the 
Group’s safety management systems could 
potentially lead to loss of life for one or more of 
the Group’s employees. The Group maintains an 
external certification to OHSAS 18001 for the 
Group’s management of health and safety issues. 

Progress 
The Group’s most recent Sustainability Report, 
published on 31 May 2012, describes the 
progress made in key sustainability topics.  
This includes:

•	 	At	the	end	of	2011,	the	fourth	year	of	the	
Group’s Carbon20 programme, the total 
carbon footprint of the Group (measured per 
dose of product) reduced by 21% (26% 
including the former SSL business). This 
reduction in carbon emissions per dose 
means the Group met and exceeded its 
Carbon20 target for 2020 eight years ahead 
of schedule;

•	 	Planting	5.4m	native	trees	in	Canada	by	the	
end of 2011 (including 865,000 in 2011) 
which equates to an offset that effectively 
makes the Group’s manufacturing carbon 
neutral (2006-2011);

•	 	A	43%	reduction	in	manufacturing	energy	

per unit of production (2000-2011);

•	 	A	48%	reduction	in	GHG	emissions	from	

manufacturing sites (2000-2011);

•	 	A	16%	reduction	per	unit	of	production	in	

water use (2000-2011);

•	 	A	7%	reduction	per	unit	of	production	of	

waste (2000-2011);

16

•	 	A	92%	reduction	in	accident	rates	since	
2001, including a 3% reduction in lost 
working day accident frequency between 
2010 and 2011;

•	 	Regrettably,	in	2012,	one	RB	employee	lost	
his life while working for RB. The lessons 
learned have been communicated across the 
Group. There were no RB employee fatalities 
in 2010 and 2011;

•	 	Continued	support	of	the	international	

charity Save the Children, reaching 175,000 
children in 2011 (total 775,000 since 2003) 
and reaching over 40,000 women and 
230,000 other community members in 2011. 

The sustainability and corporate responsibility 
section on the Group’s website (www.rb.com/
Ourresponsibility) and its annual Sustainability 
Reports (available at www.rb.com) provide 
further information on its policies, systems and 
procedures for managing sustainability matters 
and the risks and opportunities that may arise 
from them, including: the extent to which it 
complies with those policies, systems and 
procedures; KPIs; and its sustainability 
programmes, targets and progress. The Group 
reports in line with the Global Reporting 
Initiative’s Sustainability Reporting Guidelines – 
Version 3.0 (GRI G3 – www.globalreporting.
org) and a Content Index and Application Level 
Table are provided in the Sustainability Report. 
Selected data in the annual Sustainability 
Report is assured by external auditors. For more 
information refer to the latest Report, released 
31 May 2012, at www.rb.com/sustainability-
report2011. 

FINANCIAL REVIEW
Basis of Preparation: The financial 
information is prepared in accordance with 
IFRSs as endorsed by the EU and IFRSs as issued 
by the International Accounting Standards 
Board, with applicable parts of the 2006 Act 
and with the accounting policies set out in note 
1 on pages 43 to 46.

Constant Exchange: Movements in exchange 
rates relative to Sterling affect actual results as 
reported. The constant exchange rate basis 
adjusts the comparative to exclude such 
movements, to show the underlying growth of 
the Group.

Net Revenue: Net revenue was £9,567m 
(2011: £9,485m), an increase of +1%.

Net Finance Expense: Net finance expense 
was £15m (2011: £19m), reflecting the 
acquisition of SSL and Paras. The 2011 net 
finance expense includes a £4m exceptional 
charge in respect of financing costs associated 
with the acquisition of SSL.

Tax: The effective tax rate was 24% (2011: 
26%). The decrease was due to a 2% reduction 
in the UK corporate tax, associated deferred tax 
benefits, and the favourable settlement of 
certain tax cases.

Net Working Capital: A new definition of net 
working capital, a key component of the 
Group’s focus on cash generation, has been 
used in 2012. This excludes corporate tax and 

other provisions. It is therefore a much closer 
proxy to RB’s true commercial net working 
capital performance. Comparatives have  
been restated on a consistent basis. Net 
working capital (inventories, trade and other 
receivables and trade and other payables) was 
minus £700m in line with the 31 December 
2011 level. 

Cash Flow: Cash generated from operating 
activities was £2,423m (2011: £2,430m) and 
net cash flow from operations was £1,735m 
(2011: £1,581m). Net interest paid was £7m 
(2011: £13m) and tax payments were £528m 
(2011: £677m). Capital expenditure was  
lower than the prior year at £177m (2011: 
£205m). Acquisition of businesses of £877m 
related to the acquisition of Schiff, and other 
minor acquisitions. 

Net Debt: At the end of the year net debt was 
£2,426m (2011: £1,795m), an increase of 
£631m. This reflected net cash flow from 
operations of £1,735m, offset by the 
acquisition of Schiff and other minor 
acquisitions for £877m (net of cash acquired), 
and the payment of two dividends totalling 
£916m. The Group regularly reviews its banking 
arrangements and currently has adequate 
facilities available to meet liquidity needs.

Exceptional Items: A total pre-tax exceptional 
charge of £135m has been incurred during the 
year in respect of the following: 

•	 	Remaining	restructuring	costs	in	respect	of	

the acquisition of SSL; and

•	 	Costs	associated	with	the	new	strategy	and	
private label business closure costs; and

•	 	Acquisition	costs	associated	with	the	

acquisition of Schiff and other acquisitions.

In 2011 an exceptional pre-tax charge of £96m 
was incurred, of which £92m is reflected in 
reported operating profit and £4m is included 
in net interest. In 2012 the £135m pre-tax 
charge is reflected in reported operating profit. 

Balance Sheet: At the end of 2012, the Group 
had total equity of £5,922m (2011: £5,781m), 
an increase of +2%. Net debt was £2,426m 
(2011: £1,795m) and total capital employed in 
the business was £8,348m (2011: £7,576m).

This finances non-current assets of £12,023m 
(2011: £11,188m), of which £737m (2011: 
£732m) is property, plant and equipment, the 
remainder being goodwill, other intangible 
assets, deferred tax, available for sale financial 
assets, retirement benefit surplus and other 
receivables. The Group has net working capital 
of minus £700m (2011: minus £701m), current 
provisions of £128m (2011: £60m) and 
long-term liabilities other than borrowings of 
£2,668m (2011: £2,642m).

The Group’s financial ratios remain strong. 
Return on Shareholders’ funds (net income 
divided by total Shareholders’ funds) was 
31.0% on a reported basis and 32.8% on an 
adjusted basis (2011: 30.3% on a reported 
basis and 31.6% on an adjusted basis).

2012Dividends: The Board recommends a final 
dividend of 78p per share (2011: 70p), an 
increase of +11%, to give a full year dividend 
of 134p per share (2011: 125p), an overall 
increase of +7%. The dividend, if approved by 
Shareholders at the AGM on 2 May 2013, will 
be paid on 30 May to Shareholders on the 
register at the record date of 22 February. The 
ex-dividend date is 20 February and the last 
date for election for the share alternative to the 
dividend is 8 May. The final dividend will be 
accrued once approved by Shareholders.

Contingent Liabilities: The Group is involved 
in a number of investigations by government 
authorities and has made provisions for such 
investigations, where appropriate. Where it is 
too early to determine the likely outcome of 
these matters, the Directors have made no 
provision for such potential liabilities. 

The Group has received a civil claim for 
damages from the Department of Health and 
others in the UK, regarding alleged anti-
competitive activity involving the Gaviscon 
brand. The claim is under review and at this 
time the Directors do not believe that any 
potential impact would be material to the 
Group financial statements.

The Group from time to time is involved in 
discussions in relation to ongoing tax matters in a 
number of jurisdictions around the world. Where 
appropriate, the Directors make provisions based 
on their assessment of each case.

PROSPECTS
We continue to target net revenue growth on 
average +200 bps per annum above our market 
growth, and moderate operating margin 
expansion (excluding RB Pharmaceuticals) in the 

medium-term. In 2012 we discontinued our 
private label business, and sold a number of 
small non core brands. 2013 will benefit from a 
number of acquisitions. Together they will have 
a net impact of c. +100 bps on net revenue. 
Taking these into account, we are targeting  
in 2013: 

•	 Net	revenue	growth	of	+5-6%*;	and

•	 	Further	increased	investment	in	our	brands	

(BEI); and 

•	 Maintain	operating	margins**.	

These targets exclude RB Pharmaceuticals. 

*   At constant rates including acquisitions and 
disposals/withdrawal from private label and 
other minor items, excluding RB 
Pharmaceuticals.

**  Adjusted to exclude the impact of 

exceptional items.

Post Balance Sheet Event 
On 8 January 2013 the Group obtained  
control of Oriental Medicine Company Limited, 
a manufacturer of traditional Chinese sore 
throat products, by acquiring 100% of the 
share capital. 

On 10 February 2013, the Group entered into  
a three-year collaboration agreement with 
Bristol-Myers Squibb, for a number of 
market-leading over-the-counter consumer 
health care brands in Brazil, Mexico and certain 
other parts of Latin America. The Group will 
make an upfront cash payment of $482m 
(c.£300m) to enter into the arrangement which 
also includes personnel, supply contracts and 
an option to acquire legal title to the related 
intellectual property at the end of the 

collaboration period for a multiple of earnings. 
The transaction will be accounted for as a 
business combination and the Directors are in 
the process of revaluing the assets and liabilities 
acquired to fair value, including the value of 
any acquired intangible assets.

Cautionary Note Concerning Forward 
Looking Statements
This document contains forward looking statements, 
including statements with respect to the financial 
condition, results of operations and business of RB 
and certain of the plans and objectives of the 
Company with respect to these items. These forward 
looking statements are made pursuant to the ‘Safe 
Harbor’ provisions of the United States Private 
Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. In particular, 
all statements that express forecasts, expectations and 
projections with respect to future matters, including 
trends in results of operations, margins, growth rates, 
overall market trends, the impact of interest or 
exchange rates, the availability of financing to the 
Company, anticipated cost savings or synergies and 
the completion of strategic transactions are forward 
looking statements. These forward looking statements 
are not guarantees of future performance: by their 
nature, forward looking statements involve known 
and unknown risk and uncertainty and other factors 
because they relate to events and depend on 
circumstances that will occur in the future. There are a 
number of factors, discussed in this Report, that could 
cause actual results and developments to differ 
materially from those expressed or implied by these 
forward looking statements, including many factors 
outside RB’s control. Past performance cannot be 
relied upon as a guide to future performance. Each 
forward looking statement speaks as of the date of 
the particular statement.

ANNUAL KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
The Board and the Executive Committee have identified a number of KPIs that are most relevant to the Group and are used to measure performance.
KPI 

Comments

2011 

2012 

Net revenue growth 
% like-for-like growth of net revenue 
at constant exchange rates 

+5% 

+4% 

Measures the increase in sales of the Group 

Powerbrands 
% of total net revenue from 19 Powerbrands 

70%  

70% 

Measures the growth and importance of the 
Group’s flagship brands

Gross margin % 
Gross profit as % of total net revenue  

Brand Equity Investment (BEI) 
BEI as % of total net revenue 

Operating margin %** 
Operating profit** as % of total net revenue

Earnings per share (fully diluted)** 
% change in earnings per share (fully diluted)** 

Net cash flow from operations 
See page 42 

Net working capital 
(defined as inventories, trade and other receivables and 
trade and other payables) as % of total net revenue 

Management turnover 

% of total net revenue (excl. RB Pharmaceuticals) in No.1 
or No.2 brand positions 

** Adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items.

57.9% 

57.4% 

Measures the resources available for reinvestment 
or profit growth

12.7%  

12.0% 

Measures the rate of reinvestment in the 
Group’s brands

26.9% 

26.2% 

Measures the profitability of the Group 

264.4p 
+7% 

£1,735m 
+10% 

-£700m 
-7.3% 

247.1p 
+9%

£1,581m 
+14%

-£701m 
-7.4% 

8% 

71% 

13% 

71% 

Measures the increase in profit per share of the Group 

Measures how the Group converts its profits into cash 

Measures the ability of the Group to finance 
its expansion and release cash from working capital 

% of Top400 management that have left the Group

Measures the health of the Group’s  
brand market positions

17

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Board of Directors and Executive Committee

THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS

Adrian Bellamy (British) ‡ # 
Was appointed a Non-Executive Director of the 
Company in 1999 and became Non-Executive 
Chairman in May 2003. He is a Director of 
The Gap Inc and a Director and Chairman of 
Williams-Sonoma Inc. He was Chairman of 
The Body Shop International plc until March 
2008 and was formerly a director of various 
companies including Gucci Group NV and The 
Robert Mondavi Corporation.

Richard Cousins (British) ‡  
Was appointed a Non-Executive Director of 
the Company in October 2009. He is CEO of 
Compass Group plc, the world’s largest catering 
company. He was until 2006 CEO of BPB plc, 
having held a number of positions with that 
company since 1990. He is a former Non-
Executive Director of P&O and HBOS.

Dr Peter Harf (German) # 
Joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director 
in 1999 and is the Deputy Chairman. He 
served as Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee until June 2004. Peter has been 
the CEO of Parentes Holding SE (formerly 
Joh. A. Benckiser), a privately held investment 
company, since 1988 and a Director of Coty 
Inc since 1996. He has been the Chairman of 
Labelux since 2008 and Chairman of the non-
profit DKMS foundation since 1991.

Adrian Hennah (British) 
Joined the Company in January 2013 as CFO 
Designate, and was appointed as Director and 
CFO on 12 February 2013. He joined following 
six years at Smith & Nephew plc as CFO. 
Previously he was CFO at Invensys for four years 
and spent 18 years at GlaxoSmithKline plc, 
where he held a number of senior management 
and financial roles. Adrian has also previously 
worked at PwC (then Price Waterhouse) in 
audit and consultancy. He is a Non-Executive 
Director of Reed Elsevier PLC, and a member of 
the Supervisory Board of Reed Elsevier NV.

Kenneth Hydon (British) * # 
Was appointed a Non-Executive Director in 
December 2003 and Chairman of the Audit 
Committee in November 2006. He is a Fellow 
of the Chartered Institute of Management 
Accountants, the Association of Chartered 
Certified Accountants and the Association 
of Corporate Treasurers. He was the Senior 
Independent Non-Executive Director between 
February 2005 and November 2006. He retired 
as CFO of Vodafone Group plc in July 2005 
and is a Non-Executive Director of Pearson plc. 
Kenneth retired from the Board of the Royal 
Berkshire NHS Foundation Trust in April 2012 
and from the Board of Tesco PLC in  
February 2013.

Rakesh Kapoor (Indian) # 
Joined the Board in September 2011 following 
his appointment as Chief Executive Officer 
(CEO) of the Company. He joined the Group 
in 1987 serving in various regional and central 
marketing roles. In 2001, he became SVP, 
Regional Director Northern Europe and was 
appointed EVP Category Development in 
2006 with responsibility for global category 
management, R&D, media, market research 
and strategic alliances.

18

André Lacroix (French) * 
Was appointed a Non-Executive Director in 
October 2008. He is Group Chief Executive 
of Inchcape plc and Chairman of Good 
Restaurants AG. He was previously Chairman 
and CEO of Euro Disney, and has also held 
positions at Burger King (Diageo), Colgate, 
PepsiCo and Ernst & Young LLP.

Graham Mackay (British/South African) ‡ # 
Was appointed a Non-Executive Director in 
February 2005 and the Senior Independent 
Director in November 2006. He is the Executive 
Chairman of SABMiller plc, one of the world’s 
largest brewers. He will become Non-Executive 
Chairman of SABMiller in July 2013. He joined 
the then South African Breweries Limited in 
1978 and has held a number of senior positions 
within that group. He joined the Board of Philip 
Morris International Inc in October 2008.

Judith Sprieser (American) ‡ # 
Was appointed a Non-Executive Director 
in August 2003 and has been Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee since June 2004. 
She was previously CEO of Transora, Inc., an 
e-commerce software and service company and 
Executive Vice President (formerly CFO) of Sara 
Lee Corporation. She is a Director of Allstate 
Insurance Company, InterContinental Exchange, 
Inc., Royal Ahold NV and Experian plc.

Warren Tucker (British) * 
Was appointed a Non-Executive Director in 
February 2010. He has been CFO of Cobham 
plc since 2003. He is a chartered accountant 
and previously held senior finance positions at 
Cable & Wireless plc and British Airways plc.

* Member of the Audit Committee 

‡ Member of the Remuneration Committee 

# Member of the Nomination Committee

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

Heather Allen (Canadian) 
EVP, Category Development. Joined in 
1996 from Procter & Gamble. She undertook 
a number of senior marketing roles in Eastern 
Europe, before becoming Marketing Director 
US in 1999. She was appointed General 
Manager Canada in 2003 and joined the 
global head office in the UK in 2006 as Global 
Category Officer germ protection, surface 
and personal care. She was appointed to her 
current role in May 2011.

Salvatore Caizzone (Italian) 
EVP, RUMEA. Joined in 1996, serving in several 
roles in Italy, Russia & Baltics. He was SVP Africa 
& Middle East region for eight years before 
being appointed EVP, Europe. Salvatore is 
responsible for Russia & CIS, Middle East, North 
Africa, Turkey and Sub-Saharan Africa and is 
headquartered in Dubai.

Freddy Caspers (German) 
EVP, LAPAC (until 30 June 2013). Joined in 
1997 as EVP for Eastern Europe. Previously 
at PepsiCo and Johnson & Johnson. He held 
various roles in Europe, US, Eastern Europe, 
Turkey and the global head office. Freddy is 
responsible for Latin America, North Asia, 
South East Asia, and Australia and New 
Zealand, and is headquartered in Singapore.

Amedeo Fasano (Italian) 
EVP, Supply. Joined in 1997 as Supply Director 
Italy. After the Reckitt & Colman and Benckiser 
merger, he was appointed Manufacturing 
Director for Central, South Western and 
Southern Europe Regions. In 2002 he became 
Regional Supply Director North America and in 
2003 SVP Supply North America, Australia and 
New Zealand. In 2007 he took over the role of 
SVP Supply Developing Markets and in March 
2009 Amedeo was appointed as EVP Supply. 
He previously worked for Pirelli Tyres in multiple 
Supply roles in Italy, Turkey, Argentina and UK.

Roberto Funari (Brazilian) 
EVP, LAPAC (from 1 July 2013). Rejoined in 
February 2013 following two years at Imperial 
Tobacco where he was Group Marketing 
Director and Executive Committee member. 
In his prior 12-year career with the Group, 
Roberto held increasingly senior marketing and 
general management roles in both emerging 
and developed markets, including Brazil, 
Netherlands, South Africa and Central Europe. 
His last role was as Global Category Officer for 
fabric and home care. 

Rob de Groot (Dutch)  
EVP, ENA. Joined in 1988. After international 
roles in marketing and sales he became General 
Manager The Netherlands, then SVP, Regional 
Director Eastern Europe and was appointed 
Global Category Officer, surface and dish 
before being appointed EVP North America 
& Australia. Rob is responsible for North 
America, Northern Europe, Central Europe, 
Southern Europe and Western Europe and is 
headquartered in Amsterdam.

Adrian Hennah (British) 
Chief Financial Officer (CFO). 

Gareth Hill (South African) 
SVP, Information Services. Joined in 2006. 
Previously Information Systems Director at 
Arcadia Group Ltd. Prior to Arcadia, Gareth 
was at IBM UK Ltd, Rex Trueform Clothing Ltd 
in South Africa and Arthur Andersen. He is a 
qualified chartered accountant.

Rakesh Kapoor (Indian)  
Chief Executive Officer (CEO). 

Simon Nash (British) 
SVP, Human Resources. Joined in 2009 from 
Novartis Consumer Health, where he was 
Global Head of HR for the Consumer Health 
division, based in Switzerland. Simon started his 
international career with Procter & Gamble in 
detergent manufacturing, before moving into 
HR with Mars Confectionery. He moved to New 
York in 1993 with Kraft Foods International and 
then on to Chicago as HR Head of the office 
products subsidiary of Fortune Brands Inc.

2012Report of the Directors

The Directors submit their Annual Report 
and financial statements for the year 
ended 31 December 2012 to the members 
of the Company.

Principal Activities and Future 
Developments
Information on the principal activities and 
future developments of the Group is set out  
in the Business Review on pages 10 to 17 and 
in the Chief Executive’s Statement on pages  
2 to 8 respectively.

Audited results for the period are set out on 
pages 39 to 74. 

In the view of the Directors, the Group’s likely 
future developments will centre on its main 
product categories of health, hygiene and home. 

The Review of the Group’s Business
The performance of the business is described in 
the Chairman’s Statement on page 1 and the 
Business Review. Within the Business Review, 
principal risk factors are given under 
‘Relationships and Principal Risks’ on pages 13 to 
15, KPIs are given on page 17 and information 
on the likely future developments of the Group 
is under ‘Prospects’ on page 17 and in the Chief 
Executive’s statement on pages 2 to 8. 
Information regarding environmental matters, 
the Company’s employees and social and 
community issues is given on pages 15 to 16. 
Information about persons with whom the 
Company has contractual or other arrangements 
which are essential to the business of the 
Company is given on page 13 to 14.

The Group’s financial risk management 
objectives and policies are set out on pages 14 
to 15 of the Business Review and in note 14 on 
pages 59 to 63.

The information referred to above is 
incorporated by reference into, and shall be 
deemed to form part of, this Report and, 
together with the other information referred to 
in this Report, fulfils the requirements of the 
business review provisions of s.417 of the 
Companies Act 2006 (2006 Act). This Report of 
the Directors has been drawn up and presented 
in accordance with, and in reliance upon, 
applicable UK company law and the liabilities of 
the Directors in connection with this Report 
shall be subject to the limitations and 
restrictions provided by such law.

Dividend
In July 2012, the Directors resolved to pay an 
interim dividend of 56p per ordinary share 
(2011: 55p). The dividend was paid on 27 
September 2012. The Directors are recommending 
a final dividend for the year of 78p per share 
(2011: 70p) which, together with the interim 
dividend, makes a total for the year of 134p per 
share (2011: 125p). The final dividend, if 
approved by the Shareholders, will be paid on 
30 May 2013 to Shareholders on the register at 
the close of business on 22 February 2013.

Research and Development
The Group continues to carry out R&D in the 
search for new and improved products in all its 
categories and for increased manufacturing 
efficiencies. Direct expenditure on R&D in 2012 
amounted to £171m (2011: £153m).

Acquisitions and Disposals
Information on the Company’s acquisition and 
disposal activities during the year and up to the 
date of this Report is set out in the Business 
Review on page 10 under ‘Nature, Objectives 
and Strategies of the Business’. 

Liz Doherty, who served on the Board as CFO 
resigned as a Director of the Company on  
12 February 2013. Adrian Hennah joined the 
Company as CFO designate on 2 January 2013 
and formally joined the Board as CFO and 
Executive Director on 12 February 2013.

Employees 
During 2012, the Group employed an average 
of 35,900 (2011: 37,800) people worldwide, of 
whom 3,700 (2011: 3,500) were employed in 
the UK. The Group is committed to the 
principle of equal opportunity in employment: 
no applicant or employee receives less 
favourable treatment on the grounds of 
nationality, age, gender, religion or disability. 
The Group recognises its responsibilities to 
disabled persons and endeavours to assist them 
to make their full contribution at work. Where 
employees become disabled, every practical 
effort is made to allow them to continue in 
their jobs or to provide retraining in suitable 
alternative work.

It is essential to the continued improvement in 
efficiency and productivity throughout the 
Group that each employee understands the 
Group’s strategies, policies and procedures. 

Open and regular communication with 
employees at all levels is an essential part of the 
management process. A continuing programme 
of training and development reinforces the 
Group’s commitment to employee development. 

Regular departmental meetings are held where 
opinions of employees are sought on a variety of 
issues. The Group operates multi-dimensional 
internal communications programmes which 
include the provision of a Group intranet and the 
publication of regular Group newsletters.

Group incentive schemes reinforce financial and 
economic factors affecting the performance of 
the business. All employees typically have three 
to five performance objectives which are 
directly linked to their job and their specific 
contribution to the overall performance of the 
Group. In addition, presentations and videos 
are given to employees around the Group on 
publication of the Group’s financial results. 
The Board encourages employees to become 
Shareholders and to participate in the Group’s 
employee share ownership schemes, should 
they so wish. Sharesave schemes covering most 
of the world give employees the opportunity to 
acquire shares in the Company by means of 
regular savings.

Directors
The following people served as Directors of the 
Company during the year:
Adrian Bellamy
Richard Cousins
Liz Doherty 
Peter Harf
Kenneth Hydon
Rakesh Kapoor 
André Lacroix
Graham Mackay
Judith Sprieser
Warren Tucker 

Full biographical details of the current Directors 
are set out on page 18.

Directors’ Interests
A statement of Directors’ interests in the share 
capital of the Company is shown in Table 1 at 
the end of this report.

Details of Directors’ options to subscribe for 
shares in the Company are included in Table 4 
on page 37 in the audited part of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

No Director had a material interest at any time 
during the year in any derivative or financial 
instrument relating to the Company’s shares. 
The details of the Directors’ remuneration and 
service agreements are set out in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 31 to 37.

Environmental, Social and Governance 
(ESG) Matters 
Information on ESG and related matters is set 
out in the Business Review on pages 15 to 16.

Sustainability and Corporate Responsibility
Information on the Group’s management of 
sustainability and corporate responsibility issues 
is provided in the Business Review on pages 15 
to 16 and in the Group’s annual Sustainability 
Reports, which provide information on its 
policies, programmes, targets and progress in 
this area.

Policy on the Payment of Creditors
The Company has signed up to the CBI Prompt 
Payment Code (PP Code). The PP Code 
promotes best practice between the Company 
and its suppliers within clearly defined terms 
and encourages a clear process for dealing with 
issues. This certainty on payment and processes 
inspires confidence across the supply chain 
which benefits the Company and its suppliers. 
Copies of the Prompt Payment Code are 
available from CBI, Centre Point, 103 New 
Oxford Street, London WC1A 1DU.

Charitable Donations
The Group has continued its strategy of 
focusing on the Group’s nominated global 
charity, Save the Children. During the year, 
donations in the UK amounted to £1,897,192 
(2011: £1,576,799) of which £1,841,573 
(2011: £977,849) was donated to Save the 
Children. The total donated to Save the 
Children was £3.5m (2011: £2m) including 
funds raised by RB companies and employees 
around the world. 

Takeover Directive
The Company is required to disclose certain 
additional information required by s.992 of the 
2006 Act, which implemented the EU Takeovers 
Directive. The following sets out disclosures not 
covered elsewhere in this Annual Report.

The Articles give the Board power to appoint 
Directors, but also require Directors to submit 
themselves for election at the first AGM 
following their appointment. Under the 
Articles, all Directors are required to offer 
themselves for re-election every three years. 

19

2012Report of the Directors continued

The Board is responsible for the management 
of the business of the Company and may 
exercise all the powers of the Company subject 
to the provisions of the Company’s Articles. 

Treasury. Details of changes to the ordinary 
shares issued and of options and awards 
granted during the year are set out in note  
23 to the financial statements.

The Articles contain specific provisions and 
restrictions regarding the Company’s power to 
borrow money. Powers relating to the alteration 
of share capital are also included in the Articles 
and Shareholders are asked to renew such 
authorities each year at the AGM. A copy of 
the Articles is available from the corporate 
website www.rb.com or on written request 
from the Company Secretary or from the UK 
Registrar of Companies.

Unless expressly specified to the contrary in the 
Articles, the Company’s Articles may be 
amended by a special resolution of the 
Company’s Shareholders.

There are a number of agreements that take 
effect, alter or terminate upon a change of 
control of the Company following a takeover, 
such as commercial contracts, bank agreements, 
property lease arrangements and employee 
share plans. None of these are deemed to be 
significant in terms of their potential impact on 
the business of the Group as a whole.

There are no significant agreements between 
the Company and its Directors or employees 
providing for compensation for loss of office or 
employment that occurs because of a takeover 
bid, except that provisions of the Company’s 
share plans may cause options and awards 
granted under such plans to vest on a takeover.
There is no information that the Company 
would be required to disclose about persons 
with whom it has contractual or other 
arrangements which are essential to the 
business of the Company.

Corporate Governance Statement
In compliance with the Disclosure and 
Transparency Rules (DTR) 7.2.1, the disclosures 
required by DTR 7.2.2 to 7.2.7 are set out in 
this Report of the Directors and in the 
Corporate Governance Report on pages 24 to 
29 which together with the Statement of 
Directors’ Responsibilities are incorporated by 
reference into this Report of the Directors.

Independent Auditors
The auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, 
have indicated their willingness to continue in 
office and a resolution that they be  
re-appointed will be proposed at the AGM.

Share Capital
As at 31 December 2012, the Company’s issued 
share capital consisted of 719,219,114 ordinary 
shares of 10p each with voting rights and 
14,991,643 ordinary shares of 10p each held in 

The rights and obligations attaching to the 
Company’s ordinary shares are set out in  
the Articles. 

There are no restrictions on the voting rights 
attaching to the Company’s ordinary shares or 
the transfer of securities in the Company 
except, in the case of transfers of securities:

•	 	That	certain	restrictions	may	from	time	to	
time be imposed by laws and regulations 
(for example, insider trading laws); and
•	 	Pursuant	to	the	Listing	Rules	of	the	United	
Kingdom Listing Authority whereby certain 
employees of the Company require the 
approval of the Company to deal in the 
Company’s ordinary shares.

No person holds securities in the Company 
which carry special voting rights with regard to 
control of the Company. The Company is not 
aware of any agreements between holders of 
securities that may result in restrictions on the 
transfer of securities or on voting rights.

Allotment of Shares
The Directors were granted authority at the last 
AGM held in 2012 to allot shares up to a 
nominal amount of £21,559,809. That 
authority will apply until the conclusion of this 
year’s AGM. At this year’s AGM on 2 May 
2013, Shareholders will be asked to grant an 
authority to make such allotments up to a 
nominal amount representing approximately 
one-third of the Company’s issued share capital 
as at the latest practicable date prior to the 
publication of the Notice of AGM. In line with 
guidance issued by the Association of British 
Insurers, Shareholders will also be asked to 
grant an authority to allot shares in connection 
with a rights issue in favour of Shareholders up 
to an aggregate nominal amount representing 
approximately two-thirds of the issued ordinary 
share capital of the Company as at the latest 
practicable date prior to publication of the 
Notice of AGM. The authorities sought would, 
if granted, expire at the earlier of 30 June 2014 
or at the conclusion of the AGM of the 
Company held in 2014. The Board has 
confirmed that, in accordance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code (Code), all the 
Directors will submit themselves for re-election/
election at this year’s AGM and at future AGMs.

A special resolution will also be proposed to 
renew the Directors’ power to make non-pre-
emptive issues for cash up to a nominal amount 
representing less than 5% of the Company’s 

issued share capital as at the latest practicable 
date prior to the publication of the Notice  
of AGM. 

Authority to Purchase Own Shares
Shareholders approved a resolution for the 
Company to make purchases of its own shares 
at the AGM in 2012. The Directors announced 
their intention to commence a share repurchase 
programme during 2012 for the repurchase of 
up to 15m shares for the purpose of offsetting 
the dilutive impact of employee share schemes.

In accordance with that announcement and the 
authority granted at the AGM in 2012, market 
purchases of 14,991,643 of the Company’s 
ordinary shares were made during 2012 at a 
total cost of £535m including stamp duty. The 
Directors have also announced an intention to 
make further market purchases of up to 6m 
shares during 2013. The authority granted at 
the AGM in 2012 remains valid until the 
conclusion of this year’s AGM on 2 May 2013 
and the Directors will seek to renew the 
authority to make market purchases through a 
resolution to be put to Shareholders at this 
year’s AGM so that the announced purchase of 
up to 6m shares can be completed. This 
authority will be limited to a maximum of 
73,400,000 ordinary shares and sets the 
minimum and maximum prices which may be 
paid. The Company’s present intention is to 
hold shares acquired under such authority in 
Treasury to satisfy outstanding awards under 
employee share incentive plans.

Annual General Meeting
The Notice convening the sixth AGM of the 
Company, to be held on Thursday, 2 May 2013 
at 11.15 am at the London Heathrow Marriott 
Hotel, Bath Road, Hayes, Middlesex UB3 5AN, 
is contained in a separate document  
for Shareholders. 

In accordance with the Shareholder Rights’ 
Directive (Directive) which came into force in 
August 2009, the Company obtained 
Shareholder approval at the AGM in 2012 to 
call meetings, other than Annual General 
Meetings, on 14 clear days’ notice. Prior to the 
implementation of the Directive, the Company 
was able to call meetings other than an AGM 
on 14 clear days’ notice without obtaining 
Shareholder approval and, to preserve this 
ability, Shareholders will be asked to renew 
their approval by passing Resolution 20 at  
the AGM. 

Although Article 78 governs the retirement of 
Directors by rotation, the Board has agreed that 
all the Directors will submit themselves for 
re-election/election at this year’s AGM and at 
future AGMs in compliance with the Code.

Substantial Shareholdings 
As at 1 March 2013, the Company had received the following notices of substantial interests  
(3% or more) in the total voting rights of the Company:

JAB Holdings B.V. 
Massachusetts Financial Services Company and/or its subsidiaries 
Invesco Limited 

10.67  76,659,342 
5.09  36,601,704 
5.00  35,901,027 

% of total  
voting rights 

No of
ordinary 
shares 

Nature of 
holding

Indirect
Indirect 
Indirect

By Order of the Board
Elizabeth Richardson 
Company Secretary 
Reckitt Benckiser Group plc 
103-105 Bath Road  
Slough, Berkshire SL1 3UH 

Company registration number: 6270876

8 March 2013

20

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 1 – Interests in the Share Capital of the Company
The Directors in office at the end of the year and those in office at 1 March 2013 had the following beneficial interests (unless stated otherwise) in the 
ordinary shares of the Company:

Adrian Bellamy 

Richard Cousins 

Liz Doherty (resigned 12 February 2013) 

Peter Harf 

Adrian Hennah (appointed 12 February 2013)   

Kenneth Hydon 

Rakesh Kapoor (3) 

André Lacroix 

Graham Mackay 

Judith Sprieser 

Warren Tucker 

1 March 2013 

31 December 2012 

31 December 2011

21,966 

2,262 

n/a 

3,806 

– 

5,337 

21,966 

2,262 

14,000 

3,806 

n/a 

5,337 

20,955

587

7,000

3,491

n/a

5,154

  281,869 

  281,869 

  244,875

2,086 

2,187 

3,631 

1,527 

2,086 

2,187 

3,631 

1,527 

1,911

2,012

3,431

1,344

Notes
1.  No person who was a Director (or a Director’s connected person) on 31 December 2012 and at 1 March 2013 had any notifiable share interests  

in any subsidiary.

2. The Company’s Register of Directors’ Interests (which is open to inspection) contains full details of Directors’ shareholdings and options to subscribe.
3. As previously disclosed, includes 239,731 shares pledged as security.

21

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Chairman’s Statement on Corporate Governance

The UK Corporate Governance Code (Code) 
issued by the Financial Reporting Council 
(FRC) in May 2010 was applicable to the 
Company throughout the financial year 
ended 31 December 2012. A new version of 
the Code, which applies to financial years 
beginning on or after 1 October 2012, was 
published by the FRC in September 2012 and, 
although not immediately applicable,  
the Board will report on early compliance  
where appropriate. 

20 years on from Cadbury’s report, effective 
corporate governance in UK corporations 
remains high on the agenda for both company 
boards and their Shareholders. There is 
increasing scrutiny and visibility of successes 
and failures. The Board is sensitive to recent 
Shareholder activism which has placed the 
quality of boards and the level of their rewards 
in the spotlight. The Board takes seriously its 
responsibility for balancing effective corporate 
governance and delivery of long-term 
Shareholder and stakeholder reward and Board 
decisions are taken in light of these 
considerations. I am pleased to report to you 
directly on RB’s governance activities.

RB and Governance
The Board believes that implementing and 
maintaining high governance standards 
underpin our business objectives and our drive 
to create and maximise Shareholder value. In 
addition to compliance with the best practice 
advice from regulatory and governance bodies, 
the Board ensures that high ethical standards 
are reflected in business behaviour and culture 
through RB’s global Code of Conduct which 
enables management to add ethical and 
behavioural standards to the legal and 
regulatory obligations existing in the areas and 
communities in which we operate. All 
employees and contractors are required to 
complete an annual conduct training course 
which includes the review of the global Code of 
Conduct policy. Statistics on employee 
compliance are subject to review by the Audit 
Committee. The Company also operates an 
active whistleblowing hotline, the reports from 
which are reviewed by the Audit Committee.

Annual Re-elections
All the Directors submitted themselves for 
re-election at the 2012 AGM and will submit 
themselves for re-election at the 2013 AGM 
and at future AGMs in compliance with  
the Code.

Diversity
The Company operates within a corporate 
diversity and inclusion policy framework which 
is reviewed by the Executive Committee. The 
Davies recommendation for boards to have a 
minimum of 25% female representation by 
2015 and the draft EU directive which sets an 
objective for EU-listed companies to achieve 
40% representation of ‘the under-represented 
sex’ among Non-Executive Directors (by 2018 
for listed companies) are aspirations which the 
Company considers carefully as part of its 
recruitment exercises. 

Liz Doherty stepped down from the Board and 
her executive role as CFO in February 2013. The 
resulting Board composition is now 10% 

22

female down from 20% in 2012. The Board 
reiterates its view that ensuring, facilitating and 
driving diversity in its broadest sense has helped 
propel the Company’s success to date and it 
remains its practice to ensure that the 
Company’s Top40 executive roles, in particular, 
are open to fresh thinking and must include 
personnel from different global backgrounds 
who bring new ideas to the table. The 
Company values its freedom to retain a group 
of people who, collectively, have the skills, 
experience and insight to achieve the 
Company’s global vision and objectives and to 
achieve long-term value growth without being 
hindered by a gender quota which does not 
take cognisance of the specific situation and 
culture of the Company. As at 12 February 2013:

•	 	10%	of	the	Board	is	female	and	50%	is	

non-UK nationals; 

•	 	11%	of	the	Executive	Committee	is	female	

and 78% is non-UK nationals; and

•	 	15%	of	the	Top40	managers	is	female	and	

70% is non-UK nationals. 

Additionally, 17.5% of the Top40 managers can 
be classed as black or minority ethnic. When 
added to the number of female Top40 
managers, 32.5% of the Top40 managers come 
from the groups usually under-represented in 
similar organisations.  

All RB employees understand their personal 
responsibility for ensuring that diversity policies 
and programmes are actively pursued, 
implemented and maintained. The Company 
does not set specific targets in absolute 
percentage terms to deter artificiality in the 
process; it measures progress year on year to 
ensure an improving picture on gender balance 
which contributes to the Company’s growth 
and success. As at 1 January 2013:

•	 	41%	of	the	Group’s	professional	population	

of 7,640 is female; and

•	 	16%	of	the	Group’s	Top400	population	 

is female.

Gender balance has improved consistently 
across the professional population. Within the 
Top400, gender balance has improved with 
recruitment over the past 12 months.

16, 44 and 94 nationalities are represented in 
the Top40, Top400 and professional 
populations respectively.

Board Evaluation 
The Code recommends that FTSE 350 
companies should undertake an external 
evaluation at least once every three years. The 
2009 to 2011 Board evaluations and the recent 
evaluation for the year ended 2012 were all 
undertaken internally. The Board reported in 
last year’s Annual Report its intention to 
undertake an external evaluation in 2012. A 
detailed review process was undertaken by the 
Company Secretary and I reviewed a shortlist of 
external evaluation service providers. Due to 
Company specific circumstances including the 
recent change of CFO which followed the 
appointment of new Executive Directors in 
2011, I decided, in consultation with my Board 
colleagues, that an internal performance 

evaluation would be more appropriate for the 
Company for 2012. The Board recognises the 
benefits an external evaluation can bring to 
Board processes and will consider the 
recommendations of the Code in this regard for 
its 2013 performance evaluations. 

This situation will be reviewed in the context of 
a new CFO in Adrian Hennah and the potential 
appointment of additional Non-Executive 
Directors to the Board. The benefit of giving 
any new directors time to settle in their roles 
and to develop a good understanding of the 
Company will be weighted against the benefit 
to be had from an externally facilitated 
evaluation. A decision will be taken as to 
whether an externally facilitated evaluation will 
be of better benefit during 2013 or 2014.

A detailed internal evaluation was undertaken 
for the year ended 2012. A memo inviting open 
comments was circulated by the Company 
Secretary to the Directors approximately six 
weeks before the meeting and I developed a 
framework for the evaluation meeting from the 
responses. These were distilled into the key 
topics of corporate strategy, investor relations, 
risk management, offsite Board meeting, time 
management, advance papers to the Board and 
people and succession planning. These issues 
were subsequently discussed at the following 
review meeting together with a progress 
update on the issues highlighted at the  
2011 evaluation. 

Further information is set out in the 
performance evaluation section on page 26  
of this Report.

Succession Planning
Succession planning to the Board and senior 
management roles was one of the actions 
arising from the 2010 Board evaluation and the 
Board has given this due attention in successive 
years. One key aspect is the Directors’ desire to 
ensure that members of RB’s senior 
management are given more Board and external 
exposure. Progress continues to be made in this 
area and part of that progress is to ensure 
diversity in succession planning. Progress to date 
is reflected in the increased number of females 
that have joined the Top40 and other senior 
management roles across the Group. Additional 
information on RB’s succession planning activities 
at senior management levels is at ‘Resources’ on 
pages 12 to 13 of the Business Review.

Composition of the Board
The current Board includes Peter Harf who, as a 
Shareholder-nominated Director, was not 
independent on appointment. Both Peter and I 
have served on the Board for more than nine 
years. In addition, Judith Sprieser and Kenneth 
Hydon have now been on the Board for a 
period just exceeding nine years. Judith and 
Kenneth are also Chairs of the Remuneration 
and Audit Committees respectively. The Board 
is keen to ensure compliance with the 
recommendations of the Code but also 
recognises that both Kenneth and Judith have 
been diligent servants of the Company and 
continue to add value to the activities of the 
Company as a whole. The Company is actively 
looking to recruit additional Non-Executive 
Directors who will bring a range of diverse skills 

2012and perspective to the Board’s activities but this 
will take time. To ensure continuity and a 
successful transition, the Board has decided to 
recommend that Judith and Kenneth be 
re-appointed to the Board at the 2013 AGM. 
The composition of the Board is one of the key 
actions to which I continue to give my full 
attention and appropriate recommendations 
will be made in due course. 

As part of the review of the Board’s 
effectiveness, the documents setting out the 
matters reserved for the Board and the 
delegations to the CEO, together with the 
terms of reference for the Board Committees, 
were reviewed and updated, where necessary, 
to ensure that they continue to reflect the spirit 
and emphasis of the Code, remain fit for 
purpose and relevant to how RB operates. 

Explanation on Areas of Non-compliance 
(strict interpretation)
The Board recognises that the objective of the 
Code is to facilitate management’s delivery of 
business success in a transparent and 
responsible manner. The Code does not impose 
a rigid set of rules and recognises that certain 
actions and behaviours do not automatically 
imply poor organisational governance. 

The Board has authorised an explanation for 
the following areas where a strict interpretation 
might lead to a perception of non-compliance 
with certain areas of the Code: 

•	 	I,	as	the	Chairman,	and	Peter	Harf,	the	
Deputy Chairman and Shareholder-
nominated Director, have both served on the 
Board for more than nine years and will be 
offering ourselves for re-election at the 2013 
AGM; and

•	 	Kenneth	Hydon	and	Judith	Sprieser	have	

now been on the Board for nine years each 
and are currently the Chairs of the Audit and 
Remuneration Committees respectively. The 
Company continues to benefit from the skills 
and experience they bring to their roles and 
they will offer themselves for re-election at 
the 2013 AGM. Whilst recognising that it is 
important that the Board retains relevant 
knowledge and experience to continue its 
delivery of Shareholder value and to provide 
continuity and consistency in the 
development and application of the 
Company’s strategic objectives, the Board 
will review Kenneth and Judith’s 
chairmanship of the respective Committees 
and will continue its efforts to refresh the 
membership of the Board in the short-term.

The Board has instructed me to confirm that, 
notwithstanding the foregoing disclosures and 
following the detailed performance evaluation 
undertaken during 2012, each Director’s 
independence of thought and actions was 
assured and all decisions were taken to 
promote the success of RB as a whole. 

Statement of Compliance with the Code
The Corporate Governance Report on pages 24 
to 29 contains a summary of the Company’s 
governance arrangements as required under 
the Code. Except as explained above, the 
Company has complied with the Code 
throughout the year ended 31 December 2012. 

Adrian Bellamy  
Chairman
8 March 2013

23

2012Corporate Governance Report

The Company enjoys a premium listing on 
the London Stock Exchange and is 
therefore required to produce a Corporate 
Governance Statement containing the 
information set out in this Report. This 
Report is prepared with reference to the 
Financial Reporting Council’s UK Corporate 
Governance Code (Code) in effect for the 
financial periods beginning on or after 29 June 
2010. This Report sets out how the Company 
has applied the Main Principles of the Code 
throughout the year ended 31 December 2012.

A: Leadership

A.1: THE ROLE OF THE BOARD 
The Board leads and controls RB’s business  
with a Board structure similar to that of its  
key international competitor companies  
which are mainly based in the US. The Board 
approves strategy, carries out an advisory  
and supervisory role and accepts ultimate 
responsibility for the conduct of RB’s business. 
The schedule of matters reserved for the 
Board’s decision includes:

•	 	Takeover	offers	and	the	response	to	any	

takeover approach;

•	 	Significant	acquisitions,	disposals	and	capital	

expenditure projects;

•	 	Final	approval	of	annual	budgets	and	

corporate plans;

•	 	Approval	of	financial	statements	and	

Shareholder communications;

•	 	Treasury	policies	and	risk	management	

policies;

•	 	Significant	changes	to	borrowing	facilities	or	

foreign currency transactions; and

•	 	Review	and	approval	of	recommendations	

from the Committees of the Board. 

The annual review of this schedule was 
undertaken in November 2012 as part of the 
performance evaluations conducted for the 
2012 financial year. 

The principal activities undertaken by the Board 
are set out in the Business Review on pages 10 
to 17.

Meetings 
Board meetings are structured to allow open 
discussion. The Board meets a minimum of five 
times a year and constitutes additional 
meetings (including by telephone or written 
resolutions) to consider specific matters which it 
has reserved to itself for decision. 

In 2012, there were five regular Board meetings 
(plus one additional meeting). There were four 
Audit Committee meetings, four Remuneration 
Committee meetings (plus one additional 
meeting) and one Nomination Committee 
meeting. The table below sets out the 
attendance by individual Directors at scheduled 
Board and Committee meetings.

Directors’ Insurance and Indemnities
The Directors benefit from the indemnity 
provision in the Company’s Articles of 
Association. Each individual, who is an Officer 
of the Company and/or of any company within 
RB at any time on or after 28 July 2009, 
benefits from a deed poll of indemnity in 
respect of the costs of defending claims against 
him or her and third party liabilities. Directors’ 
and Officers’ liability insurance cover was 
maintained throughout the year at the 
Company’s expense. 

A.2: DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES 
There is a clear division of responsibilities 
between the Chairman and the CEO. The 
Chairman is responsible for the overall 
operation, leadership and governance of  
the Board. 

The CEO is responsible for the executive 
management of RB’s business, consistent with 
the strategy and commercial objectives agreed 
by the Board. The CEO chairs the Executive 
Committee and, together with the CFO, certain 
Group functional heads and Area EVPs he 
appoints to the Committee, provides the 
day-to-day management of the Company. 
Biographical details of the members of the 
Executive Committee are set out on page 18. 
The matters delegated to the CEO by the  
Board include:

•	 	Power	to	delegate	the	day-to-day	

management of the business of the 
Company to each of the Officers of the 

Executive Committee, acting individually or 
as a group or sub-committee. During the 
year, this power was used to establish an 
internal Disclosure Committee to assist the 
CEO and CFO with regulatory disclosure 
controls and procedures;

•	 	Power	to	acquire	and	dispose	of	businesses	

and to approve unbudgeted capital 
expenditure projects subject, in each case, to 
a £50m limit; and

•	 	Power	to	instruct	advisers	and	to	instigate	

legal proceedings on behalf of the Company 
in respect of matters for which no further 
Board authority is required.

A.3: THE CHAIRMAN
The Chairman, who was independent on 
appointment, is responsible for leading the 
Board and enabling the Directors to operate 
effectively as one unit to determine the 
strategy, risk appetite and governance structure 
necessary to deliver Shareholder value in a 
transparent and responsible manner. His 
responsibilities include:

•	 	Chairing	and	ensuring	that	Board	meetings	
provide a forum that encourages open 
debate and effective contributions from 
individual Directors with sufficient time 
allocated to key issues; 

•	 	Developing	an	effective	working	relationship	
with the CEO whilst recognising the need to 
maintain the balance between critical 
friendship and executive responsibility;

•	 	Finalising	the	Board	meeting	agenda	

developed by the CEO and the  
Company Secretary;

•	 	Sponsoring	and	promoting	governance	and	

ethical practices;

•	 	Encouraging	dialogue	between	the	Company	
and its Shareholders and other stakeholders 
and facilitating the Board’s understanding of 
Shareholders’ concerns;

•	 	Overseeing	the	induction,	information	and	

support provisions for Directors; and

•	 	Leading	the	annual	performance	evaluation	

of the Board and its Committees.

Number of Scheduled Meetings Attended during 2012 
Note 

Board 

Audit 

 Remuneration 

  Nomination

Adrian Bellamy 

Richard Cousins 

Liz Doherty 

Peter Harf 

Kenneth Hydon 

Rakesh Kapoor 

André Lacroix 

Graham Mackay 

Judith Sprieser 

Warren Tucker 

Notes
(a) Peter Harf was unavoidably absent from one meeting.

24

(a) 

5 

5 

5 

4 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

5 

4 

4

4

4 

4

4 

4 

1

1

1

1

1

1

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
A.4: NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
The Non-Executive Directors are independent of 
management and therefore able to provide 
critical input into Board decisions through their 
contributions to Board discussions and their 
roles on, and Chairmanship of, Board 
Committees. They:

•	 	Contribute	international	and	operational	

experience and a knowledge and 
understanding of global financial issues, the 
sectors in which RB operates and the health 
and safety, environmental and community 
challenges it faces;

•	 	Monitor	management	performance	against	
strategy and provide reasoned input and 
constructive challenge to ensure objectives 
are met; and

•	 	Assess	and	monitor	the	integrity	of	financial	

information and the systems of risk 
management and internal control.

The Chairman holds a session with other 
Non-Executive Directors at the conclusion of 
each formal Board meeting without the 
Executive Directors present.

The Senior Independent Director (SID) provides a 
sounding board for the Chairman and is 
available to the other Directors and 
Shareholders who have concerns that cannot be 
addressed through the Chairman, CEO or CFO.

B: Effectiveness

B.1: BOARD COMPOSITION 
The Board comprises eight Non-Executive 
Directors including Adrian Bellamy, the 
Chairman, and two Executive Directors, Rakesh 
Kapoor, CEO and Liz Doherty, CFO until 12 
February 2013 and Adrian Hennah, CFO from 
12 February 2013. Information regarding the 
Directors serving at the date of this Report is set 
out on page 18. Additional biographical details 
are available from the Company’s website.

The Board has identified Graham Mackay as the 
SID. The majority of Non-Executive Directors 
(excluding the Chairman) are independent as 
recommended by the Code. The Board has 
deemed Judith Sprieser and Kenneth Hydon as 
independent notwithstanding that they have 
served nine years as Directors. The Chairman, 
Adrian Bellamy, was independent on 
appointment. Peter Harf, the Deputy Chairman, 
is not independent by virtue of being a 
Shareholder-nominated Director. The 
Shareholder Agreement between the Company 
and JAB Holdings B.V. (JAB) at the time of the 
merger in 1999 entitled JAB to nominate Board 
Directors. A holding in excess of 20% or 10% 
of the Company’s ordinary shares entitles JAB to 
nominate two Directors or one Director 
respectively. JAB’s current holding is 
approximately 10%.

B.2: NOMINATION COMMITTEE AND 
BOARD APPOINTMENTS 

Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee comprises the 
Chairman, who also chairs the Committee, the 
CEO, the Deputy Chairman, the SID and the 
Chairs of both the Audit and Remuneration 

Committees. The Board has delegated authority 
to the Committee through its terms of 
reference, a copy of which is available on the 
Company’s website. The primary focus of the 
Committee is to make recommendations on:

•	 	The	composition	and	performance	of	the	

Board and its Committees;

•	 	Appointments	and	re-elections	to	the	Board	

and its Committees; and

•	 	Succession	plans	for	the	Chairman	and	 

other Directors.

The principal activities of the Nomination 
Committee during the year were the: 

•	 	Consideration	of	the	current	and	future	

composition of the Board; and

•	 	Together	with	the	rest	of	the	Board,	the	
appointment of Adrian Hennah as the  
new CFO.

Board Appointments
In respect of the appointment of Adrian 
Hennah as CFO and Executive Director and the 
sensitivities surrounding the change in CFO 
within a relatively short period of time, the 
Company initially retained a search consultant 
with which it had worked previously. A list of 
current FTSE 100 financial directors was 
reviewed and a shortlist of potential candidates 
produced. Taking a comprehensive approach, 
the Company decided to invite a boutique 
search agency, which specialised in the City of 
London and private equity appointments to 
support the recruitment process and a desk 
exercise was undertaken to identify a shortlist 
of interested candidates. There was significant 
input from the existing Non-Executive Directors 
in the candidate identification and meetings 
process with only the remuneration aspects 
delegated to the Remuneration Committee. 
Furthermore, the issues leading up to the 
decision to change CFO were ones discussed by 
the full Board (excluding Liz Doherty).

Diversity and Business Success
The Board is confident that diversity contributes 
to the success of any business. It enables the 
business to better understand its opportunities 
and risks and to develop robust solutions to 
them. The Board believes and acts on the  
basis that:

•	 	Diversity	is	much	broader	than	gender	and	
should also not be a Board only issue. It 
incorporates diversity of race, thought, 
experience, skills, understanding, perspective 
and age and also requires implementation at 
all management levels; 

•	 	Successful	companies	sell	their	goods	and	
services to customers regardless of gender, 
race, ethnic group or religion and a diverse 
workforce should reflect its customers. A 
diverse management is more in touch with 
its customers’ demands, investors’ 
expectations and employees’ concerns and 
provides a forum for these different 
perspectives to come together in devising 
successful business strategies; and

•	 	Diversity	is	a	matter	of	organisational	culture	
largely set by example from the top. A Board 

that actively considers diversity is better able 
to support diversity efforts in the rest of the 
organisation and is equipped to identify the 
organisation’s requirements.

Directors’ Conflicts of Interest
The Nomination Committee is responsible for 
the Company’s procedures for dealing with 
Directors’ conflicts of interest and these 
procedures have operated effectively during the 
year. A register of Directors’ conflicts is 
maintained by the Company Secretary and 
reviewed by the Board at least annually. The 
Board is aware of the other commitments of its 
Directors and any changes to these 
commitments are reported to the Board.

B.3: COMMITMENT 
All new Non-Executive Directors confirm in 
writing that they are able to allocate sufficient 
time to meet the expectations of the role. The 
Board has adopted a letter of appointment that 
contains the terms on which Non-Executive 
Directors will be appointed including:

•	 	Confirmation	that	the	appointment	is	a	
contract for services and details of any 
Committee appointments;

•	 	Confirmation	of	the	initial	appointment	term	
of three years terminable on one month’s 
written notice and the expectation that the 
appointment will usually last for more than 
one term; and

•	 	The	requirement	to	seek	the	agreement	of	
the Chairman before accepting additional 
commitments including other directorships 
and the requirement to disclose any actual or 
potential conflicts of interest.

The terms of reference of the Nomination 
Committee give the Committee responsibility 
for ensuring that Executive Directors do not 
take on more than one non-executive 
directorship in a FTSE 100 company nor  
the chairmanship of such company. 

The performance review of the Board 
undertaken in 2012 concluded that the 
Chairman and other Non-Executive  
Directors devote sufficient time to the 
Company’s business. 

B.4: DEVELOPMENT 

Induction and Training
All new Directors are provided with a flexible 
induction programme tailored to accommodate 
individual areas of interest. The induction covers 
the provision of core Company related internal 
and external documents, meetings with key 
Directors and senior executives and visits to 
various offices and factories as appropriate.

The Board holds at least one meeting each year 
at one of the Company’s operating units. The 
2011 meeting was held in India and the 2012 
meeting was held in Brazil. The Board plans to 
visit its operating unit in China during 2013.  
The Board receives updates on legal, regulatory 
and governance matters from its internal and 
external advisers. As part of its investor relations 
programme, the Board received a presentation 
from an analyst who gave an overview of the 
market and general perceptions about  
the Company. 

25

2012Corporate Governance Report continued

The Chairman has overall responsibility for 
ensuring that the Directors receive the 
information and training required for their roles 
and Directors are encouraged to take individual 
responsibility for identifying their needs and are 
expected to take the necessary steps to ensure 
that they are adequately informed about RB 
and their responsibilities as Directors. The Board 
is confident that all its members have the 
knowledge, ability and experience to perform 
the functions required of a director of a  
listed company.

During the year, the Company became subject 
to an FSA enquiry which has not concluded as 
at the date of this Annual Report. There had 
been an inadvertent breach of the Listing Rules 
(LR) when the granting of security during 2010 
over shares held by the CEO (when he was an 
Executive Committee member and a person 
discharging managerial responsibilities (PDMR) 
as defined by the Disclosure and Transparency 
Rules (DTR)) was not undertaken in accordance 
with the requirements of the LR and the DTR. 
The relevant shares were registered for the 
Company’s dividend reinvestment plan (DRIP) 
and received DRIP shares for the September 
2011 and May 2012 dividends automatically 
into the pledged shares account. In addition, a 
PDMR disposed of Company shares without the 
appropriate disclosures being made. The 
Company has since taken steps to tighten its 
disclosure controls and procedures to ensure 
that all relevant PDMRs remain aware of their 
obligations under the LR and the DTR. The 
Company has also established an internal 
Disclosure Committee to assist them in ensuring 
compliance with relevant regulations.

B.5: INFORMATION AND SUPPORT 
All members of the Board receive timely reports 
on items arising at meetings of the Board 
enabling due consideration of the items in 
advance of meetings. Directors unable to 
attend a particular meeting during the year had 
the opportunity to review and raise any issues 
on the relevant briefing papers. Board members 
also have access to a dedicated online team 
room containing relevant Company information 
including all Board and Committee papers. 

Each Director has access to the advice and 
services of the Company Secretary and a 
procedure exists for Directors to take 
independent professional advice at the 
Company’s expense in furtherance of  
their duties. 

Company Secretary
The Company Secretary ensures that the 
Company complies with all applicable rules, 
regulations and obligations governing the 
Company’s operations and is responsible for 
ensuring that the correct Board procedures are 
followed. She advises the Board on corporate 
governance matters. All Directors have access 
to the Company Secretary. Her appointment 
and removal are matters reserved to the Board.

B.6: EVALUATION 

Performance Evaluation 
The Board maintains an ongoing review of its 
procedures and its effectiveness and those of its 

26

Committees throughout the year. It carries out 
a formal and rigorous internal evaluation of its 
performance, its Committees and of individual 
Directors with a view to improving the 
effectiveness of the Board and its Committees 
and RB’s overall performance. 

As disclosed in the 2011 Annual Report, it was 
the Board’s intention to undertake its 2012 
performance evaluation with support from an 
external facilitator. In the end it was decided 
that this was not appropriate for the Company 
for the 2012 evaluation due to the recent 
change in CFO and various other activities 
undertaken by the Company. 

2012 Evaluation: Although an externally 
facilitated evaluation was not undertaken, the 
Board is assured that the internal performance 
evaluation of the Board and its Committees 
undertaken during 2012 was detailed, rigorous 
and effective. The process commenced with an 
email from the Company Secretary to all 
Directors inviting their comments on the 
effectiveness of the Board. The responses 
received were reviewed by the Chairman and 
used to develop a framework for the debate at 
the evaluation meeting. The range of topics was 
distilled into the following key topics:

•	 	Corporate	strategy:	the	focus	was	on	more	
pre-planning for the strategy meetings 
including understanding management’s key 
strategic focus which could be shared with 
the Board well in advance of the formal 
annual strategy session;

•	 	Investor	relations:	additional	clarity	on	the	
Company’s investor relations strategy;

•	 	Risk	management:	it	was	recognised	 
that there was better risk control and 
reporting generally;

•	 	Advance	papers	to	the	Board:	more	

comprehensive papers in certain areas  
and ensuring that significant issues are  
not presented to the Board without  
prior notification; 

•	 	Offsite	Board	meeting:	taking	steps	to	make	
the most of these meetings and using them 
as opportunities for the Board to meet 
Top400 executives in less formal settings. 
Possibility of increased Non-Executive Director 
availability during the week of the offsite 
Board meeting;

•	 	Time	management:	it	was	acknowledged	that	
the Board has a limited number of meetings 
annually and there was discussion on 
whether there were opportunities to ensure 
that Non-Executive Directors’ time was being 
used in the best possible way; and

•	 	People	and	succession:	ensuring	continued	
Non-Executive Director exposure to Top400 
executives, providing more details to all 
non-Nomination Committee members  
on succession planning and medium- to 
long-term succession planning for  
Executive Directors.

Progress Update on Items from the 2011 
Evaluation: Key actions from the 2011 Board 
performance evaluation and progress made 
since then include:

•	 	Developing	Markets	(now	LAPAC	and	

RUMEA): arising from the 2011 evaluation 
was a need to better understand the 
Company’s China strategy for the next 
decade. Presentations on LAPAC took place 
during the year with specific attention on 
China. The 2013 offsite Board and strategy 
meetings will take place in China, allowing 
for a more in-depth focus.

•	 	Investor	Relations:	a	presentation	on	

investor-related issues was delivered by a 
member of the investor community at a 
Board dinner which gave Board members 
additional insight into Company issues that 
were of interest to the investor community 
and also provided Directors with an 
opportunity to ask questions and gain a 
better understanding of issues that may 
impact the Company.

•	 	Exposure	of	RB	management	below	the	
Executive Committee to the Board: all 
members of the Executive Committee had an 
opportunity to present to the Board during 
the year. Additionally seven members of the 
Top40 and another seven colleagues from 
the Top400 delivered presentations to either 
the Audit Committee or the Board during  
the year.

•	 	Product	category	management:	the	EVP,	
Category Development, Heather Allen, 
presented to the Board during the year and 
one of the Non-Executive Directors, Richard 
Cousins, spent a day with the Category 
Development organisation learning more 
about RB brands and markets.

These outcomes and actions will also feed  
into any externally facilitated evaluation carried 
out in 2013 or 2014 and will aid benchmarking 
and the measurement of progress against  
prior years.

The evaluations of the Board Committees were 
undertaken with the use of detailed internally 
generated questionnaires which included a 
section for additional comments. The scores and 
additional comments were collated for 
subsequent discussions. 

The evaluation of the Chairman’s performance is 
undertaken by the SID with input from his 
fellow Non-Executive Directors and the CEO and 
CFO. The Chairman evaluates each Director’s 
performance through one-to-one discussions 
with other Directors. The Remuneration 
Committee also reviews the performance of the 
Executive Directors and other members of the 
Executive Committee.

B.7: DIRECTORS’ RE-ELECTION
In accordance with the Code recommendations 
all the Directors will submit themselves for 
re-election/election at the 2013 AGM. Each 
Director has provided assurance that he or she 
remains committed to his or her role and can 
dedicate the necessary amount of time to 
attend to the Company’s business. In addition, 
the performance evaluation undertaken was 
rigorous and transparent to ensure that each 
Director remains able to undertake his or her 
duties. Consequently, the Board recommends 
that all Shareholders vote ‘for’ on each of the 
resolutions to re-elect/elect the Directors at the 

20122013 AGM. The date each Director was 
originally appointed to the Board is included in 
the biographical details on page 18.

C: Accountability

C.1: FINANCIAL AND BUSINESS REPORTING 
The Board is responsible for the integrity of RB’s 
consolidated and the Company’s financial 
statements and recognises its responsibility to 
present a balanced and understandable 
assessment of RB’s position and prospects. The 
Board is satisfied that the financial statements, 
report to regulators and price-sensitive reports 
present a balanced and understandable 
assessment of RB’s position and prospects. 

To assist with financial reporting and the 
preparation of consolidated financial 
statements, the finance function has in place a 
series of accounting and Treasury policies, 
practices and controls which are designed to 
ensure the identification and communication of 
changes in accounting standards, and 
reconciliation of core financial systems. The 
function consists of consolidation and financial 
accounting teams and technical support which 
comprises senior finance managers who review 
external technical developments and accounting 
policy issues. In addition, the finance function 
maintains an up-to-date Group Finance Policy 
Manual and sets formal requirements with 
business unit finance functions which specify 
the standard reports and approvals required  
by RB.

Throughout the year RB has had in place an 
ongoing process for evaluating the financial 
reporting process and the preparation of 
consolidated accounts. The basis for the 
preparation of consolidated accounts is as set 
out on page 43 under Accounting Policies. 

The Board agrees an engagement letter with 
the Auditors in respect of the full and half-year 
results and the Auditors’ statement on their 
work and reporting responsibilities is set out on 
page 38.

Information on RB’s business model and strategy 
for generating and preserving longer term 
growth and delivering on the Company’s stated 
objectives is set out in pages 2 to 8 of the Chief 
Executive’s Statement. 

The Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities on 
page 30 details the Directors’ responsibility for 
the financial statements and for disclosing 
relevant audit information to the Auditors. 

The going concern statement required by the 
Listing Rules and the Code is set out in the 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities on  
page 30.

C.2: RISK MANAGEMENT AND INTERNAL 
CONTROL 
The Board has established a risk and control 
structure designed to manage the achievement 
of business objectives. It has overall 
responsibility for RB’s system of internal control 
and for the effectiveness of such system. The 
system complies with the Turnbull guidance on 
Internal Control and Risk Management and 
provides reasonable, but not absolute, 
assurance against material misstatement or loss.

The Board maintains an ongoing process for 
evaluating the system of internal control and 
identifying and managing risk. Management is 
required to apply judgement in evaluating the 
material risks RB faces in achieving its objectives, 
in determining the risks that are considered 
acceptable to bear, in assessing the likelihood of 
the risks concerned materialising, in identifying 
RB’s ability to reduce the incidence and impact 
on the business of risks that do materialise and 
in ensuring that the costs of operating particular 
controls are proportionate to the benefit.

RB’s control environment is supported by a 
Code of Conduct, on which employees receive 
training annually, and a range of policies on 
corporate responsibility. Other key elements 
within the internal control structure are 
summarised as follows:

•	 	The	Board	and	Management	– the Board 
approves strategy and performs an advisory 
and supervisory role, with the day-to-day 
management of the Company being 
undertaken by the CEO supported by the 
Executive Committee. The CEO and other 
Executive Committee members have clearly 
communicated RB’s vision, strategy, operating 
model, values and business objectives across 
the Group;

•	 	Organisational	Structure	–	during the year 
ended 31 December 2012, RB operated three 
area organisations covering ENA, LAPAC 
RUMEA together with RB Pharmaceuticals 
and Food, and centralised functions covering 
category development, supply, sales, finance 
and legal, information services and human 
resources, as well as an independent internal 
audit function. Throughout the organisation, 
the achievement of business objectives and 
the establishment of appropriate risk 
management and internal control systems 
and processes are embedded in the 
responsibilities of line managers;

•	 	Budgeting	– there is an annual planning 

process whereby operating budgets for the 
following financial year are prepared and are 
reviewed by the Board. Long-term business 
plans are also prepared and are reviewed by 
the Board on an annual basis;

•	 	Management	Reporting	– there is a 
comprehensive system of management 
reporting. The financial performance of 
operating units and RB as a whole are 
monitored against budget on a monthly basis 
and are updated by periodic forecasts. Area 
and functional executives also perform 
regular business reviews with their 
management teams, which incorporate an 
assessment of key risks and opportunities;

•	 	Risk	Management	–	as part of the ongoing 
risk and control process, operating units 
review and evaluate risks to the achievement 
of business objectives and the Board reviews 
those significant risks which might impact on 
the achievement of corporate objectives. 
Mitigating controls, together with any 
necessary actions, are identified and 
implemented. A summary of the most 
significant risks faced by RB is included in the 
Business Review on pages 13 to 15;

•	 	Operating	Unit	Controls	–	each operating 
unit maintains a system of internal control 
and risk management which is appropriate to 
its own business environment. Such controls 
must be in accordance with Group policies 
and include management authorisation 
processes, to ensure that all commitments on 
behalf of RB are entered into only after 
appropriate approval. In particular, there is a 
structured process for the appraisal and 
authorisation of all material capital projects; 
and

•	 	Monitoring	–	the effectiveness of the system 
of internal control and risk management is 
monitored regularly through a combination 
of management review, self-assessment, 
independent review through quality 
assurance, environment, health & safety and 
regulatory audits, as well as independent 
internal and external audit. The results of 
internal and external audit reviews are 
reported to and considered by the Audit 
Committee, and actions are taken to address 
any significant control matters identified. The 
Audit Committee also approves annual 
internal audit plans and is responsible for 
performing the ongoing review of the system 
of internal control and risk management on 
behalf of the Board.

The Board confirms that reviews of the 
appropriateness and effectiveness of the system 
of internal control and risk management 
throughout the financial year and up to the 
date of approval of the Annual Report and 
Accounts have been satisfactorily completed in 
compliance with provision C.2.1 of the Code. 

The Company is compliant with DTR 7.2.6 and 
the information is included in the section on 
Takeover Directive on pages 19 to 20.

C.3: AUDIT COMMITTEE AND AUDITORS 
Audit Committee
The Audit Committee comprises three 
Independent Non-Executive Directors: Kenneth 
Hydon, Chairman since 16 November 2006, 
(whom the Board has deemed independent 
notwithstanding he has served nine years on 
the Board), André Lacroix and Warren Tucker. 
Kenneth Hydon, FCMA, FCCA, FCT, was CFO 
of Vodafone Group plc until July 2005 and 
Warren Tucker is CFO of Cobham plc. 
Therefore, they both have relevant and recent 
financial experience. RB’s Auditors, Head of 
Internal Audit and CFO attend meetings and 
have regular private meetings with and direct 
access to the Committee. The Chairman and 
CEO attended some of the meetings and other 
senior management attend Audit Committee 
meetings by invitation. 

The Audit Committee:
•	 	Monitors	the	adequacy	and	effectiveness	of	

the system of internal control;

•	 	Reviews	compliance	procedures	and	RB’s	

overall risk framework (including the Group’s 
whistleblowing arrangements);

•	 	Considers	reports	on	Internal	Audit’s	
activities, significant legal claims and 
regulatory issues; 

27

Report of the Directors2012Corporate Governance Report continued

•	 	Reviews	the	interim	and	full	year	financial	
statements before submission to the  
full Board; 

•	 	Makes	recommendations	to	the	Board	
regarding the Auditors and their terms  
of appointment;

•	 	Reviews	and	monitors	the	Auditors’	

independence and services supplied and the 
objectivity and the effectiveness of the audit 
process; and

•	 	Considers	operational	risk	and	control	

presentations from management covering 
assurance providers, geographical and 
functional areas. 

During 2012 the Audit Committee: 
•	 	Met	four	times;	

•	 	Considered	detailed	risk	and	control	reviews	

for specific selected Group major risks;

•	 	Reviewed	local	country	and	regional	risk	and	
control status during the overseas Board visit;

•				Agreed	an	approach	to	deliver	independent	

programme assurance for the SAP and 
business transformation programme and 
monitored delivery of that assurance;

•	 	Approved	updates	to	the	Finance	Policy	

Manual and the Treasury policies;

•	 	Monitored	the	progress	against	the	
relaunched whistleblowing policy;

•	 	Reviewed	and	updated	the	policy	for	

non-audit fees to the Auditors and monitored 
its application;

•	 	Reviewed	and	carefully	considered	the	

justification for exceeding the Company’s 
policy on non-audit fees in 2012;

•	 	Reviewed	the	Audit	Committee	terms	of	

reference and the annual ‘Standing Agenda’;

•	 	Reviewed	the	effectiveness	of,	and	approved	

recommendations for changes to, the Internal 
Audit function;

•	 	Approved	the	terms	of	engagement	and	

reviewed the strategy, scope and effectiveness 
of the Auditors;

•	 	Reviewed	and	discussed	with	the	Auditors	
the findings of their work during the year;

•	 	Received	regular	technical	updates	to	keep	

abreast of changes in financial reporting and 
governance matters; and

•	 	Reviewed	the	performance	of	the	Audit	
Committee itself and agreed actions for 
improvement.

Auditors and Auditor Independence
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) and its 
predecessor firms have been the sole auditors 
of RB since 2000, the year after the merger of 
Reckitt & Colman plc and Benckiser N.V. in 
1999, and the Company’s Auditors since its 
formation in 2007. At the time of the merger, 
PwC were the auditors of Reckitt & Colman plc 
and Deloitte LLP were the auditors of Benckiser 
N.V. Post merger, the Audit Committee 
undertook a review and subsequently selected 
PwC as auditor for the Group for the December 
2000 year end. In the opinion of the Audit 
Committee, the relationship with the Auditors 

28

works well and the Committee remains 
satisfied with their independence and 
effectiveness. It has, accordingly, not considered 
it necessary to require the firm to tender for the 
audit work, although this is kept under review 
annually. It is a requirement that the audit 
partner responsible for audit is rotated every 
five years and the current lead audit partner, 
who has been in place since 2008, will 
accordingly rotate off in 2013. There are no 
contractual obligations restricting the 
Company’s choice of Auditors. 

RB has a formal policy in place to safeguard 
Auditor independence. The Audit Committee 
and the CFO keep the independence and 
objectivity of the Auditors under review. The 
Committee reviews the nature and level of 
non-audit services undertaken by the Auditors 
during the year to satisfy itself that there is no 
impact on their independence. The Board 
recognises that in certain circumstances the 
nature of the advice required may make it  
more timely and cost effective to appoint the 
Auditors who already have a good 
understanding of RB.

During the year, the Company exceeded its 
published policy that, on an annual basis, 
non-audit fees are not in excess of 50% of the 
Group’s external audit fees on an aggregate 
basis. The Board would like to emphasise that 
this is not a change in policy. The breach was a 
consequence of seeking PwC’s tax advice as part 
of the Group’s organisational and operational 
restructuring necessary to implement RB’s new 
strategy announced earlier in the year to refocus 
the business into three key areas – health, 
hygiene and home. 

Prior to awarding the contract to PwC, a 
detailed tender process was undertaken with 
the ‘big four’ accountancy firms followed by a 
series of meetings and information exchanges. 
PwC was selected for this one off project 
because its detailed knowledge of the Group 
made its proposal ultimately the most cost 
effective and time efficient for the Company. 
The project is closely related to work PwC has 
already undertaken for the Company in other 
key areas. The PwC tax advisory team is 
independent and separate from its tax audit 
team which undertakes the annual audit for  
the Company.

The work on the project is continuing and the 
Company does not, at this time, anticipate 
exceeding its stated policy on non-audit fees  
for 2013.

Following a recommendation by the Audit 
Committee and in accordance with section 489 
of the 2006 Act, a resolution proposing the 
re-appointment of PwC as the Company’s 
Auditors will be put to the Shareholders at the 
AGM. RB does not indemnify its Auditors.

The Auditors report to the Audit Committee on 
the actions they take to comply with 
professional and regulatory requirements and 
with best practice designed to ensure their 
independence from RB, including periodic 
rotation of the audit engagement partners. 
Details of non-audit services are set out in  
note 4 on page 50. 

D: Remuneration

D.1: THE LEVEL AND COMPONENT OF 
REMUNERATION 
The Company’s compensation plan is 
performance-driven and designed to foster RB’s 
innovative and entrepreneurial culture. 
Following the 1999 merger of Reckitt & 
Colman plc and Benckiser N.V. the Board set 
out to create a truly multinational Company 
and, as a result of this approach, people of 
many nationalities work with local citizens in 
each location in which RB operates. 

The level and composition of remuneration 
across RB is designed to facilitate global mobility 
and diversity. A similar employment contract is 
used and compensation rules apply equally for 
RB’s Top400 managers in all markets. Salary 
ranges are based on global benchmarking and 
RB’s annual cash bonus structure, long-term 
incentives and other benefits are offered across 
operating companies. 

Details on the Company’s remuneration strategy 
and the Directors’ compensation arrangements 
are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report on pages 31 to 37.

D.2: REMUNERATION COMMITTEE AND 
PROCEDURE 
The Remuneration Committee chaired by Judith 
Sprieser comprises four members. As at August 
2012, Judith Sprieser had served nine years  
on the Board. Nonetheless, pursuant to Code 
provision B.1.1, the Board has determined  
that, in its opinion, Judith Sprieser remains 
independent. Graham Mackay and Richard 
Cousins are considered independent under the 
Code. The fourth member of the Committee  
is the Chairman, Adrian Bellamy, who was 
independent on appointment but has served  
on the Board for more than nine years. 

The Committee’s purpose is to assist the  
Board in fulfilling its oversight responsibility  
by ensuring that remuneration policy and 
practices reward fairly and responsibly; are 
linked to corporate and individual performance; 
and take account of the generally accepted 
principles of good governance. On behalf of  
the Board and subject to Board approval, the 
Committee primarily:

•	 	Sets	and	regularly	reviews	the	Company’s	

overall remuneration strategy;

•	 	Determines	the	general	remuneration	policy	

for senior executives; and

•	 	In	respect	of	the	Chairman,	the	Executive	
Directors and members of the Executive 
Committee sets, reviews and approves:

	 •			Remuneration	policies,	including	annual	
bonuses and long-term incentives;

	 •			Individual	remuneration	and	compensation	

arrangements;

	 •			Individual	benefits	including	pension	and	

superannuation arrangements;

	 •				Terms	and	conditions	of	employment	
including the Executive Directors’  
service agreement;

2012E.2: THE ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 
The AGM provides all Shareholders with an 
opportunity to vote on the resolutions put to 
them. The AGM is used as the main 
opportunity for the Directors to meet directly 
with private investors. It is attended by the 
Directors and all Shareholders present are given 
the opportunity to ask questions of the 
Chairman, the Chairs of Board Committees and 
the Board as a unit.

All resolutions are voted on by way of poll so 
that each share has one vote. The results of the 
poll are released to the Stock Exchange and 
published on the website shortly after the AGM. 

	 •			Participation	in	any	of	the	Company’s	

bonus and long-term incentive plans; and

	 •			The	targets	for	any	of	the	Company’s	

performance-related bonus and long-term 
incentive plans.

The Chairman of the Board together with the 
CEO and CFO are responsible for evaluating and 
making recommendations to the Board on the 
remuneration of the Non-Executive Directors.

Members of the Remuneration Committee and 
any person attending its meetings do not 
participate in any discussion or decision on their 
own remuneration. 

Detailed information on the Committee and  
its activities is set out in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 31 to 37.

E: Relations with Shareholders

E.1: RELATIONS WITH SHAREHOLDERS 
The Board is committed to effective 
communication between the Company and its 
Shareholders. The Executive Directors and the 
Director of Investor Relations meet regularly 
with institutional Shareholders and financial 
analysts in Europe and North America to discuss 
matters relating to the Company’s business 
strategy and current performance. The Board 
receives regular monthly reports from the CEO 
which include updates on share price 
developments, major buyers and sellers of 

shares, investors’ views and analysts’ reports on 
the industry and on the Company specifically. 
Feedback on presentations and roadshow 
meetings with institutional investors is 
presented to the Directors following twice-
yearly roadshows in Europe and North America. 
The investor relations programme includes:

•	 	Formal	presentations	of	full	year	and	 
interim results and quarterly interim 
management statements;

•	 	Regular	meetings	between	institutional	

investors and senior management to ensure 
that the investor community receives a 
balanced and complete view of RB’s 
performance, the issues faced by RB and any 
issue of concern to the investors; 

•	 	Responding	to	enquiries	from	institutional	

Shareholders through the Company’s investor 
relations team and from retail Shareholders 
through the Company Secretary; and

•	 	A	section	dedicated	to	Shareholders	on	the	

Company’s website. 

The Chairman is available to discuss governance 
and strategy with major Shareholders should 
such a dialogue be requested. During the year 
the Chairman liaised with Shareholders and 
reported on these meetings to the Directors. 
The Company believes that it is important to 
make key executives available, along with the 
SID, if required, to discuss matters of concern 
with its Shareholders.

29

2012Disclosure of Information to Auditors
The Directors, having made appropriate 
enquiries, state that:

a)  So far as each Director is aware, there is no 
relevant audit information of which the 
Company’s auditors are unaware; and

b)  Each Director has taken all the steps that  
he/she ought to have taken as a Director  
to make him/herself aware of any relevant 
audit information and to establish that  
the Company’s auditors are aware of  
that information.

By Order of the Board

Elizabeth Richardson 
Company Secretary 
Reckitt Benckiser Group plc 
103-105 Bath Road  
Slough, Berkshire SL1 3UH 

Company registration number: 6270876

8 March 2013

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report, the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and the financial 
statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare 
financial statements for each financial year. 
Under that law the Directors have prepared the 
Group financial statements in accordance with 
IFRSs as adopted by the EU, and the Parent 
Company financial statements in accordance 
with United Kingdom (UK) Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards and applicable law). In 
preparing the Group financial statements, the 
Directors have also elected to comply with IFRSs 
issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board (IASB). Under company law 
the Directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs 
of the Group and the Company and of the 
profit or loss of the Group for that period. 

In preparing these financial statements, the 
Directors are required to:

•	 	Select	suitable	accounting	policies	and	then	

apply them consistently.

•	 	Make	judgements	and	accounting	estimates	

that are reasonable and prudent.

•	 	State	whether	IFRSs	as	adopted	by	the	EU	

and IFRSs issued by IASB and applicable UK 
Accounting Standards have been followed, 
subject to any material departures disclosed 
and explained in the Group and Parent 
Company financial statements respectively.

•	 	Prepare	the	financial	statements	on	the	

going concern basis unless it is inappropriate 
to presume that the Company will continue 
in business.

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are sufficient 
to show and explain the Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position  
of the Company and the Group and enable 
them to ensure that the financial statements 
and the Directors’ Remuneration Report  
comply with the 2006 Act and, as regards  
the Group financial statements, Article 4 of  
the IAS Regulation. 

They are also responsible for safeguarding the 
assets of the Company and the Group and 
hence for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud and  
other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the UK governing the 
preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements may differ from legislation in  
other jurisdictions.

Each of the Directors, whose names and 
functions are listed on page 18 confirms that, 
to the best of their knowledge:

•	 	The	Group	financial	statements,	which	have	
been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as 
adopted by the EU and IFRSs as issued by the 
IASB, give a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and profit of the 
Group; and

•	 	The	Report	of	the	Directors	includes	a	fair	

review of the development and performance 
of the business and the position of the 
Group, together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties that it faces.

Going Concern 
The Group’s business activities, together with 
the factors likely to affect its future 
development, performance and position are set 
out in the Business Review on pages 10 to 17. 
The financial position of the Group and 
Company, its cash flows, liquidity position and 
borrowing facilities, as well as the Group’s 
objectives, policies and processes for managing 
its capital; its financial risk management 
objectives; details of its financial instruments 
and hedging activities; and its exposure to 
credit risk and liquidity risk are described in the 
Business Review on page 14 and in note 14 to 
the Group financial statements. 

The Group has considerable financial resources 
together with a diverse customer and supplier 
base across different geographical areas and 
categories. As a consequence, the Directors 
believe that the Group and Company are well 
placed to manage their business risks 
successfully despite the current uncertain 
economic outlook.

The Directors have a reasonable expectation 
that the Group and Company have adequate 
resources to continue in operational existence 
for the foreseeable future. Thus they continue 
to adopt the going concern basis of accounting 
in preparing the annual financial statements in 
accordance with the FRC’s ‘Going Concern and 
Liquidity Risk: Guidance For Directors of UK 
Companies 2009’. This statement is also made 
to fulfil the requirements of Listing Rules 
9.8.6R(3) and 9.8.10R(1) and C.1.2 of  
the Code.

30

2012Directors’ Remuneration Report

Remuneration Committee Chairman’s 
Statement
In 2012, the subject of executive remuneration 
has continued to be an area of focus for 
shareholders and the wider public. Of particular 
note is the ongoing consultation by the 
Department for Business Innovation & Skills 
(BIS) on this subject and its new regulations 
relating to the disclosure and shareholder 
approval of executive remuneration.

Whilst these regulations do not come into force 
until RB’s 2013 financial year, we have 
nevertheless incorporated a number of changes 
this year in response to the draft regulations to 
help make our Remuneration Report clearer 
and easier to understand. As set out in our 
Notice of AGM, there will continue to be a 
single advisory vote on our 2012 Directors’ 
Remuneration Report at the 2013 AGM.

The Committee continues to believe that its 
approach to remuneration, although different 
in some respects to typical FTSE practice, is an 
important factor in RB’s success, supporting a 
strong performance culture and delivering 
significant benefits to all Shareholders.

Central to our pay philosophy are the principles 
of simplicity, Shareholder alignment and pay for 
performance. We have positioned Executive 
Director fixed pay (base salary, pension and 
benefits) at or below median market levels, but 
have provided Executives with incentive 
opportunities that enable above-market pay for 
above-market performance in terms of growth, 
profitability and Shareholder returns. Our 
approach to remuneration reflects the global 
nature of our business. Our management team 
is multinational, is globally mobile and we 
compete for talent against a peer group of 
global FMCG companies.

The remuneration of our Senior Executives is 
heavily weighted towards long-term variable 
equity components (performance-vesting shares 
and options). This, together with our 
demanding executive share ownership 
requirements (equivalent to up to 29x salary), 
gives Executives a significant dependency on 
the long-term sustainability of our business, 
and helps ensure Executives think like, and act 
in the interests of, Shareholders.

During the year, I have taken the opportunity to 
speak with a number of the Company’s largest 
Shareholders on the subject of executive 
remuneration. The Committee, and the Board 
as a whole, take very seriously the views and 
feedback of our Shareholders, and, although 
the majority of Shareholders are strongly 
supportive of our philosophy and policy on 
remuneration, we did receive some comments 
and concerns over the last year around 
Executive Director service contracts, the size of 
our LTIP grants, and the sole use of earnings 
per share in our LTIP. Our service contracts are 
now consistent with best practice and the 
Committee continues to review the structure 
and level of LTIP awards to ensure they 
continue to align with Shareholders’ interests. 
This is covered more fully later in this Report.  

Judith Sprieser 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

Directors’ Remuneration Report
The Directors’ Remuneration Report has been 
prepared in accordance with the Large- and 
Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and 
meets the relevant requirements of the 
Financial Services Authority’s Listing Rules. 

Policy on Remuneration
This section of our report describes the key 
components of the remuneration arrangements 
for Executive Directors that were in place for 
2012 and which remain unchanged for 2013.

The Company operates a global remuneration 
policy for its Senior Executives which is 
reviewed every three years. The core principles 
on which that policy is based are as follows: 

1.  The remuneration structure will be simple to 

understand; and

2.  The interests of Executive Directors and 

Senior Executives will be strongly aligned 
with those of Shareholders, with a heavy 
emphasis on the link between pay and 
performance, together with demanding 
executive share ownership requirements.

The targeted positioning of total remuneration 
will be based on international competitive 
practice as the Company competes for 
management skills and talent in broadly the 

CEO and CFO remuneration package in 2013

Component 

Base salary 

Pension 

Other benefits 

Annual cash bonus (% of salary) 

Performance shares (% vesting) 

Share options (% vesting) 

‘Below threshold’ 

‘Target’ 

‘Maximum’

 Annual base salary CEO £832k, CFO £550k

  CEO 30%, CFO 25% of pensionable pay

 Taxable value of annual benefits provided

0% 

0% 

0% 

120% CEO 
90% CFO 

40%  

40%  

428% CEO  
321% CFO

100%

100%

same marketplace as its main competitors, the 
majority of which are based in the US. 

Variable pay is, and will continue to be, the 
major element of the Company’s current 
Executive Directors’ and Senior Executives’ total 
compensation package. Accordingly, the 
Executive Directors’ compensation package 
comprises, in addition to base salary, an annual 
cash bonus and share-based long-term 
incentives. If the Group achieves its target levels 
of performance, the variable elements will 
amount to 66%-81% of Executive Directors’ 
total remuneration. If performance is 
unsatisfactory, then no cash bonuses will be 
paid and long-term incentives will not vest. 
Highly-leveraged annual bonus opportunities, 
linked to the achievement of key business 
measures within the year, are designed to 
stimulate the achievement of outstanding 
annual results. Long-term incentives linked to 
share price and earnings per share growth are 
designed to reinforce Shareholder alignment.

In recent meetings with some of our largest 
Shareholders, we discussed the possible addition 
of a capital measure to balance earnings per 
share in our long-term incentives. Having 
considered the comments received from 
Shareholders, the Remuneration Committee 
(Committee) believes that the current levels of 
executive share ownership obviate the need for 
a balancing capital measure in the LTIP since the 
proportion of personal net worth that the Senior 
Executives have at risk in Company shares 
motivates them to act in a manner consistent 
with the best interests of our Shareholders. 

The Company believes that the current 
remuneration practices (summarised in the table 
on page 32) meet the policy’s core principles: 

31

2012   
 
Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Summary of Executive Director Remuneration Policy

Component

Objective

Operation

Opportunity in 2012

Performance measures

Changes for 
2013

Variable Remuneration (incentives)

Annual bonus

Drive performance with 
significant reward for 
over-achievement

Share options

Performance shares

To incentivise and 
reward longer-term 
performance, and align 
the interests of 
Executives with those of 
Shareholders

Share ownership 
guidelines

Align with Shareholder 
interests and reinforce 
long-term 
decision-making

Base Salary and Benefits

Base salary

To enable the total 
package to support 
recruitment and 
retention

Pension

Benefits

To provide appropriate 
levels of retirement 
benefit (calibrated to be 
at or around the market 
average for equivalent 
positions elsewhere)

To provide benefits 
comparable to those 
that would be provided 
for an equivalent 
position elsewhere

Net revenue and net income 
growth targets are set by the 
Committee at the start of the 
year. At the end of the year, 
the Committee determines 
the extent to which these 
have been achieved. Pay-outs 
are in cash.

Similar incentive arrangements 
are used for other Executives 
worldwide

Conditional grants of share 
options vest after three years 
subject to the achievement of 
stretching performance 
targets

Conditional awards of shares 
vest after three years subject 
to the achievement of 
stretching performance 
targets

Executive directors are 
expected to acquire a number 
of shares over a period of 
eight years and retain these 
until retirement from the 
Board

Base salaries are reviewed 
annually with effect from 
1 January.
Salary levels/increases take 
account of:
•		Competitive	practice	in	the	
Company’s remuneration 
peer group, comprising 19 
international companies1

•		Individual	performance
•		Salary	increases	awarded	

across the Group as a whole

Executive Directors receive 
£50,000 p.a. into the RB 
Executive Pension Scheme, a 
defined contribution scheme, 
and a cash allowance in lieu 
for the balance of the 
promised contribution (see 
right). Base salary is the only 
element of remuneration that 
is pensionable

Includes company car/
allowance and health care. 
Relocation allowances and 
international transfer related 
benefits may also be paid, if 
required.

Growth in net revenue 
and net income 

None

Maximum opportunity
CEO: 428% of salary
CFO: 321% of salary

Target opportunity
CEO: 120% of salary
CFO: 90% of salary

Grants based on a 
fixed number: 
CEO: 400,000 
CFO: 90,000

Awards based on a 
fixed number: 
CEO: 200,000 
CFO: 45,000

Awards vest on RB’s 3-year 
average earnings per share 
growth: 
40% vests at 6% p.a. 
60% vests at 7% p.a. 
80% vests at 8% p.a. 
100% vests at 9% p.a.

Required ownership: 
CEO: 600,000 shares 
CFO: 200,000 shares

n/a

None

None

None

n/a

Salaries for Executive 
Directors should 
typically be at or below 
the median for 
competitors

n/a

CEO: 30% of 
pensionable pay 
CFO: 17.5% of 
pensionable pay

CEO: 
£832,000 
(4% 
increase)

CFO: 
£550,000 
(from date 
of 
appoint-
ment)

Pension for 
new CFO 
set at 25% 
of 
pensionable 
pay

CEO: £31k in 2012 
CFO: £24k in 2012

n/a

None

1  Avon, Bayer, Campbell, Church & Dwight, Clorox, Coca-Cola, Colgate-Palmolive, Danone, GSK, Henkel, Johnson & Johnson, Kimberley Clark, 
Kellogg, Novartis, Pepsico, Pfizer, Procter & Gamble, Sanofi and Unilever.

32

2012Service Contracts
During 2012, the Committee considered the 
service contract for the new CFO and agreed 
that it should be consistent with that of the 
CEO. Consequently, the service contracts for 
both the CEO and CFO (since Adrian Hennah 
joined the Board in early 2013) are now rolling 
and terminable on twelve months’ notice. In 
such an event, the compensation commitments 
in respect of their contracts could amount to 
one year’s remuneration based on base salary 
and benefits in kind and pension rights during 
the notice period. Termination payments may 
take the form of payments in lieu of notice.

External Appointments
Rakesh Kapoor does not hold any external 
appointments. Adrian Hennah is a Non-
Executive Director of Reed Elsevier PLC and is 
permitted to retain the fees he receives for  
this appointment.

Exit Payments Policy 
In the event of an Executive leaving the 
Company payments may be made under the 
annual bonus plan, as follows: 

•	 	If	employment	terminates	by	reason	of	

voluntary resignation or for ‘cause’, no bonus 
will be made for the financial year in which 
employment terminates.

•	 	In	all	other	circumstances,	any	bonus	due	will	
be paid as soon as possible after the end of 
the relevant financial year. Any such bonus 
will be paid on a pro-rata basis taking 
account of the period actually worked.

The LTIP rules (approved by Shareholders in 
2007) provide for vesting in certain 
circumstances in the event of an Executive 
leaving the Company. These provisions are in 
line with best practice, and more details are 
available in the LTIP rules.

In the event of a change of control of the 
Company, to the extent that any performance 
conditions have been satisfied (unless the 
Committee determines that the performance 
conditions should not apply) unvested LTIP 
awards will vest immediately. Awards will also 
be reduced pro-rata to take into account  
the proportion of the performance period  
not completed, unless the Committee  
decides otherwise.

CFO Transition
In February 2013, Adrian Hennah succeeded 
Liz Doherty as CFO.

In line with her contractual entitlements, a 
lump-sum termination payment will be paid to 
Liz Doherty in April 2013 totalling £705,000, 
which was provided for at the year end. 
Unvested share and option awards held by  
Liz Doherty will vest in accordance with the plan 
rules, ie they will vest to the extent that any 
performance conditions are satisfied based on 
performance to 31 December 2013 and will  
be reduced pro rata to take into account the 
proportion of the performance period  
not completed.

The remuneration package of Adrian Hennah is 
based on the Company’s remuneration 
philosophy, current market benchmarks and his 
relative experience. Adrian Hennah’s package 

(summarised below) reflects his experience both 
as a CFO in a large-cap listed company and of 
the consumer health care industry.

The package for Adrian Hennah in 2013 will be  
as follows:

Element 

Base salary 
Pension 
Annual bonus
 Target 
 Maximum 

Details

£550,000
25% of pensionable pay

90% of base salary
321% of base salary

Adrian Hennah was also granted 90,000 options 
and 45,000 shares under the LTIP in February 
2013, with vesting subject to the Company’s 
earnings per share growth over the three-year 
period starting with the 2013 financial year. The 
size of Adrian Hennah’s LTIP grant in future years 
will be determined by the Committee in 
accordance with its regular schedule.

The Committee assessed the value of the 
remuneration components forfeited by Adrian 
Hennah as a result of his appointment to RB 
and agreed to grant a sign-on award of 
£200,000, payable on appointment, which 
partially replaced the value of deferred bonus 
awards at his prior employer. The sign-on 
award was contractually committed and 
therefore was provided for at the year end.  
To reflect forfeited long-term incentive awards 
in relation to his previous employment, in each 
of December 2013 and December 2014 
(subject to continued employment at each 
relevant award date), Adrian Hennah will 
receive a cash lump sum equal in value to 
25,000 RB shares (based on the prevailing share 
price on the relevant date). The net amount of 
each cash sum will be required to be used to 
purchase shares and retained as part of his 
share ownership obligation (200,000 shares 
within eight years of appointment).

Non-Executive Directors
Non-Executive Directors do not have service 
agreements, but are engaged on the basis of a 
letter of appointment. In line with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code guidelines, all 
Directors are now subject to re-election 
annually at the AGM.

The Board, in the light of recommendations 
from the Chairman, CEO and CFO, determines 
the remuneration of the Non-Executive 
Directors. Fee levels are reviewed every two 
years, with external advice taken on best 
practice and competitive levels, taking into 
account fee levels at FTSE30 and other FTSE100 
companies, and the responsibilities and time 
commitment of each Non-Executive Director.

Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration consists 
of fees for their services in connection with 
Board and Board Committee meetings. In 
addition to the basic fee, the Deputy Chairman, 
Senior Independent Director, and Chairs of the 
Audit and Remuneration Committees also 
receive an additional fee in recognition of their 
added responsibilities.

It is the policy of the Board that Non-Executive 
Directors are not eligible to participate in any of 

the Company’s bonus, share option, long-term 
incentive or pension schemes. We do, however, 
pay an element of the basic fee in RB shares. 
The fee structures for the Chairman and 
Non-Executive Directors for 2012 are shown in 
Table 1 on page 36.

The fee structure for Non Executive Directors in 
2013 is disclosed in Table 2 on page 36, and 
was agreed following a biennial review of 
Non-Executive Director fees in 2012.

Remuneration in 2012

THE PROCESS OF THE COMMITTEE

Main activities of the Remuneration 
Committee in 2012
In 2012 there were five meetings, including  
one held by written resolution. Our  
activities included:

•	 	Reviewing	Executive	Director	and	other	

Senior Executive base salaries and benefits.

•	 	Reviewing	the	global	remuneration	policy.

•	 	Determining	the	annual	cash	bonus	outcome	

for the 2011 performance year.

•	 	Determining	the	vesting	outcome	for	

long-term incentives granted in December 
2008 (which vested in May 2012).

•	 	Agreeing	short-term	and	long-term	incentive	

arrangements for 2012, including 
performance targets.

•	 Reviewing	its	external,	independent	adviser.

The Remuneration Committee in 2012
The Remuneration Committee is responsible for 
determining and reviewing the terms of 
employment and remuneration of the Executive 
Directors and Senior Executives. The 
remuneration principles established for this 
senior group of employees provide the 
framework for the remuneration packages of 
all other Executives. The Committee also has 
responsibility for determining the remuneration 
of the Chairman.

The Committee comprised four members  
in 2012:
Judith Sprieser (Chairman)
Graham Mackay 
Adrian Bellamy
Richard Cousins.

The Chairman is permitted (in accordance with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code 2010 
(Code)) to sit on the Remuneration Committee 
if he was independent upon appointment as 
Chairman. This is the case with Adrian Bellamy.

The Committee’s terms of reference are 
available on the Company’s website.

Internal Advisers to the Committee in 2012
Internal advisers to the Committee include  
Rakesh Kapoor, CEO, and Simon Nash, SVP 
Human Resources. No individual is present 
when his own remuneration is being discussed. 
The Committee has the discretion to consider 
corporate performance on ESG issues when 
setting remuneration of Executive Directors and 
seeks to ensure that the incentive structure for 
senior management does not raise ESG risks by 

33

2012 
Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Annual Cash Bonus
The annual cash bonus is closely linked to the 
achievement of demanding pre-determined 
targets geared to above-industry performance. 
The performance measures attached to the 
2012 annual cash bonus plan were net revenue 
and net income growth. The Committee sets 
performance targets each year, with reference 
to prevailing growth rates in the Company’s 
peer group, and across the health care and 
FMCG industries more broadly. Based on this 
data targets were set at a level where target 
bonus (120% and 90% of salary for the CEO 
and CFO, respectively) will be earned only 
where the Company’s performance is above the 
industry median. Still more stretching 
percentage growth rates have been set above 
target, and the achievement of these delivers 
higher bonus payments for superior 
performance, worth up to 428% of salary for 
the CEO and 321% of salary for the CFO. Our 
bonus is highly leveraged, truly variable and 
reinforces significant outperformance of the 
market; targets are aggressive and bonus 
payouts are tied to actual performance against 
industry peers. In the last three years, the CEO’s 
bonus payouts have been 357% (CFO: 268%), 
271% (CFO: 203%) and 134% (CFO: 101%) 
of salary in 2009, 2010 and 2011 respectively. 

Based on the Company’s performance in 2012, 
against the net revenue and net income targets 
set at the start of year, the Committee has 
decided to make an annual bonus award of 
227% of base salary to the CEO and 170% of 
base salary to the CFO.

The annual cash bonus plan will remain 
unchanged for 2013.

Under the terms and conditions of the annual 
cash bonus plan, the Company has the right to 
seek redress and damages from an individual 
who has been found to have breached the 
Company’s Code of Conduct, irrespective of 
the position and location the individual might 
hold, in or out of the Company, at the time the 
breach of the Code of Conduct comes to light. 
This includes the Company’s right to require an 
individual to repay any costs incurred through a 
breach of the Code of Conduct from any bonus 
payment made in the year the breach/costs 
were incurred. Annual bonuses are not 
pensionable. The Committee also reserves the 
right, in exceptional circumstances, to make 
individual cash awards.

Long-Term Incentives
The Committee believes that a significant 
element of share-based remuneration ensures 
the financial interests of the Executive Directors 
and other key Executives are aligned with those 
of Shareholders. This is underpinned by a 
significant share ownership requirement placed 
on Senior Executives, with penalties for 
non-compliance (as described in the ‘Executive 
Share Ownership Policy’ section below).

Long-term incentives comprise a mix of share 
options and performance shares. Both the 
levels and combination of share options and 
performance shares are reviewed annually, with 
reference to market data and the associated 
cost to the Company.

The Committee determines the appropriate 
value of the long-term incentives by 
benchmarking the ‘fair’ value of total 
remuneration for Executives against its peer 
group and deducting base salary and annual 
cash bonus. The Company’s long-term 
incentives (and those of the peer group) are 
valued using an expected value methodology 
(Black-Scholes). This is a widely accepted 
valuation approach which enables like-for-like 
comparisons. Although the Committee 
calibrates LTIP award sizes as a fixed number 
(which the Committee believes more 
appropriately aligns Executive interests with 
those of Shareholders compared to the more 
commonly used method based on a fixed 
percentage of salary), the Committee’s policy is 
actively to adjust the fixed number of shares to 
ensure that the fair value of total remuneration 
is appropriately positioned relative to our pay 
peer group. For example, in the last six years 
the Committee has twice revised downwards 
the CEO’s LTIP awards to reflect the strong 
growth in the Company’s share price and to 
ensure that the fair value of long-term 
incentives remained around or below the upper 
quartile of our peer group, as follows:

CEO LTIP Award Sizes, by Year

Year 

2006 
2007 
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 

Shares 

Options

400,000 
300,000 
300,000 
300,000 
300,000 
200,000 
200,000 

800,000
600,000
600,000
600,000
600,000
400,000
400,000

inadvertently motivating irresponsible 
behaviour. Throughout 2012, the Company 
complied with the relevant sections of  
the Code. 

Independent Advisers to the Committee  
in 2012
Until November 2012, Deloitte LLP was the 
Committee’s external and independent  
adviser and, until that date, provided advice  
to the Board on executive compensation  
levels, structure and design. Deloitte also 
provided the Group with international transfer 
tax compliance and global mobility services  
and ad-hoc advice on employment/share 
schemes matters during 2012. These services 
are provided under separate engagement  
terms and the Committee is satisfied that  
the provision of these services did not  
impair Deloitte’s ability to advise the  
Committee independently.

In mid-2012, the Committee conducted a 
review of its adviser. Having invited seven 
companies to submit proposals to provide 
independent advice to the Committee, the 
Committee appointed Kepler Associates as its 
external independent adviser from November 
2012. Kepler provides no other services to  
the Group.

Both Deloitte and Kepler are signatories to the 
Code of Conduct for Remuneration Consultants.

Base Salaries
Base salaries are reviewed annually with  
effect from 1 January. Increases are  
determined by reference to competitive practice 
in the Company’s remuneration peer group 
(comprising 19 international FMCG and  
health care companies), individual performance 
and in the context of pay considerations  
across the Group as a whole. The policy is  
that salaries for Executive Directors and other 
Executive Committee members should typically 
be at, or below, the median of competitor 
market practice.

The approach to reviewing the base salaries of 
Executive Directors is the same as that for other 
employees. Base pay increases for Executive 
Directors from 1 January 2012 were 2% for the 
CFO (in line with typical base pay increases for 
other Executives in RB) and 0% for the CEO. 
The base pay increase for Executive Directors 
from 1 January 2013 will be 4% for the CEO 
and 0% for the outgoing CFO, the increase to 
the CEO’s salary being agreed in the context of 
his performance and base pay increases for the 
broader Senior Executive population and the 
wider workforce in general. 

Executive 

2013 
salary  
(annualised) 

2012 
salary 
(annualised) 

%
increase

Rakesh Kapoor 
Liz Doherty 
Adrian Hennah  £550,000 

£832,000  £800,000 
£428,400  £428,400 
n/a 

4%
0%
n/a

34

2012 
  
 
Single Figure of Remuneration
Table A on page 36 reports a single figure for 
total remuneration for each Executive Director 
for 2012, calculated in accordance with the 
methodology set out in the draft regulations 
issued by BIS in 2012.

Non-Executive  
Director 

Adrian Bellamy 
Richard Cousins 
Peter Harf 
Kenneth Hydon 
André Lacroix 
Graham Mackay 
Judith Sprieser 
Warren Tucker 

Total fees 
 earned 2012 
£000 

Total fees
earned 2011
£000

345
85
90
95
85
92
95
85

345 
85 
90 
95 
85 
92 
95 
85 

No. of shares
‘000

600,000

Salary

Pension & benefits

Annual bonus

LTIP

560

50
a
DEC 07

In December 2012, the following awards were 
granted to the CEO:

Summary of 2012 Long-Term Incentive 
Awards

Executive 

Performance  
shares 

Share 
options 

Option 
exercise
price

Rakesh Kapoor 

200,000  400,000  £39.14

Pension 
In line with the Committee’s emphasis on the 
importance of only rewarding the Executive 
Directors for creating Shareholder value, the 
Group operates a defined contribution pension 
plan: the RB Executive Pension Plan. Rakesh 
Kapoor and Liz Doherty are members of this 
plan, and Adrian Hennah has become a 
member of this plan from his appointment in 
early 2013.

The vesting of the December 2012 awards is 
subject to earnings per share performance over 
three consecutive financial years starting with 
2013. The use of performance conditions 
attached to the vesting of share options is still a 
minority practice among RB’s peer group. 
However, in line with best practice guidelines, 
the Committee believes that the vesting of the 
Company’s options and performance share 
awards should be subject to the satisfaction of 
appropriate performance conditions.

Rakesh Kapoor, CEO 
£000 

,

1
6
0
0
0

Long-term incentives vest subject to the 
achievement of earnings per share growth 
targets that exceed industry performance levels. 
Earnings per share has been selected as the 
performance condition for three reasons:

0
0
0

1
2

,

8
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1.  It focuses Executives on real profit growth 

Annual bonus

Pension & benefits
LTIP
which is strongly aligned with value creation 
at RB;

0

Below
threshold
0% 

2.  It provides a well recognised and accepted 
Maximum 
measure of the Company’s underlying 
financial performance; and
92%

81% 
Variable proportion 
3.  It is a measure that the plan participants can 

Target

Adrian Hennah, CFO 
directly impact.
£000

Earnings per share is measured on an adjusted 
diluted basis, as shown in the Group’s financial 
statements, as this provides an independently 
verifiable measure of performance.

8
0
0
0

LTIP

2
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

Annual bonus

Pension & benefits

The vesting schedule for the options and 
performance shares rewards superior 
performance. For 2012 LTIP awards, the 
Committee has set the same targets and levels 
of awards as in the previous year, due to: the 
industry context in which the Company 
operates; expectations of what will constitute 
Target
performance at the top of the peer group; and 
66% 
factors specific to the Company.
Variable proportion 

Below
threshold

Maximum 

85%

0% 

0

,

2
0
0
0
0

1
0
,
0
0
0

6
0
0
0

Salary

Pension & 
Summary of Earnings per Share Vesting 
benefits
Schedule, 2012 Long-Term Incentive 
Awards

Annual 
bonus

LTIP

% vesting

1
0
0

8
0

6
0

4
0

2
0

0

6%

7%

8%

9%

Average three year earnings per share growth (p.a)

There will be no change to the structure of 
long-term incentives for the Executive Directors 
in 2013.

Rakesh Kapoor’s Company pension contribution 
as CEO was 30% of pensionable pay during 
2012. Liz Doherty’s Company pension 
contribution was 17.5% of pensionable pay in 
2012. Contributions to the Plan are limited 
currently to £50,000 per annum, with the 
balance of the promised pension contribution 
Salary
Annual bonus
being paid as a cash allowance in lieu.

Pension & benefits

LTIP

20000

16000

Executive Share Ownership Policy
Executive Directors and other Senior Executives 
are subject to a compulsory share ownership 
policy. This is to emphasise the alignment of 
Senior Executives to the Company’s 
Shareholders and its business targets. The chart 
below summarises the share ownership policy 
for Rakesh Kapoor and Liz Doherty, as well as 
the number of shares which count towards that 
ownership policy as at 31 December 2012:

12000

8000

4000

No. of shares
‘000

0

7
0
0

5
6
0

4
2
0

2
8
0

1
4
0

0

10000

8000

6000

281,869

200,000

Rakesh Kapoor
4000

14,000

Liz Doherty

Share ownership requirement

Actual holding

0

1.68

2000
Net revenue element
These shareholding requirements (equating to 
c.29x base salary for Rakesh Kapoor and c.18x 
base salary for Liz Doherty based on 2012 base 
salaries and the share price at 31 December 
2012) are significantly higher than market 
practice. Executives, including those newly 
recruited or promoted into Senior Executive 
positions, are allowed eight years to attain 
these shareholdings and targets are pro-rated 
until these targets are met. Rakesh Kapoor has 
exceeded his pro-rated target levels based on 
his tenure to date. Other Senior Executives 
must own between 30-50,000 shares, 
representing c.7x base salary.

80
Threshold 

Maximum

100

60

1
.
8
9

1
.
5
0

1
.
0
0

0
.
5
0

0

N
e
t

r
e
v
e
n
u
e
m
u
l
t
i
p

l
i
e
r

20

If the Executive does not meet these 
40
requirements within the required time period, 
Net income element
the Committee will not make any further 
awards of performance shares or options to the 
Executive until the targets have been met. 
Further, if, in the Committee’s opinion, an 
Executive is not making sufficient progress 
towards satisfying the requirement, then the 
levels of grants and awards will be reduced, 
until improvement is demonstrated.

1.13

0

Threshold 

Maximum

Reckitt Benckiser outcome 2012

1
.
8
9

N
e
t

i

.

1
5
0

n
c
o
m
e
m
u
l
t
i
p

l
i

e
r

.

1
0
0

0
.
5
0

0

£

0

200

175

125

150

100

l
i
e
r

N
e
t

5
6
0

7
0
0

1
.
8
9

280

1.68

Net revenue element

420
 FTSE 100
 RB
FTSE 100 comparison

£

200

175

150

125

100

b
75

700

Historical TSR Performance
Growth in the value of a hypothetical £100 
holding in RB and the FTSE100 over five 
years, based on spot values.

600,000

1
.
5
0

US Peer group comparison
140

Notes
The graph above shows the performance of 
RB in terms of TSR performance against the 
r
e
UK FTSE 100 index over a five-year period and 
v
e
n
u
conforms to Schedule 8 of the Large- and 
e
'RK
LD
m
Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
u
l
t
Regulations 2008. The index was selected on 
i
p
the basis of companies of a comparable size in 
the absence of an appropriate industry peer 
group in the UK. 

Net revenue element

0
.
5
0

1
.
0
0

4
2
0

2
8
0

1
4
0

0

281,869

200,000

14,000

Adjusted net income £m 

Rakesh Kapoor

Liz Doherty

Share ownership requirement

Actual holding

DEC 08

DEC 09

DEC 10

DEC 11

DEC 12

Adjusted net income £m 

1,818*

1,661*

1,418*

1,143*

905*

07

08

09

10

*Adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 

  tax effects thereon. Refer note 8 of the financial statements

  for further detail.

Diluted earnings per share pence

247.1*

226.5*

194.7*

157.8*

123.4*

07

08

09

10

11

*Adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 

  tax effects thereon. Refer note 8 of the financial statements

  for further detail.

Declared dividend per share pence

125.0

115.0

100.0

80.0

55.0

2

0

0

0

1

6

0

0

1

2

0

0

8

0

0

4

0

0

0

2

5

0

2

0

0

1

5

0

1

0

0

5

0

0

1

2

5

1

0

0

7

5

5

0

2

5

0

2000

1600

1200

800

400

0

250

200

150

100

50

0

125

100

75

50

25

0

b

a

700

560

420

280

140

0

2.00

905*

1.75

1.50

1.25

1.00

07

0.75

0.25

0.00

123.4*

2.00

1.75

1.50

1.25

1.00

07

0.75

0.25

0.00

55.0

2

0

0

0

1

6

0

0

1

2

0

0

8

0

0

4

0

0

0

2

5

0

2

0

0

1

5

0

1

0

0

5

0

0

1

2

5

1

0

0

7

5

5

0

2

5

0

'RK

LD

1,818*

1,661*

Net revenue element

1,418*

1,143*

08

09

10

*Adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 

  tax effects thereon. Refer note 8 of the financial statements

  for further detail.

0.50

Diluted earnings per share pence

Threshold 

Stretch

247.1*

226.5*

194.7*

Net income element

157.8*

08

09

10

11

*Adjusted to exclude the impact of exceptional items and 

  tax effects thereon. Refer note 8 of the financial statements

  for further detail.

0.50

Declared dividend per share pence

100.0

80.0

2000

1600

1200

800

400

0

250

200

150

100

50

0

125

100

75

50

25

0

1.00

Judith Sprieser 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

0.75

1
.
8
9

0.50

0.25

0.00

2.00

1.75

1.50

1.25

1.00

0.75

0.50

0.25

0.00

N
e
t

i

1
.
5
0

1
Threshold 
.
0
0

n
c
o
m
e
m
u
l
t
i
p

l
i
e
r

0
.
5
0

Net income element

0

Stretch

1.13

Threshold 

Maximum

Reckitt Benckiser outcome 2012

Threshold 

Stretch

125.0

115.0

07

08

09

10

11

Threshold 

Stretch

35

07

08

09

10

11

DEC 08

DEC 09
Approved by the Board on 8 March 2013 
and signed on its behalf by:

1.25

DEC 10

DEC 11

Net income element

Threshold 

Maximum

1.75
DEC 07
1.50

2.00

DEC 12

75

50

0

Rakesh Kapoor, CEO 

£000 

Below

threshold

0% 

Target

Maximum 

81% 

92%

Variable proportion 

Adrian Hennah, CFO 

£000

Below

threshold

0% 

Target

Maximum 

66% 

85%

Variable proportion 

Salary

Pension & 

benefits

Annual 

bonus

LTIP

% vesting

2

0

,

0

0

0

1

6

,

0

0

0

1

2

,

0

0

0

8

0

0

0

4

0

0

0

0

1

0

,

0

0

0

8

0

0

0

6

0

0

0

4

0

0

0

2

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

8

0

6

0

4

0

2

0

0

6%

7%

8%

9%

Average three year earnings per share growth (p.a)

Salary

Salary

20000

16000

12000

8000

4000

0

10000

8000

6000

4000

2000

0

100

80

60

40

20

0

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Remuneration Report continued

Table A – Single Figure of Remuneration 

Base salary 

Benefits 

 Rakesh Kapoor 

  £800,000 

  £31,000 

Pension – defined contribution 

  £50,000 

Liz Doherty 

£428,000 

£24,000 

£50,000 

Pension – cash allowance 

  £188,000 

£23,000 

Valuation basis 

As earned for 2012

Based on cash equivalent for 2012 

Contribution to the RB Executive Pension Plan in 2012 
(capped at £50,000 p.a. in 2012)

Cash allowance in lieu of the balance of the promised contribution 
in 2012

Annual bonus 

 £1,814,000 

£729,000 

Earned based on 2012 performance, paid in March 2013

Performance shares 

 £ 2,279,000 

Share options 

 £1,141,000 

n/a 

n/a 

LTIP shares granted in December 2009, which will vest on 
2 May 2013 as to 100%, valued using average share price  
over Q4 2012 (£37.99) 

LTIP options granted in December 2009, with exercise price of 
£31.65, which will vest on 2 May 2013 as to 100%, valued using  
average share price over Q4 2012 (£37.99)

Total remuneration 

 £6,303,000 

£1,254,000

The following information in Tables 1-4 on pages 36 to 37 comprises the auditable disclosures of the Directors’ Remuneration Report.

Table 1 – Chairman and Non-Executive Director fee structure for 2012

Basic fee payable in cash 
Basic fee payable in shares 
Committee membership fee 
Committee chairmanship fee 
Senior Independent Director fee 

Total 

Chairman 
£ 

283,000 
62,000 
– 
– 
– 

345,000 

 Deputy Chairman 
£ 

Chairmen of
  Remuneration Committee 
 and Audit Committee 
£ 

Senior 
 Independent Director 
£ 

Other Non-Executive
Directors
£

65,500 
14,500 
10,000 
– 
– 

90,000 

61,500 
13,500 
– 
20,000 
– 

95,000 

61,500 
13,500 
10,000 
– 
7,000 

92,000 

61,500
13,500
10,000
–
–

85,000

Table 2 – Chairman and Non-Executive Director Fee Structure for 2013

Chairman 
£ 

308,000 
67,000 
– 
– 
– 

375,000 

 Deputy Chairman 
£ 

Chairmen of
  Remuneration Committee 
 and Audit Committee 
£ 

Senior 
 Independent Director 
£ 

Other Non-Executive
Directors
£

82,000 
18,000 
15,000 
– 
– 

70,000 
15,000 
– 
30,000 
– 

70,000 
15,000 
15,000 
– 
12,000 

70,000
15,000
15,000
–
–

115,000 

115,000 

112,000 

100,000 

  Base salary 
and fees 
£000 

Notes 

Bonus 
£000 

Benefits 

Other 
in kind  payments 
£000 

£000 

345 

Pension 
contri- 
butions 
£000 

2012 
Total 
£000 

2011
Total
£000

345 

345

1 

2 
2 

3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 

800 
428 

1,814 
729 

5 
3 

214 
44 

50 
50 

2,883 
1,254 

736
910

85 
90 
95 
85 
92 
95 
85 

85 
90 
95 
85 
92 
95 
85 

85
90
95
85
92
95
85

2,200 

2,543 

8 

258 

100 

5,109 

2,618

Basic fee payable in cash 
Basic fee payable in shares 
Committee membership fee 
Committee chairmanship fee 
Senior Independent Director fee 

Total 

Table 3 – Remuneration Disclosures

Chairman
Adrian Bellamy 

Executive Directors
Rakesh Kapoor (appointed 1 September 2011)   
Liz Doherty 

Non-Executive Directors
Richard Cousins 
Peter Harf 
Kenneth Hydon 
André Lacroix 
Graham Mackay 
Judith Sprieser 
Warren Tucker 

Total 

36

2012 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes
1.  Adrian Bellamy’s fees as Chairman for 2012 were £345,000. These fees include £62,000 (gross), the net amount of which was applied to buy 

ordinary shares in the Company. These shares must be retained by Adrian Bellamy while in office.

2.  The remuneration reported under ‘Other payments’ in respect of Rakesh Kapoor comprises: car allowance, international transfer-related benefits and 
the balance of the promised pension contribution paid as cash. For Liz Doherty it comprises: car allowance, relocation benefits, and the balance of 
the promised pension contribution paid as cash.

3.  Non-Executive Director fees for 2012 include £13,500 (gross), and £14,500 (gross) in the case of Peter Harf, the net amount of which was applied to 

buy ordinary shares in the Company. These shares must be retained by the Director while in office.

4.  The total emoluments of the Directors of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc as defined by section 412 the Companies Act were £5,009,000 (2011: 

£6,455,000).

5.  The aggregate gross gains made by the Directors on the vesting of restricted shares during the year were £2,168,400 (2011: £10,211,160). The gains 
are calculated based on the market price at the date of vesting of restricted shares, although the shares may have been retained and no gain realised.

6.  The total emoluments of Rakesh Kapoor (excluding pension contributions) were £2,833,000. Total emoluments of Liz Doherty (excluding pension 

contributions) were £1,204,000.

Table 4 – Directors’ Options and Performance-Based Restricted Share Awards

Table 4 sets out each Director’s options over or rights to ordinary shares of the Company under the Company’s various long-term incentive plans.  
The closing price of the ordinary shares at the year end was £38.79 and the range during the year was £32.00 to £39.99.   

Long-term incentives 

Notes 

Grant date 

At 
1.1.12 

Granted 
during 
the year 

Exercised/ 
vested 
during 
the year 

At 
31.12.12 

Option 
price (£) 

Market 
price at 
date of 
award 
(£) 

Market
price at
date of
exercise/ 
vesting (£) 

Exercise/
vesting period

5.12.11 

90,000 

90,000 

32.09 

May 15–Dec 21

Liz Doherty 
Options 

Performance-based  
restricted shares 

Rakesh Kapoor  
Options 

Performance-based  
restricted shares 

1 

1 
1 

1 
1,2 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1,2 
1 
1 
1 
1 

9.2.11 
5.12.11 

10,000 
45,000 

11.12.07  120,000 
8.12.08  180,000 
7.12.09  180,000 
1.12.10  180,000 
5.12.11  400,000 
3.12.12 

  400,000 

32.70 
32.19 

10,000 
45,000 

  120,000 
  180,000 
  180,000 
  180,000 
  400,000 
  400,000 

29.44 
27.29 
31.65 
34.64 
32.09 
39.14 

60,000 
8.12.08 
60,000 
7.12.09 
1.12.10 
60,000 
5.12.11  200,000 
3.12.12 

  200,000 

60,000 

60,000 
60,000 
  200,000 
  200,000 

36.14 

27.80 
31.80 
34.08 
32.19 
39.66 

May 2014
May 2015

May 11–Dec 17
May 12–Dec 18
May 13–Dec 19
May 14–Dec 20
May 15 –Dec 21
May 16 –Dec 22

May 2012
May 2013
May 2014
May 2015
May 2016

Exercise
period

Sharesave Scheme 

Liz Doherty  

  Grant date 

26.8.11 

At 
1.1.12 

327 

Granted 
during 
the year 

Exercised 
during 
the year 

Lapsed 
during 
the year 

At 
31.12.12 

Option 
price 
 (£) 

Market
price at 
exercise (£) 

327 

27.57 

Feb 15–July 15

Rakesh Kapoor  

8.9.08 

796 

796 

21.92 

Feb 16–July 16

Notes
1.  Vesting of long-term incentives is subject to the achievement of the following compound average annual growth (CAAG) in earnings per share over a 

three year period.

CAAG for long-term incentives granted in December 08-12 

  Proportion of grant vesting
(%)

40 

6 

60 

7 

80 

8 

100

9

2.  The grant made in December 2008 vested in full in May 2012. The Company exceeded its target compound average actual growth (CAAG) in 

earnings per share over a three year period (2009-2011) of 9%.

3. There have been no variations in the terms and conditions of options and performance-based restricted shares during the year.

37

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditors’ Report to the members of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc

Other matter 
We have reported separately on the Parent 
Company financial statements of Reckitt 
Benckiser Group plc for the year ended  
31 December 2012 and on the information in 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report that is 
described as having been audited. 

Ian Chambers (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
London
8 March 2013

We have audited the Group financial statements 
of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc for the year 
ended	31	December	2012	which	comprise	the	
Group Income Statement, the Group Statement 
of Comprehensive Income, the Group Balance 
Sheet, the Group Statement of Changes in 
Equity,	the	Group	Cash	Flow	Statement	and	the	
related	notes.	The	financial	reporting	framework	
that has been applied in their preparation is 
applicable	law	and	International	Financial	
Reporting	Standards	(IFRSs)	as	adopted	by	the	
European	Union.	

Respective Responsibilities of Directors  
and Auditors 
As explained more fully in the Statement of 
Directors’ Responsibilities set out on page 30, 
the Directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the Group financial statements and for being 
satisfied	that	they	give	a	true	and	fair	view.	 
Our responsibility is to audit and express an 
opinion on the Group financial statements in 
accordance	with	applicable	law	and	
International	Standards	on	Auditing	(UK	and	
Ireland).	Those	standards	require	us	to	comply	
with	the	Auditing	Practices	Board’s	Ethical	
Standards for Auditors. 

This	report,	including	the	opinions,	has	been	
prepared for and only for the Company’s 
members	as	a	body	in	accordance	with	Chapter	
3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for 
no other purpose. We do not, in giving these 
opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any 
other	purpose	or	to	any	other	person	to	whom	
this	report	is	shown	or	into	whose	hands	it	may	
come	save	where	expressly	agreed	by	our	prior	
consent	in	writing.

Scope of the Audit of the Financial 
Statements 
An audit involves obtaining evidence about  
the amounts and disclosures in the financial 
statements sufficient to give reasonable 
assurance that the financial statements are free 
from	material	misstatement,	whether	caused	by	
fraud	or	error.	This	includes	an	assessment	of:	
whether	the	accounting	policies	are	appropriate	
to the Group’s circumstances and have been 
consistently applied and adequately disclosed; 
the reasonableness of significant accounting 
estimates made by the Directors; and the 
overall presentation of the financial statements. 
In	addition,	we	read	all	the	financial	and	
non-financial information in the annual report 
to	identify	material	inconsistencies	with	the	
audited	financial	statements.	If	we	become	
aware	of	any	apparent	material	misstatements	
or	inconsistencies	we	consider	the	implications	
for our Report.

Opinion on Financial Statements 
In our opinion the Group financial statements: 

•	 	Give	a	true	and	fair	view	of	the	state	of	the	
Group’s affairs as at 31 December 2012 and 
of	its	profit	and	cash	flows	for	the	year	then	
ended; 

•	 	Have	been	properly	prepared	in	accordance	

with	IFRSs	as	adopted	by	the	European	Union;	
and 

•	 	Have	been	prepared	in	accordance	with	the	

requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and 
Article 4 of the lAS Regulation. 

Separate Opinion in Relation to IFRSs as 
issued by the IASB 
As explained in note 1 to the Group financial 
statements, the Group in addition to complying 
with	its	legal	obligation	to	apply	IFRSs	as	
adopted	by	the	European	Union,	has	also	
applied	IFRSs	as	issued	by	the	International	
Accounting Standards Board (IASB). 

In our opinion the Group financial statements 
comply	with	IFRSs	as	issued	by	the	IASB.

Opinion on Other Matter Prescribed by the 
Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion the information given in the 
Report of the Directors for the financial year  
for	which	the	Group	financial	statements	 
are	prepared	is	consistent	with	the	Group	
financial statements.

Matters on which We are Required to 
Report by Exception 
We have nothing to report in respect of  
the	following:	

Under	the	Companies	Act	2006	we	are	required	
to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•	 	Certain	disclosures	of	Directors’	remuneration	

specified	by	law	are	not	made;	or	

•	 	We	have	not	received	all	the	information	and	

explanations	we	require	for	our	audit.

Under	the	Listing	Rules	we	are	required	 
to	review:	

•	 	The	Directors’	statement,	set	out	on	page	30,	

in relation to going concern; 

•	 	The	part	of	the	Corporate	Governance	
Statement relating to the Company’s 
compliance	with	the	nine	provisions	of	the	UK	
Corporate Governance Code specified for our 
review;	and

•	 	Certain	elements	of	the	report	to	Shareholders	

by the Board on Directors’ remuneration.

38

Notes to the financial statements continued2012Group income statement

For the year ended 31 December 

Notes 

Net revenue 
Cost of sales  

Gross profit 
Net operating expenses 

Operating profit 

Operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional	items	

Operating profit 

Finance	income	
Finance	expense2 

Net finance expense 

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation 
Tax	on	profit	on	ordinary	activities	

Net income 

Attributable to non-controlling interests 
Attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	

Net income 

Earnings per ordinary share
Basic earnings per share 
Diluted earnings per share 

1 Refer to note 1 for further details.

2 
3 

3 

2 

3	

6	
6 

7	

8 
8 

2012 
£m 

9,567 
(4,030) 

5,537 
(3,102) 

2,435 

2,570 
(135) 

2,435 

26 
(41) 

(15) 

2,420 
(587) 

1,833 

4 
1,829 

1,833 

2011
         (restated)1
£m

9,485
(4,036)

5,449
(3,054)

2,395

2,487
(92)

2,395

23
 (42)

(19)

2,376
(622)

1,754

9 
1,745

1,754

252.5p 
249.5p 

239.8p
237.1p

2	2011	includes	a	£4m	exceptional	charge	relating	to	finance	expenses	associated	with	the	acquisition	of	SSL.

Group statement of comprehensive income 

For the year ended 31 December 

Net income 
Other comprehensive income 
Actuarial losses, net of tax 
Gains	on	cash	flow	hedges,	net	of	tax	
Net exchange losses on foreign currency translation, net of tax 
Reclassification of foreign currency translation reserve on disposal of subsidiary, 
net of tax 

Notes 

7 
7	
7 

7 

Other comprehensive income, net of tax 

Total comprehensive income 

Attributable to non-controlling interests 
Attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	

2012 
£m 

1,833 

(49) 
3 
(255) 

9 

(292) 

1,541 

(1) 
1,542 

1,541 

2011
£m

1,754

(49)
3
(226)

–

(272)

1,482

4
1,478

1,482

39

Report of the Directors2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Group balance sheet
Notes to the financial statements continued

As at 31 December 

ASSETS
Non-current assets
Goodwill	and	other	intangible	assets	
Property, plant and equipment 
Deferred tax assets 
Available for sale financial assets 
Retirement benefit surplus 
Other receivables 

Current assets
Inventories 
Trade	and	other	receivables	
Derivative financial instruments 
Current tax receivables 
Available for sale financial assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets 

LIABILITIES
Current liabilities
Borrowings	
Provisions for liabilities and charges  
Trade	and	other	payables	
Derivative financial instruments 
Current tax liabilities 

Non-current liabilities
Borrowings	
Deferred tax liabilities 
Retirement benefit obligations 
Provisions for liabilities and charges  
Non-current tax liabilities 
Other non-current liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

EQUITY
Capital and reserves
Share capital 
Share premium  
Merger reserve 
Hedging	reserve	
Foreign	currency	translation	reserve		
Retained earnings 

Non-controlling interests 

Total equity 

Notes 

9	
10 
11 
14 
21 

12 
13	
14 

14 
15 

16	
17 
20	
14 

16	
11 
21 
17 

22 

24 
24	
24	

2012 
£m 

11,175 
737 
49 
2 
27 
33 

12,023 

735 
1,407 
4 
20 
4 
887 

3,057 

2011
£m

10,258
732
150
10
32
6

11,188

758
1,442
67
21
11
639

2,938

15,080 

14,126

(3,271) 
(128) 
(2,842) 
(43) 
(203) 

(6,487) 

(3) 
(1,814) 
(426) 
(100) 
(311) 
(17) 

(2,671) 

(9,158) 

5,922 

73 
184 
(14,229) 
2 
(131) 
20,022 

5,921 

1 

5,922 

(2,505)
(60)
(2,901)
(7)
 (227)

(5,700)

(3)
(1,772)
(502)
(118)
(211)
(39)

(2,645)

(8,345) 

5,781

73
86
(14,229)
(1)
110
19,672

5,711

70

5,781

The	financial	statements	on	pages	39	to	74	were	approved	by	the	Board	and	signed	on	its	behalf	on	8	March	2013	by:

Adrian Bellamy 
Director 

Rakesh Kapoor
Director

40

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Group statement of changes in equity

For the year ended 31 December 

Notes 

Balance at 1 January 2011 

Comprehensive income
Net income 
Other comprehensive income
Actuarial losses, net of tax 
Gains	on	cash	flow	hedges,	
net of tax 
Net exchange losses on foreign
currency translation, net of tax 

Total	other	comprehensive	income	 	

Total comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners
Proceeds from share issue 
Share-based payments 
Deferred	tax	on	share	awards	
Current	tax	on	share	awards	
Dividends 
Non-controlling interest arising 
on business combination 
Put option issued to  
non-controlling interest 

Total transactions with owners   

Balance at 31 December 2011 

Comprehensive income
Net income 
Other comprehensive income
Actuarial losses, net of tax 
Gains	on	cash	flow	hedges,	
net of tax 
Net exchange losses on foreign
currency translation, net of tax 
Reclassification of foreign currency 
translation reserves on disposal 
of subsidiary, net of tax 

Total	other	comprehensive	income	 	

Total comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners
Proceeds from share issue 
Share-based payments 
Current	tax	on	share	awards	
Shares repurchased and held in 
Treasury	
Dividends 
Acquisition of non-controlling 
interest 
Reclassification of non-controlling
interest on disposal 

7 

7 

7 

23 

27 

7 

7 

7 

7 

23 

22	
27 

25  

Share		
premium 
£m 

Merger	
reserve 
£m 

Hedging	
reserve 
£m 

Foreign	
currency 
translation	
reserve 
£m 

Total
  attributable 
Retained	 	to	owners	of	
the parent 
earnings 
£m 
£m 

Non-
controlling	
interests 
£m 

Total
equity
£m

59 

(14,229) 

(4) 

331 

18,828 

5,058 

72 

5,130

Share	
capital 
£m 

73 

1,745 

1,745 

9 

1,754

–	

– 

–	

– 

27 

–	

– 

(49) 

(49) 

3 

3	

3 

(221) 

(221)	

(49)	

3 

(221) 

(267)	

(221) 

1,696 

1,478 

61 
(13)	
2	
(873) 

27 
61 
(13)	
2	
(873) 

(29) 

(29) 

– 

73 

27 

86 

– 

(14,229) 

– 

(1) 

– 

(852) 

(825) 

110 

19,672 

5,711 

(49)

3

(226)

(272)

1,482

27
61
(13)
2
(880)

1

(29)

(831)

5,781

(5) 

(5)	

4 

(7) 

1 

(6) 

70 

–	

– 

–	

– 

98 

–	

– 

3 

3	

3 

1,829 

1,829 

4 

1,833

(49) 

(49) 

3 

(49)

3

(250) 

(250) 

(5) 

(255)

9 

9 

(241)	

(49)	

(287)	

(241) 

1,780 

1,542 

(5)	

(1) 

49 
23	

98 
49 
23	

(535)	
(916) 

(535)	
(916) 

(4) 

9

(292)

1,541

98
49
23

(535)
(920)

(51) 

(51) 

(55) 

(106)

(9) 

(9)

Total transactions with owners   

Balance at 31 December 2012 

– 

73 

98 

– 

184 

(14,229) 

– 

2 

– 

(1,430) 

(1,332) 

(68) 

(1,400)

(131) 

20,022 

5,921 

1 

5,922

41

2012	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes 

26 

26 
26 

1	

22 
22	

27	

25 

15 
16 

2012 
£m 

2,435 
148 
(7) 
(13) 
(32) 
19 
(16) 
(160) 
49 

2,423 
(34) 
27 
(528) 

1,888 

(166) 
(11) 
13 
9 
(877) 
81 
7 
14 
(6) 

(936) 

98 
(535) 
887 
(112) 
(916) 
(4) 
(106) 

(688) 

264 
634 
(16) 

882 

887 
(5) 

882 

1,888 
(153) 

1,735 

2011
£m

2,395
157
1
(9)
–
(131)
(113)
69
61

2,430
(35)
22
(677)

1,740

(164)
(41)
5
12
(460)
-
(2)
2
–

(648)

27
–
249
(400)
(873)
(7)
–

(1,004)

88
568
(22)

634

639
(5)

634

1,740
(159)

1,581

Group cash flow statement

For the year ended 31 December 

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Cash generated from operations
Operating profit 
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment 
Fair	value	(gains)/losses		
Gain on sale of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets 
Gain on sale of businesses 
Decrease/(increase)	in	inventories	
Increase in trade and other receivables 
(Decrease)/increase	in	payables	and	provisions	 	
Share-based payments 

Cash generated from operations  
Interest paid 
Interest received 
Tax	paid	

Net cash generated from operating activities 

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Purchase of intangible assets  
Disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Disposal of intangible assets  
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired  
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed 
Maturity/(purchase)	of	short-term	investments	 	
Maturity of long-term investments   
Net	cash	outflow	on	deconsolidation	of	a	subsidiary	

Net cash used in investing activities 

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares 
Shares	purchased	and	held	in	Treasury	
Proceeds	from	borrowings	
Repayments	of	borrowings	
Dividends	paid	to	owners	of	the	parent	
Dividends paid to non-controlling interest 
Acquisition of non-controlling interest 

Net cash used in financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents   
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year 
Exchange	losses	

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year 

Cash and cash equivalents comprise:
Cash and cash equivalents 
Overdrafts 

RECONCILIATION OF NET CASH FLOW FROM OPERATIONS
Net cash generated from operating activities 
Net purchases of property, plant and equipment 

Net cash flow from operations 

Management	uses	net	cash	flow	from	operations	as	a	performance	measure.

42

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The	principal	accounting	policies	adopted	in	the	
preparation of these financial statements are 
set	out	below.	Unless	otherwise	stated,	these	
policies have been consistently applied to all the 
years presented.

Basis of Preparation
These	financial	statements	have	been	prepared	
in	accordance	with	EU	endorsed	International	
Financial	Reporting	Standards	(IFRSs)	and	with	
those parts of the Companies Act 2006 
applicable	to	companies	reporting	under	IFRS.	
The	financial	statements	are	also	in	compliance	
with	IFRS	as	issued	by	the	International	
Accounting	Standards	Board.	These	financial	
statements have been prepared under the 
historical cost convention, as modified by the 
revaluation of certain financial assets and 
liabilities at fair value through profit or loss.  
A summary of the Group’s more important 
accounting	policies	is	set	out	below.

The	Directors	continue	to	adopt	the	going	
concern basis for accounting in preparing these 
financial	statements.	The	Directors	have	a	
reasonable expectation that the Group has 
adequate resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future. 

The	preparation	of	financial	statements	that	
conform	to	IFRS	requires	management	to	make	
estimates and assumptions that affect the 
reported amounts of assets and liabilities at the 
balance sheet date and revenue and expenses 
during the reporting period. Although these 
estimates are based on management’s best 
knowledge	at	the	time,	actual	amounts	may	
ultimately differ from those estimates.

Following	a	deterioration	in	the	relationship	
between	the	Group	and	the	local	management	
of	TTK-LIG	Limited	(TTK),	the	Group	considered	
it	no	longer	had	the	power	to	govern	the	
financial	and	operating	policies	of	TTK.	 
Effective	from	1	January	2012	the	results,	
non-controlling	interest	and	net	assets	of	TTK	
were	deconsolidated	from	the	Group	results.	
The	Group	subsequently	disposed	of	its	
investment	in	TTK	on	9	November	2012.

There	were	no	new	standards,	amendments	
and	interpretations	that	were	adopted	by	the	
Group and effective for the first time for the 
financial	year	beginning	1	January	2012	that	
were	material	to	the	Group.	

A	number	of	new	standards,	amendments	and	
interpretations are effective for annual periods 
beginning	after	1	January	2013	and	have	not	
yet been applied in preparing these financial 
statements. None of these are expected to have 
a significant effect on the financial statements 
of	the	Group,	with	the	exception	of	the	
amendments to IAS 19, Employee Benefits.  
This	standard	will	replace	the	interest	cost	on	
pension scheme liabilities and expected return 
on	pension	scheme	assets	with	a	net	interest	
amount that is calculated by applying the 
discount	rate	to	the	net	defined	benefit	liability/
asset.	Had	this	standard	been	applied	in	
preparing the financial statements for the year 
ended 31 December 2012, the net impact 
would	have	been	an	additional	charge	of	£12m	
to the income statement.

Basis of Consolidation
The	consolidated	financial	statements	include	
the results of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc, a 
company	registered	in	the	UK,	and	all	its	
subsidiary undertakings made up to the same 
accounting date. Subsidiary undertakings are 
those entities controlled by Reckitt Benckiser 
Group	plc.	Control	exists	where	the	Group	has	
the	power	to	govern	the	financial	and	
operating policies of an entity so as to obtain 
benefits from its activities. 

In the case of acquisitions and disposals of 
businesses, the results of trading are consolidated 
from	or	to	the	date	upon	which	control	passes.

Inter-company transactions, balances and 
unrealised	gains	on	transactions	between	
Group companies have been eliminated on 
consolidation.	Unrealised	losses	have	also	been	
eliminated to the extent that they do not 
represent an impairment of a transferred asset. 
Subsidiaries’ accounting policies have been 
changed	where	necessary	to	ensure	consistency	
with	the	policies	adopted	by	the	Group.	

Change in Accounting Policy
The	income	statement	for	the	year	ended	 
31 December 2011 has been restated to reflect 
a change in the Group’s accounting policy for 
certain	consumer	promotional	costs.	The	Group	
now	treats	certain	consumer	promotional	costs	
as	cost	of	sales	where	previously	these	were	
classified as marketing in net operating 
expenses.	The	Directors	believe	that	this	change	
provides more relevant information about the 
performance of the Group and aligns the 
Group’s	accounting	policies	with	common	
industry	practice.	This	restatement	had	no	
impact	on	the	balance	sheet	and	the	following	
impact on the income statement.

Year ended
31 December 2011 
£m

Increase in cost of sales 
Decrease in gross profit 
Decrease in net operating expenses 

Net impact on operating profit 

213
(213)
(213)

–

Operating Segments
Operating segments are reported in a manner 
consistent	with	the	internal	reporting	provided	
to	the	chief	operating	decision-maker.	The	chief	
operating	decision-maker	(CODM),	who	is	
responsible for allocating resources and assessing 
performance of the operating segments, has 
been	identified	as	the	Executive	Committee.	
Items	of	income	and	expense	which	are	not	
part of the results and financial position of the 
operating segments and therefore reported to 
the CODM outside of the individual segment 
financial	information,	are	shown	in	the	
Corporate segment.

Foreign Currency Translation
Items included in the financial statements  
of each of the Group’s entities are measured 
using the currency of the primary economic 
environment	in	which	the	entity	operates	(the	
functional	currency).	The	consolidated	financial	
statements	are	presented	in	Sterling,	which	is	
the Group’s presentation currency.

Foreign	currency	transactions	are	translated	 
into the functional currency using exchange 
rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. 
Foreign	exchange	gains	and	losses	resulting	
from the settlement of foreign currency 
transactions and from the translation at period 
end exchange rates of monetary assets and 
liabilities denominated in foreign currencies  
are recognised in the income statement, except 
where	hedge	accounting	is	applied.

The	financial	statements	of	overseas	subsidiary	
undertakings are translated into Sterling on the 
following	basis:

•	 	Assets	and	liabilities	at	the	rate	of	exchange	

ruling at the year end date.

•	 	Profit	and	loss	account	items	at	the	average	

rate of exchange for the period.

Exchange	differences	arising	from	the	
translation of the net investment in foreign 
entities,	and	of	borrowings	and	other	 
currency instruments designated as hedges  
of such investments, are taken to equity  
on consolidation.

Property, Plant and Equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated  
at cost less accumulated depreciation and 
impairment,	with	the	exception	of	freehold	
land,	which	is	shown	at	cost	less	impairment.	
Cost includes expenditure that is directly 
attributable to the acquisition of the asset. 
Except	for	freehold	land	and	assets	under	
construction, the cost of property, plant and 
equipment	is	written	off	on	a	straight-line	basis	
over the period of the expected useful life of 
the	asset.	For	this	purpose,	expected	lives	are	
determined	within	the	following	limits:

•	 	Freehold	buildings:	not	more	than	50	years;	

•	 	Leasehold	land	and	buildings:	the	lesser	of	 

50 years or the life of the lease; and

•	 	Owned	plant	and	equipment:	not	more	than	 
15 years (except for environmental assets  
which	are	not	more	than	20	years).	

In general, production plant and equipment 
and	office	equipment	are	written	off	over	 
10 years or less; motor vehicles and computer 
equipment over five years or less.

Assets’ residual values and useful lives are 
reviewed,	and	adjusted	if	necessary,	at	each	
balance sheet date. Property, plant and 
equipment	are	reviewed	for	impairment	if	
events or changes in circumstances indicate 
that the carrying amount may not be appropriate. 
Freehold	land	is	reviewed	for	impairment	on	 
an annual basis.

Gains and losses on the disposal of property, 
plant and equipment are determined by 
comparing	the	asset’s	carrying	value	with	 
any sale proceeds, and are included in the 
income statement.

Business Combinations
The	acquisition	method	is	used	to	account	for	
the acquisition of subsidiaries. Identifiable net 
assets acquired (including intangibles) in a 
business combination are measured initially  
at their fair values at the acquisition date.

43

2012 
 
 
Value	in	use	is	calculated	with	reference	to	the	
future	cash	flows	expected	to	be	generated	 
by	an	asset	(or	group	of	assets	where	cash	
flows	are	not	identifiable	to	specific	assets).	 
The	pre-tax	discount	rate	used	in	brand	
impairment	reviews	is	based	on	a	weighted	
average cost of capital for comparable 
companies operating in similar markets and 
geographies	as	the	Group	including,	where	
appropriate,	an	adjustment	for	the	specific 
risks	associated	with	the	relevant	cash	
generating unit.

Inventories
Inventories	are	stated	at	the	lower	of	cost	or	
net realisable value. Cost comprises materials, 
direct labour and an appropriate portion of 
overhead expenses (based on normal operating 
capacity) and is determined on a first in,  
first	out	(FIFO)	basis.	Net	realisable	value	 
is the estimated selling price less applicable 
selling expenses.

Trade Receivables
Trade	receivables	are	initially	recognised	at	 
fair value and subsequently held at amortised 
cost, less provision for impairment. If there is 
objective	evidence	that	the	Group	will	not	be	
able to collect the full amount of the receivable, 
an impairment is recognised through the 
income statement. Significant financial 
difficulties of the debtor, probability that  
a	debtor	will	enter	bankruptcy	or	financial	
reorganisation, and default or delinquency  
in payments are considered indicators that the 
trade	receivable	is	impaired.	The	impairment	 
is	calculated	as	the	difference	between	the	
carrying value of the receivable and the present 
value of the related estimated future cash 
flows,	discounted	at	the	original	interest	rate.	

Cash and Cash Equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash 
balances	and	other	deposits	with	a	maturity	 
of	less	than	three	months	when	deposited.	

For	the	purpose	of	the	cash	flow	statement,	
bank overdrafts that form an integral part  
of the Group’s cash management, and are 
repayable on demand, are included as  
a component of cash and cash equivalents.

Bank	overdrafts	are	included	within	borrowings	
in the balance sheet.

Borrowings
Interest-bearing	borrowings	are	recognised	
initially at fair value less attributable transaction 
costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, 
interest-bearing	borrowings	are	stated	at	
amortised	cost	with	any	difference	between	
cost and redemption value being recognised  
in the income statement over the period of the 
borrowings	on	an	effective	interest	basis.

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)	

Business Combinations (continued)
Where the measurement of the fair value of 
identifiable net assets acquired is incomplete  
at	the	end	of	the	reporting	period	in	which	 
the	combination	occurs,	the	Group	will	report	
provisional	fair	values.	Final	fair	values	are	
determined	within	a	year	of	the	acquisition	
date and retrospectively applied.

The	excess	of	the	consideration	transferred	and	
the amount of any non-controlling interest over 
the fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities 
and contingent liabilities acquired (including 
intangibles)	is	recorded	as	goodwill.

The	consideration	transferred	is	measured	 
as the fair value of the assets given, equity 
instruments issued (if any), and liabilities 
assumed or incurred at the date of acquisition. 

Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred. 

The	results	of	the	subsidiaries	acquired	are	
included in the Group financial statements from 
the acquisition date.

For	acquisitions	before	1	January	2010	goodwill	
represents the excess of the cost of acquisition 
over the fair value of the identifiable assets, 
liabilities	and	contingent	liabilities	with	
acquisition related costs capitalised as part  
of the cost of acquisition. 

The	base	products	establish	the	long-term	
positioning	of	the	brand	while	a	succession	 
of innovations attracts ongoing consumer 
interest and attention. Indefinite life brands  
are allocated to the cash generating units to 
which	they	relate	and	are	tested	annually	 
for impairment.

The	Directors	also	review	the	useful	economic	
life of brands annually, to ensure that these 
lives are still appropriate. If a brand is 
considered to have a finite life, its carrying 
value is amortised over that period.

Payments made in respect of product registration, 
acquired and re-acquired distribution rights are 
capitalised	where	the	rights	comply	with	the	
above requirements for recognition of acquired 
brands. If the registration or distribution rights 
are for a defined time period, the intangible 
asset is amortised over that period. If no time 
period is defined, the intangible asset is treated 
in	the	same	way	as	acquired	brands.

Acquired	computer	software	licences	are	
capitalised	at	cost.	These	costs	are	amortised	
over	a	period	of	seven	years	for	Enterprise	
Resource Planning systems and five years  
or	less	for	all	other	software	licences.

Research and Development
Research	expenditure	is	written	off	in	the	year	
in	which	it	is	incurred.

Non-Controlling Interests
On an acquisition by acquisition basis the 
non-controlling interest is measured at either 
fair value or a proportionate share of the 
acquiree’s net assets. 

Development	expenditure	is	written	off	in	the	
year	in	which	it	is	incurred,	unless	it	meets	the	
requirements of IAS 38 to be capitalised and 
then amortised over the useful life of the 
developed product. 

Purchases from non-controlling interests are 
accounted	for	as	transactions	with	the	owners	
and	therefore	no	goodwill	is	recognised	as	a	
result of such transactions. 

Goodwill and Intangible Fixed Assets
Goodwill	on	acquisitions	of	subsidiaries	since	 
4	January	1998	is	included	in	intangible	assets.	
Goodwill	written	off	to	reserves	prior	to	this	
date	has	not	been	reinstated.	Goodwill	is	
allocated to the cash generating unit, or  
group	of	cash	generating	units,	to	which	it	
relates and is tested annually for impairment. 
Goodwill	is	carried	at	cost	less	accumulated	
impairment losses.

Separately	acquired	brands	are	shown	at	cost	
less accumulated amortisation and impairment. 
Brands acquired as part of a business combination 
are recognised at fair value at the acquisition 
date,	where	they	are	separately	identifiable.	
Brands are amortised over their useful 
economic	life,	except	when	their	life	is	
determined as being indefinite.

Applying indefinite lives to certain acquired 
brands is appropriate due to the stable 
long-term nature of the business and the 
enduring nature of the brands. A core element 
of the Group’s strategy is to invest in building 
its brands through an ongoing programme of 
product innovation and sustained and rising 
marketing investment. Within RB, a brand 
typically comprises an assortment of base 
products and more innovative products. Both 
contribute to the enduring nature of the brand. 

Exceptional Items
Where material, non-recurring expenses or 
income are incurred during a period, these 
items are disclosed as exceptional items in the 
income	statement.	Examples	of	such	items	are:

•	 	Restructuring	and	other	expenses	relating	to	
the integration of an acquired business and 
related expenses for reconfiguration of the 
Group’s activities.

•	 	Impairments	of	current	and	non-current	assets.

•	 Gains/losses	on	disposal	of	businesses.

•	 Acquisition	related	costs.

The	Group	also	presents	an	alternative	adjusted	
earnings per share calculation to exclude the 
impact of the exceptional items.

Management	believes	that	the	use	of	adjusted	
measures	such	as	adjusted	operating	profit,	
adjusted	net	income	and	adjusted	earnings	 
per share provide additional useful information 
on underlying trends to Shareholders.

Impairment of Assets
Assets that have indefinite lives are tested 
annually for impairment. All assets are tested 
for impairment if there is an event or 
circumstance that indicates that their carrying 
value may not be recoverable. If an asset’s 
carrying value exceeds its recoverable amount 
an impairment loss is recognised in the income 
statement.	The	recoverable	amount	is	the	
higher of the asset’s fair value less costs to sell 
and its value in use. 

44

Notes to the financial statements continued20121 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

Income Tax
Income tax on the profit for the year comprises 
current and deferred tax. Income tax is 
recognised in the income statement except  
to the extent that it relates to items recognised 
in other comprehensive income or directly in 
equity. In this case the tax is also recognised  
in other comprehensive income or directly  
in equity, respectively.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the 
taxable income for the year, using tax rates 
enacted, or substantively enacted, at the 
balance	sheet	date,	and	any	adjustment	to	tax	
payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is provided in full, using the 
liability method, on temporary differences 
arising	between	the	tax	bases	of	assets	and	
liabilities and their carrying amounts in the 
consolidated	financial	statements.	The	deferred	
tax is not accounted for if it arises from the 
initial recognition of an asset or liability in a 
transaction (other than a business combination) 
that affects neither accounting nor taxable 
profit or loss at that time. Deferred tax is 
determined	using	tax	rates	(and	laws)	that	have	
been enacted or substantively enacted by the 
balance sheet date and are expected to apply 
when	the	deferred	tax	asset	or	liability	is	
settled. Deferred tax assets are recognised to 
the extent that it is probable that future taxable 
profit	will	be	available	against	which	the	
temporary differences can be utilised.

Deferred tax is provided on temporary 
differences arising on investments in 
subsidiaries	except	where	it	is	probable	that	 
the	temporary	difference	will	not	reverse	in	the	
foreseeable future.

Deferred	tax	assets	and	liabilities	within	the	
same	tax	jurisdiction	are	offset	where	there	is	 
a legally enforceable right to offset current tax 
assets	against	current	tax	liabilities	and	where	
there is an intention to settle these balances  
on a net basis.

Pension Commitments
Group companies operate defined contribution 
and (funded and unfunded) defined benefit 
pension schemes.

The	cost	of	providing	pensions	to	employees	
who	are	members	of	defined	contribution	
schemes is charged to the income statement  
as	contributions	are	made.	The	Group	has	 
no further payment obligations once the 
contributions have been paid.

The	liability	or	surplus	recognised	in	the	balance	
sheet in respect of defined benefit pension 
plans is the present value of the defined benefit 
obligation at the balance sheet date, less the 
fair	value	of	the	plan	assets.	The	defined	
benefit obligation is calculated annually by 
independent	actuaries	using	the	projected	unit	
credit	method.	The	present	value	of	the	defined	
benefit obligation is determined by discounting 
the	estimated	future	cash	flows	by	the	yield	on	
high-quality corporate bonds denominated in 
the	currency	in	which	the	benefits	will	be	paid,	
and that have a maturity approximating to the 

terms	of	the	pension	obligations.	The	costs	of	
providing these defined benefit schemes are 
accrued over the period of employment. 
Actuarial gains and losses are recognised 
immediately in other comprehensive income.

Past-service costs are recognised immediately in 
income, unless the changes to the pension plan 
are conditional on the employees remaining  
in service for a specified period of time (the 
vesting period). In this case, the past-service 
costs are amortised on a straight-line basis over 
the vesting period.

Post-Retirement Benefits Other than 
Pensions
Some Group companies provide post-
retirement	medical	care	to	their	retirees.	The	
costs of providing these benefits are accrued 
over the period of employment and the liability 
recognised in the balance sheet is calculated 
using	the	projected	unit	credit	method	and	is	
discounted to its present value and the fair 
value of any related asset is deducted.

Employee Share Schemes
Incentives in the form of shares are provided to 
employees under share option and restricted 
share	schemes.	Any	shortfall	between	the	cost	
to the employee and the fair market value of 
the	awards	at	date	of	grant	is	charged	to	the	
income	statement	over	the	period	to	which	the	
performance	criteria	relate,	with	the	credit	
taken directly to retained earnings. Additional 
employer costs in respect of options and 
awards	are	charged	to	the	income	statement	
over	the	same	period	with	the	credit	included	in	
payables.	Where	awards	are	contingent	upon	
non-market performance conditions, an 
assessment of the likelihood of these conditions 
being achieved is made at the end of each 
reporting period and reflected in the accounting 
entries made.

The	proceeds	received	net	of	any	directly	
attributable transaction costs are credited to 
share	capital	and	share	premium	when	the	
options are exercised.

Provisions
Provisions	are	recognised	when	the	Group	has	 
a present legal or constructive obligation as a 
result of past events; it is more likely than not 
that	there	will	be	an	outflow	of	resources	to	
settle that obligation; and the amount can be 
reliably estimated. Provisions are valued at the 
present value of the Directors’ best estimate of 
the expenditure required to settle the obligation 
at the balance sheet date.

Financial Instruments Held For Trading
Financial	instruments	held	for	trading	are	
classified as current assets and current liabilities, 
and	are	stated	at	fair	value,	with	any	gain	 
or loss resulting from changes in fair value 
recognised in the income statement.

The	fair	value	of	financial	assets	classified	 
as held for trading is their quoted bid price  
at the balance sheet date.

Financial	instruments	classified	as	held	for	
trading	are	recognised/de-recognised	by	the	
Group	on	the	date	it	commits	to	purchase/sell	
the instrument. 

Derivative Financial Instruments and 
Hedging Activity
The	Group	may	use	derivatives	to	manage	its	
exposures to fluctuating interest and foreign 
exchange	rates.	These	instruments	are	initially	
recognised at fair value on the date the 
contract is entered into and are subsequently 
remeasured	at	their	fair	value.	The	method	of	
recognising the resulting gain or loss depends 
on	whether	the	derivative	is	designated	as	a	
hedging instrument and if so, the nature of the 
item being hedged. Derivatives that qualify for 
hedge accounting are treated as a hedge of  
a highly probable forecast transaction (cash 
flow	hedge).

At	inception	the	relationship	between	the	
hedging instrument and the hedged item  
is documented, as is an assessment of the 
effectiveness of the derivative instrument used 
in the hedging transaction in offsetting changes 
in	the	cash	flow	of	the	hedged	item.	This	
effectiveness assessment is repeated on an 
ongoing basis during the life of the hedging 
instrument to ensure that the instrument 
remains an effective hedge of the transaction.

1	 	Derivatives	classified	as	cash	flow	hedges:	
the effective portion of changes in the fair 
value is recognised in other comprehensive 
income. Any gain or loss relating to the 
ineffective portion is recognised immediately 
in the income statement.

 Amounts recognised in other comprehensive 
income are recycled to the income statement 
in	the	period	when	the	hedged	item	will	
affect profit or loss. If the hedging instrument 
expires or is sold, or no longer meets the 
criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative 
gain or loss existing in other comprehensive 
income at that time remains in other 
comprehensive income, and is recognised 
when	the	forecast	transaction	is	ultimately	
recognised in the income statement. If the 
forecast transaction is no longer expected  
to occur, the cumulative gain or loss in other 
comprehensive income is immediately 
transferred to the income statement.

2   Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge 

accounting: these are classified at fair value 
through profit or loss. All changes in fair 
value of derivative instruments that do not 
qualify for hedge accounting are recognised 
immediately in the income statement.

Net Revenue
Net revenue is defined as the amount invoiced 
to external customers during the year that is 
gross sales net of trade discounts, customer 
allowances	for	credit	notes	and	returns	and	
consumer	coupons,	and	exclusive	of	VAT	and	
other sales-related taxes. Net revenue is 
recognised at the time that the risks and 
rewards	of	ownership	of	the	products	are	
transferred to the customer.

45

Report of the Directors2012 
Notes to the financial statements continued

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)

•	 	Measurement	of	intangible	assets	both	 

in business combinations and other asset 
acquisitions requires the Group to identify 
such assets. Assumptions and estimates are 
made	about	future	cash	flows	and	
appropriate discount rates to value identified 
intangible assets (note 26).

•	 	Long-term	rates	of	return,	inflation	rates	and	

discount rates have been assumed in 
calculating the pension and other employee 
post-retirement benefits. If the real rates are 
significantly different over time to those 
assumed, the amounts recognised in the 
income statement and in the balance sheet 
will	be	impacted	(note	21).

•	 	Assumptions	are	made	as	to	the	

recoverability of tax assets especially as  
to	whether	there	will	be	sufficient	future	
taxable	profits	in	the	same	jurisdictions	to	
fully utilise losses in future years (note 11).

•	 	Assumptions	are	made	in	relation	to	share	
awards,	both	in	the	Black-Scholes	model	
used to calculate the charge and in terms of 
the recoverability of the deferred tax asset 
related to share-based payments charges to 
reserves (note 23).

•	 	The	actual	tax	paid	on	profits	is	determined	

based	on	tax	laws	and	regulations	that	differ	
across	the	numerous	jurisdictions	in	which	
the Group operates. Assumptions are made 
in	applying	these	laws	to	the	taxable	profits	
in any given period in order to calculate the 
tax charge for that period. Where the 
eventual tax paid or reclaimed is different  
to the amounts originally estimated, the 
difference	will	be	charged	or	credited	to	the	
income	statement	in	the	period	in	which	it	 
is determined (note 7).

Leases
Leases	of	property,	plant	and	equipment	where	
the Group has substantially all the risks and 
rewards	of	ownership	are	classified	as	finance	
leases. Assets held under finance leases are 
capitalised	at	lease	inception	at	the	lower	of	the	
asset’s fair value and the present value of the 
minimum lease payments. Obligations related 
to finance leases, net of finance charges in 
respect of future periods, are included as 
appropriate	within	borrowings.	The	interest	
element of the finance cost is charged to the 
income statement over the life of the lease so 
as to produce a constant periodic rate of 
interest on the remaining balance of the liability 
for	each	period.	The	plant,	property	and	
equipment are depreciated on the same basis 
as	owned	plant	and	equipment	or	over	the	life	
of the lease, if shorter.

Leases	where	the	lessor	retains	substantially	 
all	the	risks	and	rewards	of	ownership	are	
classified as operating leases. Operating lease 
rentals (net of any related lease incentives) are 
charged against profit on a straight line basis 
over the period of the lease.

Share Capital Transactions
When the Group purchases equity share capital, 
the amount of the consideration paid, including 
directly attributable costs, is recognised as a 
change in equity. Purchased shares are either 
held	in	Treasury,	in	order	to	satisfy	employee	
options, or cancelled and, in order to maintain 
capital, an equivalent amount to the nominal 
value	of	the	shares	cancelled	would	be	
transferred from retained earnings to the 
capital redemption reserve.

Dividend Distribution
Dividends	to	owners	of	the	parent	are	
recognised	as	a	liability	in	the	period	in	which	
the dividends are approved by the Company’s 
Shareholders. Interim dividends are recorded in 
the	period	in	which	they	are	approved	and	paid.

Accounting Estimates and Judgements 
The	Directors	make	a	number	of	estimates	and	
assumptions regarding the future, and make 
some	significant	judgements	in	applying	the	
Group’s	accounting	policies.	These	include:

•	 	Estimates	of	future	business	performance	
and cash generation, discount rates and 
long-term	growth	rates	supporting	the	net	
book amount of indefinite life intangible 
assets at the balance sheet date (note 9). If 
the actual results should differ, or changes in 
expectations arise, impairment charges may 
be	required	which	would	adversely	impact	
operating results.

•	 	The	determination	of	the	carrying	value	of	
property, plant and equipment and related 
depreciation, and the estimation of useful 
economic life of these assets (note 10).

•	 	The	continuing	enduring	nature	of	the	

Group’s brands supporting the assumed 
useful lives of these assets (note 9).

46

20122 OPERATING SEGMENTS
The	Executive	Committee	is	the	Group’s	Chief	Operating	Decision	Maker	(CODM).	Management	has	determined	the	operating	segments	based	on	the	
reports	reviewed	by	the	Executive	Committee	for	the	purposes	of	making	strategic	decisions	and	assessing	performance.	The	Executive	Committee	
considers	the	business	principally	from	a	geographical	perspective,	but	with	the	RB	Pharmaceuticals	(in	table	referred	to	as	RBP)	and	Food	businesses	
being	managed	separately	given	the	significantly	different	nature	of	these	businesses	and	the	risks	and	rewards	associated	with	them.

As	a	result	of	the	Group’s	strategy	for	continued	outperformance,	announced	in	February	2012,	the	geographical	segments	have	changed	from	those	
reported	in	the	Annual	Report	and	financial	statements	for	the	year	ended	31	December	2011	to	reflect	the	Group’s	increased	focus	on	high	growth	
emerging	market	clusters.	The	new	geographical	segments	comprise	Europe	and	North	America	(ENA);	Latin	America,	North	Asia,	South	East	Asia	and	
Australia	and	New	Zealand	(LAPAC);	and	Russia	and	CIS,	Middle	East,	North	Africa,	Turkey	and	Sub-Saharan	Africa	(RUMEA).	Comparative	information	
has been restated on a consistent basis. 

The	geographical	segments	derive	their	revenue	primarily	from	the	manufacture	and	sale	of	branded	products	in	the	health,	hygiene	and	home	
categories. RB Pharmaceuticals derives its revenue exclusively from the sales of buprenorphine-based prescription drugs used to treat opiate dependence 
and	Food	derives	its	revenue	from	food	products	sold	in	ENA.

The	results	of	Schiff	Nutrition	International,	Inc.	(Schiff)	subsequent	to	its	acquisition	on	14	December	2012	are	included	in	ENA.	

The	Executive	Committee	assesses	the	performance	of	the	operating	segments	based	on	net	revenue	and	operating	profit	before	exceptional	items.		
Finance	income	and	expense	are	not	allocated	to	segments,	as	they	are	managed	on	a	central	Group	basis.

The	Executive	Committee	do	not	review	inter-segment	revenue	information,	nor	is	it	included	in	the	measure	of	segment	profit	or	loss	reviewed	by	the	
Executive	Committee.	As	such	this	is	no	longer	included	in	the	Group’s	operating	segments’	disclosures.

Items	of	income	and	expense	which	are	not	part	of	the	results	and	financial	position	of	the	operating	segments,	and	therefore	reported	to	the	Executive	
Committee	outside	of	the	individual	segment	financial	information,	are	shown	in	the	Corporate	segment.	For	the	year	ended	31	December	2012	this	
includes	profit	on	disposals	of	intangible	assets	and	the	Paras	personal	care	business,	expenses	for	legal	matters,	and	other	corporate	provisions	with	a	
net	effect	of	£32m.	For	the	year	ended	31	December	2011	this	comprised	a	profit	on	disposal	of	intangibles,	miscellaneous	items	and	regulatory	costs	
with	a	net	effect	of	£10m.

Reportable Segments
The	segment	information	provided	to	the	Executive	Committee	for	the	reportable	segments	for	the	year	ended	31	December	2012	is	as	follows:	

2012 

Net revenue 
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment 
Operating profit before exceptional items   

Exceptional items 
Operating profit 

Net finance expense 
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation 

2011 (Restated) 

Net revenue 
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment 
Operating profit before exceptional items 

Exceptional	items	
Operating profit 

Net finance expense 
Profit on ordinary activities before taxation 

ENA 
£m 

4,678 
95 
1,156 

LAPAC 
£m 

2,327 
32 
464 

RUMEA 
£m 

1,404 
8 
290 

Food  Corporate 
£m 

£m 

321 
5 
92 

– 
– 
32 

ENA	
£m 

4,837 
99 
1,157 

LAPAC	
£m 

2,210 
30 
417 

RUMEA	
£m 

1,364 
8 
293 

Food	
£m 

312 
5 
92 

Corporate	
£m 

– 
– 
10 

Total
Ex-RBP  
£m 

8,730 
140 
2,034 

Total
Ex-RBP		
£m 

8,723 
142 
1,969 

RBP 
£m 

837 
8 
536 

RBP	
£m 

762 
15 
518 

Total
£m

9,567
148 
2,570

(135)
2,435

(15)
2,420

Total
£m

9,485
157
2,487

(92)
2,395

(19)
2,376

47

Report of the Directors2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements continued

2 OPERATING SEGMENTS (CONTINUED)
The	Executive	Committee	reviews	net	working	capital	by	segment	and	other	assets	and	liabilities	on	a	Group	basis.	The	split	of	assets	and	liabilities	by	
segment	provided	to	the	Executive	Committee	is	as	follows.	Assets	and	liabilities	of	the	Corporate	segment	are	not	presented	to	the	Executive	
Committee	and	are	shown	below	as	a	reconciling	item.	

2012 

Inventories 
Trade and other receivables 

Total segment assets 

Trade and other payables 

2011 (Restated) 

Inventories 
Trade	and	other	receivables	

Total	segment	assets	

Trade	and	other	payables	

ENA 
£m 

385 
601 

986 

LAPAC 
£m 

RUMEA 
£m 

Food 
£m 

250 
363 

613 

118 
217 

335 

4 
– 

4 

RBP 
£m 

108 
178 

286 

Total
£m

865
1,359

2,224

(1,428) 

(661) 

(283) 

(13) 

(241) 

(2,626)

ENA	
£m 

412 
693	

1,105	

LAPAC	
£m 

RUMEA	
£m 

Food	
£m 

227 
341	

568	

112 
178	

290	

5 
2	

7	

RBP	
£m 

135 
178	

313	

Total
£m

891
1,392

2,283

(1,550)	

(698)	

(293)	

(14)	

(186)	

(2,741)

The	assets	and	liabilities	are	allocated	based	upon	the	operations	of	the	segment	and	the	physical	location	of	the	asset	or	liability.	There	are	a	number	 
of unallocated assets and liabilities that comprise corporate items that are not specifically attributable to one segment. Reconciliation of these assets 
and	liabilities	to	total	assets	or	liabilities	in	the	balance	sheet	is	shown	below:

Inventories for reportable segments  
Unallocated:
Elimination	of	profit	on	inter-company	inventory	

Total inventories per the balance sheet 

Trade	and	other	receivables	for	reportable	segments	
Unallocated:
Corporate items 

Total trade and other receivables per the balance sheet 

Total inventories and trade and other receivables per the balance sheet 
Other unallocated assets 

Total assets per the balance sheet 

Trade	and	other	payables	for	reportable	segments	
Unallocated:
Corporate items 

Total trade and other payables per the balance sheet  
Other unallocated liabilities 

Total liabilities per the balance sheet 

2012 
£m 

865 

(130) 

735 

1,359 

48 

1,407 

2,142 
12,938 

15,080 

(2,626) 

(216) 

(2,842) 
(6,316) 

(9,158) 

2011
£m

891

(133)

758

1,392

50

1,442

2,200
11,926

14,126

(2,741)

(160)

(2,901)
(5,444)

(8,345)

Unallocated	assets	include	goodwill	and	intangible	assets,	property,	plant	and	equipment	and	cash	equivalents,	while	unallocated	liabilities	include	
borrowings,	deferred	tax	liabilities	and	retirement	benefit	obligations.

48

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2 OPERATING SEGMENTS (CONTINUED)

Analysis of Categories
Following	the	revised	category	focus	announced	in	February	2012,	the	Group	analyses	its	revenue	by	the	following	categories:	health,	hygiene,	home	
and	portfolio	brands	together	with	RB	Pharmaceuticals	and	Food.	Comparative	information	has	been	restated	on	a	consistent	basis.

The	results	of	Schiff	subsequent	to	its	acquisition	on	14	December	2012	are	included	in	health.	

Health	
Hygiene	
Home	
Portfolio brands 
Food	

RB Pharmaceuticals 

Total	

2012 
£m 

2,068 
3,682 
1,966 
693 
321 

8,730 
837 

9,567 

  Net revenues

2011  

(restated)
£m

2,000
3,643
2,009
759 
312

8,723
762

9,485

Health,	hygiene,	home	and	portfolio	brands	categories	are	all	split	across	the	three	geographical	segments	of	ENA,	LAPAC	and	RUMEA.	Food	(which	is	
sold	exclusively	in	ENA)	and	RB	Pharmaceuticals	are	recognised	within	their	own	reportable	segments.

The	Company	is	domiciled	in	the	UK.	The	split	of	revenue	from	external	customers	and	non-current	assets	(other	than	financial	instruments,	deferred	
tax	assets	and	retirement	benefit	surplus	assets)	between	the	UK,	the	US	(being	the	single	biggest	country	outside	the	country	of	domicile)	and	that	
from all other countries is:

2012 

Net revenue 

Goodwill and other intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Other receivables 

2011 

Net revenue 

Goodwill	and	other	intangible	assets	
Property, plant and equipment 
Other receivables 

UK 
£m 

643 

1,536 
137 
4 

UK	
£m 

All other
countries 
£m 

US 
£m 

Total
£m

2,480 

6,444 

9,567

4,287 
125 
4 

5,352 
475 
25 

11,175
737
33

US	
£m 

All other
countries	
£m 

Total
£m

685 

2,304 

6,496 

9,485

1,536	
133 
– 

3,252	
131 
– 

5,470	
468 
6 

10,258
732
6

The	net	revenue	from	external	customers	reported	on	a	geographical	basis	above	is	measured	in	a	manner	consistent	with	that	in	the	reportable	segments.	

Major	customers	are	typically	large	grocery	chains,	mass	market	and	multiple	retailers.	The	Group’s	customer	base	is	diverse	with	no	single	external	
customer accounting for more than 10% of net revenue, and the top ten customers accounting for less than a quarter of total net revenue.

49

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3 ANALYSIS OF COST OF SALES AND NET OPERATING EXPENSES

Cost of sales 

Distribution costs 

Administrative expenses:
Pharmaceuticals research and development 
Other research and development 
Other 

Total	administrative	expenses	
Other net operating income 
Exceptional	items	

Net operating expenses 

* Refer to note 1 for further details.

2012 
£m 

(4,030) 

(2,318) 

(25) 
(146) 
(491) 

(662) 
13 
(135) 

2011 

          (restated)*

£m

(4,036)

(2,299)

(20)
(133)
(578)

(731)
68
(92)

(3,102) 

(3,054)

Included	within	cost	of	sales	is	a	fair	value	loss	of	£nil	(2011:	loss	of	£7m)	transferred	from	the	hedging	reserve.	Total	foreign	exchange	losses	of	£nil	
(2011:	losses	of	£7m)	have	been	recognised	through	the	income	statement.	These	amounts	exclude	financial	instruments	fair	valued	through	the	
income statement and amounts recognised directly in the foreign currency translation reserve.

Exceptional items 

Restructuring 
Acquisition related costs  

Total	exceptional	items	

2012 
£m 

123 
12 

135 

2011
£m

89
3

92

The	Group	incurred	restructuring	charges	of	£123m	relating	to	the	implementation	of	the	Group’s	new	area	and	category	organisations,	integration	of	
SSL,	withdrawal	of	private	label	and	further	reconfiguration	of	the	Group.	This	consists	primarily	of	redundancy	and	business	integration	costs	which	
have	been	included	within	net	operating	expenses.	Acquisition	related	costs	include	legal	and	other	professional	fees	in	relation	to	business	combinations.

4 AUDITORS’ REMUNERATION
During	the	year,	the	Group	(including	its	overseas	subsidiaries)	obtained	the	following	services	from	the	Company’s	auditor	and	its	associates.

Fees	payable	to	the	Company’s	auditor	and	its	associates	for	the	audit	of	the	Parent	Company	 
and consolidated financial statements 

Fees	payable	to	the	Company’s	auditor	and	its	associates	for	other	services:
  Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries 
  Audit related assurance services   
	 Taxation	compliance	services	
	 Taxation	advisory	services		
  Other assurance services 
  All other non-audit services 

2012 
£m 

1.9 

3.8 
0.4 
0.2 
4.3 
0.2 
0.1 

10.9 

2011 

          (restated)*

£m

1.8

3.8
0.3
0.1
1.4
0.2 
0.1

7.7

* Restated for change in categories disclosed.

Included in the above is £0.1m (2011: £0.2m) in relation to the audit of the financial statements of associated pension schemes of the Group.

50

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5 EMPLOYEES

(a) Staff costs 

The	total	employment	costs,	including	Directors,	were:
Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Net pension costs 
Share-based payments 

Notes 

21 
23 

2012 
£m 

923 
174 
50 
49 

2011
£m

950
184
51
61

1,196 

1,246

Details	of	Directors’	emoluments	are	included	in	the	Directors’	Remuneration	Report	on	pages	31	to	37,	which	forms	part	of	the	financial	statements.

Compensation	awarded	to	key	management	(the	Executive	Committee):

Short-term employee benefits 
Post-employment benefits 
Share-based payments 
Termination	benefits	

2012 
£m 

11 
1 
15 
4 

31 

2011
£m

11
1
22
–

34

Termination	benefits	and	share-based	payments	include	contractual	commitments	made	to	key	management	in	2012,	comprising	cash	payments	and	
shares to vest in 2013.

(b) Staff numbers
The	monthly	average	number	of	people	employed	by	the	Group,	including	Directors,	during	the	year	was:

ENA	
RUMEA	
LAPAC 
RB Pharmaceuticals 
Other 

1 Restated for the change in reportable geographic segments disclosed in note 2. 

6 NET FINANCE EXPENSE

Finance income 

Interest income on cash and cash equivalents 

Total	finance	income	
Finance expense

Interest	payable	on	borrowings	
Amortisation of issue costs of bank loans 
Other finance expense 

Total	finance	expense	

Net finance expense 

Included	within	amortisation	of	issue	costs	of	bank	loans	is	an	exceptional	finance	cost	of	£nil	(2011:	£4m).

2012 
‘000 

13.9 
7.1 
13.7 
0.6 
0.6 

35.9 

2012 
£m 

26 

26 

(30) 
(6) 
(5) 

(41) 

(15) 

2011 
          (restated)1

‘000

13.8
7.2
15.7
0.6
0.5

37.8

2011
£m

23

23

(30)
(7)
(5)

(42)

(19)

51

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7 INCOME TAX EXPENSE

Current tax 
Prior	year	adjustments	

Total	current	tax		

 Origination and reversal of temporary differences  
Impact of changes in tax rates 

Total	deferred	tax	(note	11)		

Tax on profit on ordinary activities 

2012 
£m 

662 
(21) 

641 

26 
(80) 

(54) 

587 

2011
£m

625

(8) 

617

70 
(65)

5

622

The	standard	rate	of	corporation	tax	in	the	UK	changed	from	26%	to	24%	with	effect	from	1	April	2012.	Accordingly,	the	Company’s	profits	for	the	
year ended 31 December 2012 are taxed at an effective rate of 24.5% (2011: 26.5%). 

UK	income	tax	of	£138m	(2011:	£161m)	is	included	within	current	tax	and	is	calculated	at	24.5%	(2011:	26.5%)	of	the	estimated	assessable	profit	for	
the	year.	Taxation	for	other	jurisdictions	is	calculated	at	the	rates	prevailing	in	the	relevant	jurisdictions.

The	total	tax	charge	for	the	year	can	be	reconciled	to	the	accounting	profit	as	follows:

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation 
Tax	at	the	notional	UK	corporation	tax	rate	of	24.5%	(2011:	26.5%)	
Effects	of:
	 Tax	at	rates	other	than	the	UK	corporation	tax	rate	
	 Adjustments	to	amounts	carried	in	respect	of	unresolved	tax	matters	

Incurrence/(utilisation)	of	tax	losses	

  Withholdings and local taxes 
	 Adjustment	in	respect	of	prior	periods	

Impact of changes in tax rates 

	 Exceptional	items		
  Other permanent differences 

Tax	on	profit	on	ordinary	activities	

2012 
£m 

2,420 
593 

11 
77 
7 
16 
(58) 
(80) 
8 
13 

587 

2011
£m

2,376
630

(9)
47
(2)
25
(11)
(65)
2
5

622

The	tax	charge	is	expected	to	be	impacted	by	items	in	the	nature	of	those	listed	above	for	the	foreseeable	future.	

Following	the	enactment	of	legislation	in	the	UK	to	reduce	the	corporation	tax	rate	to	23%	from	1	April	2013,	the	total	tax	charge	in	2012	includes	the	
impact	on	the	income	statement	of	calculating	the	UK	deferred	tax	balances	at	the	lower	UK	corporation	tax	rate.	The	impact	of	this	rate	change	is	a	
£62m	reduction	in	the	tax	charge	in	the	income	statement.	The	proposed	future	reduction	in	the	UK	tax	rate	to	21%	will	be	reflected	when	the	relevant	
legislation is substantively enacted.

The	tax	(charge)/credit	relating	to	components	of	other	comprehensive	income	is	as	follows:

Net	exchange	adjustments	on	foreign	currency	translation	 	
Actuarial losses (note 21) 
Gains/(losses)	on	cash	flow	hedges	 	
Reclassification of foreign currency translation reserve on disposal of subsidiary 

Other comprehensive income 

Current tax 
Deferred tax (note 11) 

Before 
tax 
£m 

(256) 
(64) 
4 
9 

(307) 

Tax	
 credit/ 
(charge) 
£m 

1 
15 
(1) 
– 

15 

(2) 
17 

15 

2012 

After	
tax 
£m 

(255) 
(49) 
3 
9 

(292) 

Before	
tax 
£m 

(227) 
(84) 
4 
– 

(307) 

2011

After
tax
£m

(226)
(49)
3 
–

(272)

Tax	
credit/	
(charge) 
£m 

1 
35 
(1) 
– 

35 

–
35

35

52

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8 EARNINGS PER SHARE

Basic earnings per share 
Diluted earnings per share 

Adjusted	basic	earnings	per	share	
Adjusted	diluted	earnings	per	share		

2012 
pence 

252.5 
249.5 

267.6 
264.4 

2011
pence

239.8
237.1

249.9
247.1

Basic
Basic	earnings	per	share	is	calculated	by	dividing	the	net	income	attributable	to	owners	of	the	Parent	(2012:	£1,829m	(2011:	£1,745m))	by	the	
weighted	average	number	of	ordinary	shares	in	issue	during	the	year	(2012:	724,238,235	(2011:	727,628,580)).

Diluted
Diluted	earnings	per	share	is	calculated	by	adjusting	the	weighted	average	number	of	shares	outstanding	to	assume	conversion	of	all	potentially	dilutive	
ordinary	shares.	The	Company	has	two	categories	of	dilutive	potential	ordinary	shares:	Executive	Share	Options	and	Employee	Sharesave	schemes.	 
The	options	only	dilute	earnings	when	they	result	in	the	issue	of	shares	at	a	value	below	the	market	price	of	the	share	and	when	all	performance	criteria	
(if	applicable)	have	been	met.	As	at	31	December	2012,	there	were	4m	(2011:	4m)	of	Executive	Share	Options	not	included	within	the	dilution	because	
the	exercise	price	for	the	options	was	greater	than	the	average	share	price	for	the	year.

The	Directors	believe	that	diluted	earnings	per	ordinary	share,	adjusted	for	the	impact	of	exceptional	items	after	the	appropriate	tax	amount,	provides	
additional useful information on underlying trends to Shareholders in respect of earnings per ordinary share.

Details	of	the	adjusted	net	income	attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	are	as	follows:

Net	income	attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	
Exceptional	items		
Exceptional	charge	included	in	finance	expense		
Tax	effect	of	exceptional	items	

Adjusted	net	income	attributable	to	owners	of	the	parent	 	

On a basic basis 
Dilution	for	Executive	Options	outstanding
and	Executive	Restricted	Share	Plan		
Dilution	for	Employee	Sharesave	Scheme	Options	outstanding	

On a diluted basis 

2012 
£m 

1,829 
135 
– 
(26) 

1,938 

2011
£m

1,745
92
4
(23) 

1,818

2012 
Average 
  number of 
shares 

2011 
Average 
number of 
shares

  724,238,235 

727,628,580

  8,098,123 
	 659,327 

  7,423,757
  780,818 

  732,995,685 

  735,833,155

53

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
9 GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Cost
At	1	January	2012	
Additions 
Arising on business combinations 
Disposals 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2012 

Accumulated amortisation
and impairment 
At	1	January	2012	
Amortisation and impairment charge 
Disposals 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2012 

Brands 
£m 

7,106	
2 
880 
(37) 
(198)	

7,753 

80	
3 
– 
(1)	

82 

 Net book amount at 31 December 2012 

7,671 

Cost
At	1	January	2011	
Additions 
Arising on business combinations 
Reclassifications 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2011 

Accumulated amortisation
and impairment 
At	1	January	2011	
Amortisation and impairment charge 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2011 

Net book amount at 31 December 2011 

Net	book	amount	at	1	January	2011	

Brands	
£m 

6,934	
– 
305 
– 
(133)	

7,106 

75	
8 
(3)	

80 

7,026 

6,859	

Goodwill 
£m 

Software 
£m 

3,080	
– 
374 
(17) 
(85)	

3,352 

30	
– 
(1) 
(1)	

28 

3,324 

Goodwill	
£m 

2,890	
– 
260 
– 
(70)	

3,080 

30	
– 
–	

30 

3,050 

2,860	

48	
9 
– 
– 
–	

57 

21	
1 
– 
–	

22 

35 

Software	
£m 

24	
19 
– 
6 
(1)	

48 

21	
1 
(1)	

21 

27 

3	

Other 
£m 

236	
– 
– 
– 
(1)	

235 

81	
9 
– 
–	

90 

145 

Other	
£m 

209	
22 
6 
– 
(1)	

236 

66	
16 
(1)	

81 

155 

143	

Total
£m

10,470
11
1,254
(54)
(284)	

11,397

212
13
(1)
(2)

222

11,175

Total
£m

10,057
41
571
6
(205)

10,470

192
25
(5)

212

10,258

9,865

The	amount	stated	for	brands	represents	the	fair	value	of	brands	acquired	since	1985	at	the	day	of	acquisition.	Other	includes	product	registration,	
distribution rights and capitalised product development costs.

The	reclassification	of	£6m	in	2011	relates	to	the	transfer	of	completed	assets	from	plant	and	equipment.	Software	includes	intangible	assets	under	
construction of £31m (2011: £22m). 

The	majority	of	brands,	all	of	goodwill	and	certain	other	intangibles	are	considered	to	have	indefinite	lives	for	the	reasons	noted	in	the	Accounting	
Policies	and	therefore	are	subject	to	an	annual	impairment	review.	A	number	of	small	non	core	brands	are	deemed	to	have	a	finite	life	and	are	
amortised accordingly.

The	net	book	amounts	of	indefinite	and	finite	life	intangible	assets	are	as	follows:

Net book amount 

Indefinite life assets:
  Brands 
	 Goodwill	
  Other 

Total	indefinite	life	assets	

Finite	life	assets:
  Brands 
	 Software	
  Other 

Total	finite	life	assets	

2012 
£m 

7,646 
3,324 
36 

11,006 

25 
35 
109 

169 

2011 
£m

7,000
3,050
36

10,086

26
27
119

172

Total	net	book	amount	of	intangible	assets	

11,175 

10,258

Goodwill	and	other	intangible	assets	with	indefinite	lives	are	allocated	to	a	cash	generating	unit	(CGU)	for	the	purposes	of	impairment	testing.	 
Goodwill	is	allocated	to	the	CGU,	or	group	of	CGUs,	that	is	expected	to	benefit	from	the	related	acquisition.	

54

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
9 GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS (CONTINUED)

Cash Generating Units 
RB’s	‘Strategy	for	Continued	Outperformance’	has	fundamentally	changed	the	way	the	Group	operates.	The	Group	has	taken	this	as	an	opportunity	to	
reassess	the	appropriateness	of	the	Group’s	CGUs	under	IAS	36	Impairment of Assets.	After	considering	all	the	evidence	available,	including	how	brand	and	
production	assets	generate	cash	inflows	and	how	management	monitors	the	business,	the	Directors	have	concluded	that	the	Group’s	CGUs	with	goodwill	
and	indefinite	life	intangible	assets	should	now	be	defined	as	health	(sexual	wellbeing),	health	(other),	hygiene,	home,	Food	and	portfolio	brands.	

Previously	the	CGUs	were	defined	as	the	Group’s	product	groups	(health	&	personal	care,	fabric	care,	surface	care,	home	care,	dishwashing,	Food,	 
and other). 

The	acquired	Schiff	business	is	treated	as	its	own	CGU	in	2012	called	health	(VMS).	This	will	be	reassessed	following	integration	into	the	Group’s	
operations in 2013. 

An	analysis	of	the	net	book	amount	of	indefinite	life	assets	and	goodwill	by	CGU	is	shown	below:

CGU	

Health	(sexual	wellbeing)	
Health	(other)	

Health	(VMS)	
Hygiene	

Home	
Portfolio Brands 
Food	

Key	brands	

Durex	
Gaviscon,	Mucinex,	Nurofen, 
Scholl, Strepsils 
Airborne,	MegaRed,	Move	Free	
Bang,	Clearasil,	Dettol,	Finish, 
Harpic,	Lysol,	Mortein,	Veet	
Air	Wick	,	Calgon,	Vanish,	Woolite	 	

	French’s	

Indefinite 
life assets 
£m 

Goodwill 
£m 

2012 

Total	
£m 

                      2011 (restated)*

Indefinite 
life	assets	
£m 

Goodwill	
£m 

Total
£m

1,952 

976 

2,928 

1,909 

988 

2,897

2,926 
811 

1,176 
786 
– 
31 

1,783 
374 

149 
42 
– 
– 

4,709 
1,185 

1,325 
828 
– 
31 

3,017 
– 

1,232 
807 
39 
32 

1,843 
– 

4,860
– 

157 
45 
17 
– 

1,389
852
56
32

7,682 

3,324 

11,006 

7,036 

3,050 

10,086

*	Restated	for	changes	in	CGUs	described	above.

Indefinite	life	assets	allocated	to	the	Food	CGU	are	not	considered	significant	relative	to	the	Group’s	total	indefinite	life	assets.	As	such	the	disclosures	
below	do	not	include	discussion	on	the	assumptions	specific	to	Food.	

On	acquisition	the	indefinite	life	intangible	assets	and	goodwill	of	health	(VMS)	were	provisionally	valued	at	fair	value.	Subsequent	to	acquisition	there	
has	been	no	evidence	that	this	fair	value	is	impaired.	The	key	assumptions	applied	in	determining	these	fair	values	are	summarised	in	the	table	below.		

Value in use and key assumptions 
The	annual	impairment	review	for	goodwill	and	other	intangible	assets	with	indefinite	lives	is	based	on	an	assessment	of	each	CGU’s	value	in	use.	 
Value	in	use	is	calculated	from	cash	flow	projections,	based	on	historical	operating	results	and	short-term	budgets	and	medium-term	business	plans	
approved	by	management	covering	a	four-year	period.	These	projections	exclude	any	estimated	future	cash	inflows	or	outflows	expected	to	arise	from	
restructuring not yet implemented. 

Cash	flows	beyond	the	four-year	period	are	extrapolated	using	the	estimated	long-term	growth	rates	stated	below.	Individual	long-term	growth	rates	
are	applied	to	each	product	type	within	a	CGU,	and	as	such	ranges	are	provided	in	some	cases	below.	The	long-term	growth	rates	applied	do	not	
exceed	the	long-term	average	growth	rate	for	the	market	and	countries	in	which	the	CGU	operates.

Management	has	assessed	the	appropriate	discount	rate	for	each	individual	CGU,	using	a	Weighted	Average	Cost	of	Capital	(WACC)	for	comparable	
companies	operating	in	similar	markets	and	geographies	as	the	Group	as	the	base	discount	rate,	adjusted	for	risks	specific	to	each	CGU.	Due	to	the	
similar	geographic	and	product	diversification	of	their	respective	markets	and	risks	associated	with	each	CGU,	a	pre-tax	discount	rate	of	11%	was	
determined	for	each	of	the	health	(sexual	wellbeing),	health	(other),	hygiene	and	home	CGUs	(2011:	11%).		Health	(VMS)	is	predominantly	
concentrated	in	one	market,	being	the	US,	and	a	blended	pre-tax	discount	rate	of	14%	was	applied	in	the	provisional	fair	value	exercise,	reflecting	the	
increased	risk	associated	with	this	CGU	from	its	market	concentration	and	the	fact	that	this	is	a	new	business	to	the	Group.

Key	assumptions	(which	are	kept	under	constant	review	by	management)	in	the	impairment	review	include	future	sales	volumes,	revenue	growth	rates	
and	prices,	and	future	levels	of	marketing	support	required	to	sustain,	grow	and	further	innovate	brands.	The	cash	flow	projections	also	take	account	of	
the	expected	impact	from	new	product	initiatives,	efficiency	initiatives	and	the	maturity	of	the	markets	in	which	each	CGU	operates.	These	key	
assumptions	are	based	on	past	performance	and	our	experience	of	volumes,	growth	rates	and	prices	in	our	key	markets.

CGU	

Health	(sexual	wellbeing)	
Health	(other)	
Health	(VMS)	
Hygiene	
Home	

	 Growth	%	

4	
0-4	
2	
0-4	
0-2	

Discount
rate	%

11	
11
14	
11	
11

Impairment Review 
In	October	2012	an	impairment	review	was	performed	by	comparing	the	recoverable	amount	of	each	CGU	with	its	carrying	amount,	including	
goodwill.	This	review	was	updated	during	December,	taking	into	account	significant	events	that	occurred	between	October	and	December.	 
No	impairment	was	considered	necessary.	

Any	reasonably	possible	change	in	the	key	assumptions	on	which	the	recoverable	amounts	of	the	health	(other),	hygiene	and	home	CGUs	is	based	
would	not	cause	their	carrying	values	to	exceed	their	recoverable	amounts.	

With	a	recoverable	amount	exceeding	its	carrying	value	by	£388m,	the	heath	(sexual	wellbeing)	CGU	is	the	most	sensitive	to	reasonably	possible	changes	
to	key	assumptions.	This	is	expected	of	a	recent	acquisition	where	the	acquired	intangible	assets	were	valued	at	fair	value.	Increasing	the	pre-tax	discount	
rate	from	11%	to	12%,	or	halving	the	short-term	revenue	growth	expectations	in	the	management	approved	short-	and	medium-term	budgets,	or	
reducing	the	long-term	(terminal	growth)	rate	from	4%	to	3%	would	be	required	to	reduce	the	recoverable	amount	to	equal	the	carrying	value.	

55

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
10 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Cost 
At	1	January	2012	
Additions 
Arising on business combination 
Disposals 
Deconsolidation of subsidiary 
Reclassifications 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2012 

Accumulated depreciation  and impairment  
At	1	January	2012	
Charge for the year 
Disposals 
Deconsolidation of subsidiary 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2012 

Net book amount at 31 December 2012 

Cost 
At	1	January	2011	
Additions 
Arising on business combination 
Disposals 
Reclassifications 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2011 

Accumulated depreciation  and impairment 
At	1	January	2011	
Charge for the year 
Disposals 
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2011 

Net book amount at 31 December 2011 

Net	book	amount	at	1	January	2011	

Land and 
Plant and
buildings  equipment 
£m 

£m 

512 
13 
1 
(8) 
(2) 
21 
(12) 

1,272 
153 
8 
(65) 
(9) 
(21) 
(52) 

Total
£m

1,784
166
9
(73)
(11)
-
(64)

525 

1,286 

1,811

189 
24 
(3) 
(1) 
(4) 

205 

320 

863 
111 
(57) 
(6) 
(42) 

869 

417 

Land and 
buildings	
£m 

Plant and
equipment	
£m 

514	
9 
4 
(6) 
8 
(17)	

1,215	
155 
2 
(44) 
(14) 
(42)	

1,052
135
(60)
(7)
(46)

1,074

737

Total
£m

1,729
164
6
(50)
(6)
(59)

512 

1,272 

1,784

177	
21 
(3) 
(6)	

189 

323 

337	

817	
111 
(39) 
(26)	

863 

409 

398	

994
132
(42)
(32)

1,052

732

735

The	net	book	amount	of	assets	under	construction	is	£62m	(2011:	£64m).	Assets	under	construction	are	included	within	plant	and	equipment.	

The	reclassification	from	plant	and	equipment	to	land	and	buildings	of	£21m	(2011:	£8m)	shows	the	transfer	of	completed	assets.	A	further	£6m	was	
reclassified to intangible assets on completion in 2011.

Capital	expenditure	which	was	contracted	but	not	capitalised	at	31	December	2012	was	£20m	(2011:	£52m).

56

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
11 DEFERRED TAX

Deferred tax liabilities 

At	1	January	2011	
Charged/(credited)	to	the	income	statement	
Credited to other comprehensive income 
Charged directly to equity 
Arising on business combination 
Exchange	differences	

At 31 December 2011 

Charged/(credited)	to	the	income	statement	
Credited to other comprehensive income 
Arising on business combination 
Disposal of business 
Exchange	differences	

At 31 December 2012 

Deferred tax assets 

At	1	January	2011	
(Charged)/credited	to	the	income	statement	
Credited to other comprehensive income  
Charged directly to equity 
Exchange	differences	

At 31 December 2011 

(Charged)/credited	to	the	income	statement	
Credited to other comprehensive income  
Exchange	differences	

At 31 December 2012 

  Accelerated 
capital 
allowances	
£m  

 Intangible 
assets	
£m  

Short-term 
temporary  
differences	
£m 

Retirement
benefit
obligations	
£m 

Tax	losses	
£m 

1,918	
(6)	
– 
– 
101 
(34)	

1,979 

(92)	
– 
299 
(15) 
(46)	

(202)	
12	
– 
2 
– 
4	

(184) 

(29)	
– 
(23) 
– 
4	

(8)	
2	
– 
– 
– 
–	

(6) 

–	
– 
(9) 
– 
–	

(13)	
(2)	
(19) 
– 
– 
(2)	

(36) 

(47)	
(14) 
– 
– 
2	

19	
–	
– 
– 
– 
–	

19 

12	
– 
1 
– 
(1)	

31 

Total
£m 

1,714
6
(19)
2
101
(32)

1,772

(156)
(14)
268
(15)
(41)	

2,125 

(232) 

(15) 

(95) 

1,814

  Accelerated 
capital 
allowances	
£m  

 Intangible 
assets	
£m  

Short-term 
temporary  
differences	
£m 

Retirement
benefit
obligations	
£m 

Tax	losses	
£m 

(4)	
(1)	
– 
– 
–	

(5) 

14	
– 
–	

9 

(20)	
5	
– 
– 
(1)	

(16) 

8	
– 
1	

(7) 

107	
(15)	
– 
(11) 
1	

82 

(44)	
2 
(2)	

38 

10	
24	
– 
– 
(2)	

32 

(32)	
– 
–	

– 

53	
(12)	
16 
– 
–	

57 

(48)	
1 
(1)	

9 

Total
£m 

146
1
16
(11)
(2)

150

(102)
3
(2)

49

Deferred	tax	assets	and	liabilities	have	been	offset	where	they	relate	to	income	taxes	levied	by	the	same	taxation	authority.

Certain deferred tax assets in respect of overseas corporation tax losses and other temporary differences totalling £152m (2011: £115m) have not been 
recognised	at	31	December	2012	as	the	likelihood	of	future	economic	benefit	is	not	sufficiently	assured.	These	assets	will	be	recognised	if	utilisation	of	
the losses and other temporary differences becomes reasonably certain. 

No deferred tax liability has been recognised on the unremitted earnings of overseas subsidiaries as no tax is expected to be payable on them in the 
foreseeable future based on the current repatriation policy of the Group.

57

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
12 INVENTORIES

Raw	materials	and	consumables	
Work in progress 
Finished	goods	and	goods	held	for	resale	

Total inventories 

2012 
£m 

157 
27 
551 

735 

The	cost	of	inventories	recognised	as	an	expense	and	included	as	cost	of	sales	amounted	to	£3,821m	(2011	(restated*):	£3,828m).	This	includes	
inventory	write	offs	and	losses	of	£23m	(2011:	£19m).

The	Group	inventory	provision	at	31	December	2012	was	£81m	(2011:	£97m).

* Refer to note 1 for further details.

13 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES

Amounts falling due within one year 

Trade	receivables	
Less: Provision for impairment of receivables 

Trade	receivables	–	net	
Other receivables 
Prepayments and accrued income 

2012 
£m 

1,269 
(47) 

1,222 
131 
54 

1,407 

2011 
£m

167
31
560

758

2011
£m

1,294
(47)

1,247
135
60

1,442

Trade	receivables	consist	of	a	broad	cross-section	of	our	international	customer	base	for	whom	there	is	no	significant	history	of	default.	The	credit	risk	of	
customers is assessed at a subsidiary and Group level, taking into account their financial positions, past experiences and other relevant factors. Individual 
customer credit limits are imposed based on these factors. 

As	at	31	December	2012,	trade	receivables	of	£92m	(2011:	£89m)	were	past	due	but	not	impaired.	The	ageing	analysis	of	trade	receivables	past	due	
but	not	impaired	is	as	follows:

Up	to	3	months	

2012 
£m 

92 

2011
£m

89

As	at	31	December	2012,	trade	receivables	of	£77m	(2011:	£80m)	were	considered	to	be	impaired.	The	amount	of	provision	at	31	December	2012	was	
£47m	(2011:	£47m).	It	was	assessed	that	a	portion	of	the	receivables	is	expected	to	be	recovered	due	to	the	nature	and	historical	collection	of	trade	
receivables.	The	ageing	analysis	of	these	receivables	is	as	follows:

Up	to	3	months	
Over 3 months 

2012 
£m 

37 
40 

77 

2011
£m

40
40

80

The	movement	in	the	provision	for	impaired	receivables	consists	of	increases	for	additional	provisions	offset	by	receivables	written	off	and	unused	
provision	released	back	to	the	income	statement.	The	gross	movements	in	the	provision	are	considered	to	be	insignificant.

The	other	receivables	do	not	contain	impaired	assets.	They	consist	of	items	including	reclaimable	turnover	tax	and	are	from	a	broad	range	of	countries	
within	the	Group.

The	carrying	amounts	of	the	Group’s	trade	and	other	receivables	are	denominated	in	the	following	currencies:

Sterling 
Euro	
US	dollar	
Other currencies 

2012 
£m 

99 
305 
388 
615 

1,407 

2011
£m

115
361
369
597

1,442

The	maximum	exposure	to	credit	risk	at	the	year	end	is	the	carrying	value	of	each	class	of	receivable	mentioned	above.	The	Group	does	not	hold	any	
collateral as security.

58

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT

Financial Instruments by Category

At 31 December 2012 

Assets as per the balance sheet
Auction rate securities1 
Short-term deposits2 
Trade	and	other	receivables3 
Derivative	financial	instruments	–	FX	forward	exchange	contracts	
Cash and cash equivalents 

Liabilities as per the balance sheet
Borrowings	(excluding	finance	lease	obligations)4 
Finance	lease	obligations4 
Derivative	financial	instruments	–	FX	forward	exchange	contracts	
Trade	and	other	payables5 
Other non-current liabilities6 

At 31 December 2011 

Assets as per the balance sheet
Auction rate securities 
Short-term deposits 
Trade	and	other	receivables3 
Derivative	financial	instruments	–	FX	forward	exchange	contracts	
Cash and cash equivalents 

Liabilities as per the balance sheet
Borrowings	(excluding	finance	lease	obligations)4 
Finance	lease	obligations4 
Derivative	financial	instruments	–	FX	forward	exchange	contracts	
Trade	and	other	payables5 
Other non-current liabilities6 

Loans and 
  receivables 
£m 

  Derivatives 
used for 
hedging 
£m 

Fair value 
through 
the P&L 
£m 

Available 
for sale 
£m 

Carrying 
value 
total 
£m 

– 
– 
1,366 
– 
887 

– 
– 
– 
4 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

2 
4 
– 
– 
– 

2 
4 
1,366 
4 
887 

  Derivatives 
used for 
hedging 
£m 

Other 
financial 
Fair value  liabilities at 
through  amortised 
cost 
the P&L 
£m 
£m 

– 
– 
43 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

3,269 
5 
– 
2,698 
17 

Carrying 
value 
total 
£m 

3,269 
5 
43 
2,698 
17 

Loans and 
receivables	
£m 

	 Derivatives	
used for 
hedging	
£m 

Fair	value	
through 
the	P&L	
£m 

Available 
for	sale	
£m 

Carrying	
value 
total	
£m 

– 
– 
1,368 
–	
639 

– 
– 
– 
67	
– 

– 
– 
- 
–	
– 

10 
11 
– 
–	
– 

10 
11 
1,368 
67	
639 

	 Derivatives	
used for 
hedging	
£m 

Fair	value	
through 
the	P&L	
£m 

Other 
financial 
liabilities	at	
amortised 
cost	
£m 

– 
– 
7	
– 
– 

– 
– 
–	
– 
– 

2,504 
4 
–	
2,756 
39 

Carrying	
value 
total	
£m 

2,504 
4 
7	
2,756 
39 

Fair
value
total
£m

2
4
1,366
4
887

Fair
value
total
£m

3,269
5
43
2,698
17

Fair
value
total
£m

10
11
1,368
67
639

Fair
value
total
£m

2,504
4
7
2,756
39

1		 	These	investments	are	auction	rate	securities	issued	by	US	state	authorities,	denominated	in	US	dollars	with	redemption	dates	falling	beyond	2013.	

They	are	typically	traded	on	a	secondary	market,	however	due	to	the	current	inactivity	of	this	market	there	is	uncertainty	over	whether	they	are	likely	
to	be	redeemed	within	one	year	and	therefore	have	been	classified	as	non-current.

2		 	These	short-term	deposits	do	not	meet	the	requirements	to	be	classified	as	cash	equivalents	as	they	have	maturities	greater	than	three	months.	They	

are	however	highly	liquid	assets.

3   Prepayments and accrued income and employee benefit assets are excluded from the trade and other receivables balance as the analysis above is 

required only for financial instruments.

4	 	The	categories	in	this	disclosure	are	determined	by	IAS	39.	Finance	leases	are	outside	the	scope	of	IAS	39,	but	they	remain	within	the	scope	of	IFRS	7.	

Therefore	finance	leases	have	been	shown	separately.

5   Social security liabilities and other employee benefit liabilities are excluded from trade and other payables as the analysis above is required only for 

financial instruments.

6	 Included	in	other	non-current	liabilities	is	£12m	(2011:	£34m)	to	purchase	the	remaining	shares	of	Shanghai	Manon	Trading	Ltd.	

The	carrying	value	less	impairment	provision	of	investments,	current	borrowings,	cash	at	bank,	trade	receivables	and	trade	payables	are	assumed	to	
approximate their fair values due to their short-term nature.

59

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (CONTINUED)
The	fair	value	measurement	hierarchy	levels	have	been	defined	as	follows:

1)	Quoted	prices	(unadjusted)	in	active	markets	for	identical	assets	or	liabilities	(level	1).

2)		Inputs	other	than	quoted	prices	included	within	level	1	that	are	observable	for	the	asset	or	liability,	either	directly	(that	is,	as	prices)	or	indirectly	 

(that is, derived from prices) (level 2). If all significant inputs required to fair value an instrument are observable, the instrument is included in level 2.

3) Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (that is, unobservable inputs) (level 3).

The	following	table	presents	the	Group’s	assets	and	liabilities	that	are	measured	at	fair	value:

Assets as per the balance sheet
Auction rate securities 
Short term deposits 
Derivative	financial	instruments	–	FX	forward	exchange	contracts	

Total	assets	

Liabilities as per the balance sheet
Derivative	financial	instruments	–	FX	forward	exchange	contracts	

Total	liabilities	

Specific valuation techniques used to value financial instruments include:

2012 
Level 2 
£m 

2012 
Level 3 
£m 

2012 
Total	
£m  

2011 
Level	2	
£m 

2011 
Level	3	
£m 

2011
Total
£m

– 
4 
4 

8 

43 

43 

2 
– 
– 

2 

– 

– 

2 
4 
4 

10 

43 

43 

– 
11 
67 

78 

7 

7 

10 
– 
– 

10 

– 

– 

10
11
67

88

7

7

1)		The	fair	value	of	forward	foreign	exchange	contracts	is	determined	using	forward	exchange	rates	at	the	balance	sheet	date,	with	the	resulting	value	

discounted back to present value.

2)	Discounted	cash	flow	analysis	is	used	to	determine	the	fair	value	for	the	remaining	financial	instruments.

As the value of the level 3 instruments at 31 December 2012 is not material, no further level 3 disclosures have been made. 

Financial Risk Management
The	Group’s	multinational	operations	expose	it	to	a	variety	of	financial	risks	that	include	the	effects	of	changes	in	foreign	currency	exchange	rates	
(foreign	exchange	risk),	market	prices,	interest	rates,	credit	risks	and	liquidity.	The	Group	has	in	place	a	risk	management	programme	that	uses	foreign	
currency financial instruments, including debt, and other instruments, to limit the impact of these risks on the financial performance of the Group.

The	Group’s	financing	and	financial	risk	management	activities	are	centralised	into	Group	Treasury	(GT)	to	achieve	benefits	of	scale	and	control.	 
GT	manages	financial	exposures	of	the	Group	centrally	in	a	manner	consistent	with	underlying	business	risks.	GT	manages	only	those	risks	and	flows	
generated by the underlying commercial operations and speculative transactions are not undertaken. 

The	Board	of	Directors	reviews	and	agrees	policies,	guidelines	and	authority	levels	for	all	areas	of	Treasury	activity	and	individually	approves	significant	
activities.	GT	operates	under	the	close	control	of	the	CFO	and	is	subject	to	periodic	independent	reviews	and	audits,	both	internal	and	external.	

1. Market Risk
(a)	Foreign	exchange	risk
The	Group	operates	internationally	and	is	exposed	to	foreign	exchange	risk	arising	from	various	currency	exposures.	Foreign	exchange	risk	arises	from	
future commercial transactions, recognised assets and liabilities and net investments in foreign operations. 

The	Group’s	policy	is	to	align	interest	costs	and	operating	profit	of	its	major	currencies	in	order	to	provide	some	protection	against	the	translation	
exposure	on	foreign	currency	profits	after	tax.	The	Group	may	undertake	borrowings	and	other	hedging	methods	in	the	currencies	of	the	countries	
where	most	of	its	assets	are	located.	

It	is	the	Group’s	policy	to	monitor	and	only	where	appropriate	hedge	its	foreign	currency	transaction	exposure.	These	transaction	exposures	arise	mainly	
from foreign currency receipts and payments for goods and services and from the remittances of foreign currency dividends and loans. 

The	local	business	units	enter	into	forward	foreign	exchange	contracts	with	GT	to	manage	these	exposures	where	practical	and	allowed	by	local	regulations.	
GT	matches	the	Group	exposures,	and	hedges	the	net	position	where	possible,	using	spot	and	forward	foreign	currency	exchange	contracts.

The	notional	principal	amount	of	the	outstanding	forward	foreign	exchange	contracts	at	31	December	2012	was	£4,303m	payable	 
(2011: £3,175m payable).

60

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
14 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (CONTINUED)
Cash Flow Hedge Profile
As	at	31	December	2012,	the	Group	had	no	material	individual	financial	instruments	classified	as	cash	flow	hedges.	The	same	was	true	as	at	 
31 December 2011.

The	Group	held	forward	foreign	exchange	contracts	denominated	as	cash	flow	hedges	primarily	in	Australian	dollars,	Euro,	Canadian	dollars,	Singapore	
dollars	and	Hungarian	forint.	Notional	value	of	the	payable	leg	resulting	from	these	financial	instruments	was	as	follows:

Australian dollar 
Euro	
Canadian dollar 
Singapore dollar 
Hungarian	forint	
New	Zealand	dollar	
Swedish	krona	
US	dollars	
Polish zloty 
Other 

2012 
£m 

90 
90 
60 
43 
38 
12 
4 
1 
– 
1 

2011
£m

47
12
40
-
-
11
13
14
53
4

339 

194

These	forward	foreign	exchange	contracts	are	expected	to	mature	over	the	period	January	2013	to	January	2014	(2011:	January	2012	to	 
December 2012).

There	is	no	ineffective	portion	recognised	in	the	income	statement	arising	from	cash	flow	hedges	(2011:	£nil).	

Gains	and	losses	recognised	in	the	hedging	reserve	in	other	comprehensive	income	on	forward	exchange	contracts	in	2012	of	£3m	gain	(2011:	£3m	
gain)	are	recognised	in	the	income	statement	in	the	period	or	periods	during	which	the	hedged	forecast	transaction	affects	the	income	statement,	
which	is	generally	within	12	months	from	the	balance	sheet	date.

The	maximum	exposure	to	credit	risk	at	the	reporting	date	is	the	fair	value	of	the	derivative	assets	in	the	balance	sheet.	

In	the	case	of	cash	flow	hedges,	these	are	denominated	in	a	diverse	range	of	currencies,	where	a	fluctuation	in	one	individual	currency	relationship,	
with	all	others	held	constant,	does	not	have	a	significant	effect	on	the	income	statement	or	Shareholders’	equity.	A	fluctuation	analysis	has	been	
performed	for	all	currencies.	The	largest	potential	fluctuation	would	be	in	respect	of	forward	contracts	between	the	Australian	dollar	and	the	Singapore	
dollar.	If	the	Singapore	dollar	had	strengthened/weakened	by	5%	against	the	Australian	dollar,	with	all	other	variables	held	constant,	the	impact	on	
Shareholders’	equity	would	have	been	less	than	£1m	(2011:	£nil).	As	at	31	December	2012	if	all	other	currencies	had	strengthened/weakened	by	5%	
against	Sterling	with	all	other	variables	held	constant,	this	would	have	had	an	insignificant	effect	on	the	income	statement	or	Shareholders’	equity	
(2011: insignificant). 

The	remaining	major	monetary	financial	instruments	(liquid	assets,	receivables,	interest	and	non-interest	bearing	liabilities)	are	directly	denominated	in	
the functional currency or are transferred to the functional currency through the use of derivatives. 

The	gains	and	losses	from	fair	value	movements	on	financing	derivatives	recognised	in	finance	income	and	expense	were	£nil	(2011:	£nil).

(b) Price risk 
The	Group	is	not	exposed	to	equity	securities	price	risk.	Due	to	the	nature	of	its	business	the	Group	is	exposed	to	commodity	price	risk	related	to	the	
production	or	packaging	of	finished	goods,	such	as	oil	related,	and	a	diverse	range	of	other,	raw	materials.	This	risk	is,	however,	managed	primarily	
through	medium-term	contracts	with	certain	key	suppliers	and	is	not	therefore	viewed	as	being	a	material	risk.

(c)	Cash	flow	and	fair	value	interest	rate	risk 
The	Group	has	both	interest-bearing	and	non	interest-bearing	assets	and	liabilities.	The	Group	monitors	its	interest	expense	rate	exposure	on	a	regular	
basis.	The	Group	manages	its	interest	income	rate	exposure	on	its	gross	financial	assets	by	using	a	combination	of	fixed	rate	term	deposits.

The	Group	analyses	its	interest	rate	exposure	on	a	regular	basis.	Various	scenarios	are	simulated	taking	into	consideration	refinancing,	renewal	of	
existing positions, alternative financing and hedging. Based on these scenarios, the Group calculates the impact on the income statement of a defined 
interest	rate	shift.	For	each	simulation,	the	same	interest	rate	shift	is	used	for	all	currencies,	calculated	on	a	full	year	and	pre-tax	basis.	

The	scenarios	are	only	run	for	liabilities	that	represent	the	major	interest-bearing	positions.	Based	on	the	simulations	performed,	the	impact	on	the	
income	statement	of	a	50	basis-point	shift	in	interest	rates	would	be	a	maximum	increase	of	£9m	(2011:	£10m)	or	decrease	of	£9m	(2011:	£10m),	
respectively	for	the	liabilities	covered.	The	simulation	is	done	on	a	periodic	basis	to	verify	that	the	maximum	loss	potential	is	within	the	limit	given	 
by management.

2. Credit Risk
The	Group	has	no	significant	concentrations	of	credit	risk.	Credit	risk	arises	from	cash	and	cash	equivalents,	derivative	financial	instruments,	deposits	
with	banks	and	financial	institutions,	as	well	as	credit	exposures	to	customers.	The	credit	quality	of	trade	and	other	receivables	is	detailed	in	note	13.	
Financial	institution	counterparties	are	subject	to	approval	under	the	Group’s	counterparty	risk	policy	and	such	approval	is	limited	to	financial	institutions	
with	a	BBB	rating	or	above.	The	Group	uses	BBB+	and	higher	rated	counterparties	to	manage	risk	and	uses	BBB	rated	counterparties	by	exception.	The	
amount	of	exposure	to	any	individual	counterparty	is	subject	to	a	limit	defined	within	the	counterparty	risk	policy,	which	is	reassessed	annually	by	the	
Board.	Derivative	financial	instruments	are	only	traded	with	counterparties	approved	in	accordance	with	the	Board	approved	policy.	Derivative	risk	is	
measured	using	a	risk	weighting	method.

61

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (CONTINUED)
The	table	below	summarises	the	Group’s	major	financial	institution	counterparties	by	credit	rating	(lower	of	S&P	and	Moody’s)	and	balances	(cash	
equivalents, derivative financial instruments, deposits) at the balance sheet date.

Counterparty Risk

Counterparty 

Bank A 
Bank B 
Bank C 
Bank D 
Bank	E	
Bank	F	
Bank G 
Bank	H	
Bank I 
Bank	J	

Credit 
rating 

AA 
A 
AAA 
A 
A 
A 
A 
A 
A 
A 

2012 

Limit 
£m 

Exposure	
£m 

175 
125 
225 
125 
100 
100 
100 
100 
100 
75 

157 
125 
124 
105 
97 
89 
84 
64 
48 
36 

Credit	
rating 

AA 
A 
AAA 
A 
A 
AA 
A 
A 
A 
A 

2011

Exposure
£m

96
93
100
3
60
38
86
76
96
10

Limit	
£m 

175 
125 
300 
125 
100 
175 
125 
100 
125 
100 

3. Liquidity Risk
Cash	flow	forecasting	is	performed	by	the	local	business	units	and	aggregated	by	GT.	GT	monitors	rolling	forecasts	of	the	Group’s	liquidity	requirements	
to	ensure	it	has	sufficient	cash	to	meet	operational	needs	while	maintaining	sufficient	headroom	on	its	undrawn	committed	borrowing	facilities.	Funds	
over	and	above	those	required	for	short-term	working	capital	purposes	by	the	overseas	businesses	are	generally	remitted	to	GT.	The	Group	uses	the	
remittances	to	settle	obligations,	repay	borrowings,	or,	in	the	event	of	a	surplus,	invest	in	short-term	instruments	issued	by	institutions	with	a	BBB	 
rating or better.

Borrowing Facilities 
The	Group	has	various	borrowing	facilities	available	to	it.	The	Group	has	bilateral	credit	facilities	with	high-quality	international	banks.	All	of	these	
facilities	have	similar	or	equivalent	terms	and	conditions,	and	have	a	financial	covenant,	which	is	not	expected	to	restrict	the	Group’s	future	operations.	

At	the	end	of	2012,	the	Group	had,	in	addition	to	its	long-term	debt	of	£3m	(2011:	£3m),	committed	borrowing	facilities	totalling	£4,000m	 
(2011:	£3,600m),	of	which	£3,600m	exceeded	12	months’	maturity.	Of	the	total	facilities	at	the	year	end,	£nil	(2011:	£nil)	was	utilised.	The	committed	
borrowing	facilities,	together	with	available	uncommitted	facilities	and	central	cash	and	investments,	are	considered	sufficient	to	meet	the	Group’s	
projected	cash	requirements.

The	undrawn	committed	facilities	available,	in	respect	of	which	all	conditions	precedent	have	been	met	at	the	balance	sheet	date,	were	as	follows:

Undrawn	committed	borrowing	facilities:
Expiring	within	one	year	
Expiring	between	one	and	two	years	
Expiring	after	more	than	two	years	 	

2012 
£m 

400 
850 
2,750 

4,000 

2011
£m

–
850
2,750

3,600

All	borrowing	facilities	are	at	floating	rates	of	interest.

The	facilities	have	been	arranged	to	cover	general	corporate	purposes	including	support	for	commercial	paper	issuance.	All	facilities	incur	commitment	
fees at market rates.

Headroom	between	net	debt	and	available	facilities	at	31	December	2012	was	£1,574m	(2011:	£1,805m).

The	Group’s	borrowing	limit	at	31	December	2012	calculated	in	accordance	with	the	Articles	of	Association	was	£60,468m	(2011:	£59,823m).

The	table	below	analyses	the	Group’s	financial	liabilities	and	the	derivatives	which	will	be	settled	on	a	net	basis	into	relevant	maturity	groupings	 
based	on	the	remaining	period	at	the	balance	sheet	date	to	the	contractual	maturity	date.	The	amounts	disclosed	in	the	table	are	the	contractual	
undiscounted	cash	flows	which	have	been	calculated	using	spot	rates	at	the	relevant	balance	sheet	date,	including	interest	to	be	paid.	

At 31 December 2012 

Commercial paper 
Other	borrowings		
Trade	payables	
Other payables 

At 31 December 2011 

Commercial paper 
Other	borrowings		
Trade	payables	
Other payables 

62

Total 
£m 

(3,250) 
(24) 
(948) 
(1,767) 

Total	
£m 

(2,469) 
(39)	
(1,002)	
(1,793) 

Less than  Between 1  Between 2 
1 year  and 2 years  and 5 years 
£m 

£m 

£m 

(3,250) 
(21) 
(948) 
(1,750) 

– 
– 
– 
– 

– 
(3) 
– 
(17) 

Less	than	

Between	1	

Between	2	
1	year	 and	2	years	 and	5	years	
£m 

£m 

£m 

(2,469) 
(36)	
(1,002)	
(1,754) 

– 
–	
–	
(22) 

– 
(3)	
–	
(17) 

Over
5 years
£m

–
–
–
–

Over
5	years
£m

–
–
–
–

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
14 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS AND FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (CONTINUED)
The	table	below	analyses	the	Group’s	derivative	financial	instruments	which	will	be	settled	on	a	gross	basis	into	relevant	maturity	groupings	based	on	
the	remaining	period	between	the	balance	sheet	and	the	contractual	maturity	date.	The	amounts	disclosed	in	the	table	are	the	contractual	undiscounted	
cash	flows	which	have	been	calculated	using	spot	rates	at	the	relevant	balance	sheet	date.

At 31 December 2012 

Forward	exchange	contracts
Outflow	
Inflow	

At 31 December 2011 

Forward	exchange	contracts
Outflow	
Inflow	

Less than  Between 1  Between 2 
1 year  and 2 years  and 5 years 
£m 

£m 

£m 

(4,233) 
4,190 

(70) 
70 

– 
– 

Less	than	

Between	1	

Between	2	
1 year  and 2 years  and 5 years 
£m 

£m 

£m 

Over
5 years
£m

–
–

Over
5 years
£m

(3,175)	
3,242	

–	
–	

–	
–	

–
–

4. Capital Management
The	Group	considers	capital	to	be	net	debt	plus	total	equity.	Net	debt	is	calculated	as	total	borrowings	less	cash	and	cash	equivalents,	short-term	
available	for	sale	financial	assets	and	financing	derivative	financial	instruments	(refer	to	note	16).	Total	equity	includes	share	capital,	reserves	and	
retained	earnings	as	shown	in	the	consolidated	balance	sheet.	

Net debt (note 16) 
Total	equity	

2012 
£m 

2,426 
5,922 

8,348 

2011
£m

1,795
5,781

7,576

The	objectives	for	managing	capital	are	to	safeguard	the	Group’s	ability	to	continue	as	a	going	concern,	in	order	to	provide	returns	for	Shareholders	and	
benefits for other stakeholders and to maintain an efficient capital structure to optimise the cost of capital.

In maintaining an appropriate capital structure and providing returns for Shareholders, the Company provided returns to Shareholders in 2012 in the 
form of dividends and the buy back of shares. Refer to notes 27 and 22 respectively.  

The	Group	monitors	net	debt	and	at	year	end	the	Group	had	net	debt	of	£2,426m	(2011:	£1,795m).	The	Group	seeks	to	pay	down	net	debt	using	cash	
generated by the business to maintain an appropriate level of financial flexibility.

15 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS 

Cash at bank and in hand 
Short-term bank deposits 

Cash and cash equivalents 

2012 
£m 

371 
516 

887 

2011
£m

312
327

639

The	Group	operates	in	a	number	of	territories,	where	there	are	either	foreign	currency	exchange	restrictions	or	where	it	is	difficult	for	the	Group	to	
extract cash readily and easily in the short-term. As a result £115m (2011: £67m) of cash included in cash and cash equivalents is restricted for use by 
the Group.

63

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2011
£m

35
2,469
1

2,505

2011
£m

3

3

2011
£m

35

2,469
1

3

2,473

2,508

2011
£m

639
(5)
(2,503)
74

(1,795)

2011
£m

(2,011)
88 
400
(249) 
–
(23)

(1,795)

16 FINANCIAL LIABILITIES – BORROWINGS

Current 

Bank loans and overdrafts1 
Commercial paper2 
Finance	lease	obligations	

Non-current 

Finance	lease	obligations	

2012 
£m 

19 
3,250 
2 

3,271 

2012 
£m 

3 

3 

1 Bank loans are denominated in a number of currencies, all are unsecured and bear interest based on relevant LIBOR equivalent.

2	Commercial	paper	was	issued	in	US	dollars,	is	unsecured	and	bears	interest	based	on	relevant	LIBOR	equivalent.	

2012 
£m 

19 

3,250 
2 

3 

3,255 

3,274 

2012 
£m 

887 
(5) 
(3,269) 
(39) 

(2,426) 

2012 
£m 

(1,795) 
264 
112 
(887) 
(99) 
(21) 

(2,426) 

Maturity of debt 

Bank loans and overdrafts repayable:
Within one year or on demand 

Other	borrowings	repayable:
Within one year:
  Commercial paper 
	 Finance	leases	
Between	two	and	five	years:
	 Finance	leases	(payable	by	instalments)	

Gross	borrowings	(unsecured)	

Analysis of net debt  

Cash and cash equivalents  
Overdrafts  
Borrowings	(excluding	overdrafts)	
Other 

Reconciliation of net debt  

Net debt at beginning of year  
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents  
Repayment	of	borrowings		
Proceeds	from	borrowings		
Borrowings	acquired	in	business	combination	
Exchange	and	other	movements		

Net debt at end of year  

64

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17 PROVISIONS FOR LIABILITIES AND CHARGES 

At	1	January	2011	
Charged to the income statement   
Utilised	during	the	year	
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2011 

Charged to the income statement   
Arising on business combination 
Utilised	during	the	year	
Released to the income statement   
Exchange	adjustments	

At 31 December 2012 

Provisions	have	been	analysed	between	current	and	non-current	as	follows:

Current 
Non-current 

	 Restructuring	
provision 
£m 

Other	
provisions 
£m 

Total
provisions
£m

93	
92 
(156)	
1	

30 

123 
– 
(87)	
– 
–	

66 

2012 
£m 

128 
100 

228 

216	
23 
(89)	
(2)	

148 

42 
45 
(49)	
(23)  
(1)	

162 

309
115
(245)
(1)

178

165
45 
(136)
(23)
(1)

228

2011 
£m

60
118

178

Other	provisions	include	onerous	lease	provisions	expiring	between	2014	and	2016	of	£7m	(2011:	£12m).	The	remainder	of	the	balance	relates	to	
various	legal,	regulatory,	environmental	and	other	obligations	throughout	the	Group,	the	majority	of	which	are	expected	to	be	utilised	within	five	years.	
The	restructuring	provision	principally	relates	to	redundancies,	the	majority	of	which	are	expected	to	be	utilised	within	one	year.

18 OPERATING LEASE COMMITMENTS 

Total	future	minimum	lease	payments	under	non-cancellable	operating	leases	due:
Within one year 
Later than one and less than five years 
After five years 

2012 
£m 

37 
72 
32 

141 

2011
£m

41
92
28

161

Operating	lease	rentals	charged	to	the	income	statement	in	2012	were	£54m	(2011:	£62m).

As	at	31	December	2012,	total	amounts	expected	to	be	received	under	non-cancellable	sub-lease	arrangements	were	£5m	(2011:	£6m).	

Amounts	credited	to	the	income	statement	in	respect	of	sub-lease	arrangements	were	£2m	(2011:	£2m).

19 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
Contingent liabilities comprising guarantees relating to subsidiary undertakings, at 31 December 2012 amounted to £3m (2011: £4m).

The	Group	is	involved	in	a	number	of	investigations	by	government	authorities	and	has	made	provisions	for	such	investigations,	where	appropriate.	
Where it is too early to determine the likely outcome of these matters, the Directors have made no provision for such potential liabilities. 

The	Group	has	received	a	civil	claim	for	damages	from	the	Department	of	Health	and	others	in	the	UK	regarding	alleged	anti-competitive	activity	
involving	the	Gaviscon	brand.	The	claim	is	under	review	and	although	it	is	at	an	early	stage,	the	Directors	do	not	believe	that	any	potential	impact	
would	be	material	to	the	Group	financial	statements.

The	Group	from	time	to	time	is	involved	in	disputes	in	relation	to	ongoing	tax	matters	in	a	number	of	jurisdictions	around	the	world.	Where	appropriate,	
the Directors make provisions based on their assessment of each case.

20 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES

Trade	payables	
Other payables 
Other tax and social security payable 
Accruals 

2012 
£m 

948 
119 
98 
1,677 

2,842 

2011
£m

1,002
71
106
1,722

2,901

65

2012	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
21 PENSION AND OTHER POST-RETIREMENT COMMITMENTS
The	Group	operates	a	number	of	defined	benefit	and	defined	contribution	pension	schemes	around	the	world	covering	many	of	its	employees,	which	
are	principally	funded.	The	Group’s	most	significant	defined	benefit	pension	scheme	(UK)	is	funded	by	the	payment	of	contributions	to	separately	
administered	trust	funds.	The	Group	also	operates	a	number	of	other	post-retirement	schemes	in	certain	countries.	The	major	scheme	is	in	the	US	(US	
Retiree	Health	Care	Scheme),	where	salaried	participants	become	eligible	for	retiree	health	care	benefits	after	they	reach	a	combined	‘age	and	years	of	
service	rendered’	figure	of	70,	although	the	age	must	be	a	minimum	of	55.	As	at	31	December	2012	there	were	2,691	(2011:	2,584)	eligible	retirees	
and	1,193	(2011:	1,312)	current	employees	potentially	eligible.	This	scheme	is	unfunded.

Pension	costs	for	the	year	are	as	follows:

Defined contribution schemes 
Defined benefit schemes (net charge) 

Total	pension	costs	recognised	in	the	income	statement	(note	5)	

2012 
£m 

25 
25 

50 

2011
£m

26
25

51

For	the	largest	UK	scheme,	a	full	independent	actuarial	valuation	was	carried	out	at	5	April	2010	and	updated	at	31	December	2012.	For	the	US	
scheme,	a	full	independent	actuarial	valuation	was	carried	out	at	1	January	2012	and	updated	at	31	December	2012.	The	projected	unit	valuation	
method	was	used	for	the	UK	and	US	scheme	valuations.	The	major	assumptions	used	by	the	actuaries	for	the	two	major	schemes	as	at	 
31	December	2012	were:

Rate of increase in pensionable salaries 
Rate of increase in deferred pensions during deferment 
Rate of increase in pension payments – pensioners 
Rate of increase in pension payments – non-pensioners 
Discount rate 
Inflation assumption 
Annual medical cost inflation 
Long-term expected rate of return on:
	 Equities	
  Bonds 
  Other 

UK 
% 

4.5 
2.9 
2.7 
2.7 
4.3 
3.0 
– 

7.0 
4.3 
5.7 

2012 

US	
(medical)	
% 

– 
– 
– 
– 
4.1 
– 
5.0–9.0 

– 
– 
– 

UK	
% 

4.6 
3.1 
3.1 
3.1 
4.8 
3.1 
– 

8.1 
4.8 
6.6 

2011

US
(medical)
%

–
–
–
–
4.7
–
5.0–9.0

–
–
–

The	expected	rate	of	return	on	plan	assets	is	based	on	market	expectations	at	the	beginning	of	the	period	for	returns	over	the	entire	life	of	the	benefit	
obligation.	Assumptions	regarding	future	mortality	experience	are	set	in	accordance	with	published	statistics	and	experience	in	each	territory.	For	the	UK	
scheme	the	mortality	assumptions	were	based	on	the	following	tables;	the	average	life	expectancy	in	years	of	a	pensioner	retiring	at	aged	60	on	the	
balance	sheet	date	is	as	follows:

Male 
Female	

2012 
years 

28.2 
30.1 

2011
years

28.0
29.8

For	the	UK	scheme	the	mortality	assumptions	were	based	on	the	standard	SAPS	mortality	table	1NMA	for	males	and	1NFA	for	females.	The	average	life	
expectancy	in	years	of	a	pensioner	retiring	at	aged	60,	15	years	after	the	balance	sheet	date,	is	as	follows:

Male 
Female	

2012 
years 

30.0 
31.9 

2011
years

29.8
31.7

For	the	US	scheme	the	mortality	assumptions	were	determined	using	the	RP2000	combined	table.	The	average	life	expectancy	in	years	of	a	pensioner	
retiring at age 60 on the balance sheet date is 24.1 years (2011: 24.0 years) for males and 25.8 years (2011: 25.8 years) for females.

Impact of medical cost trend rates
A	one	percentage	point	change	in	the	assumed	health	care	cost	trend	rates	would	have	the	following	effects:

Effect	on	service	cost	and	interest	cost	
Effect	on	post-retirement	benefit	obligation	

+1% 
£m 

2 
20 

2012 

-1%	
£m 

(1) 
(16) 

+1%	
£m 

2 
20 

2011

-1%
£m

(1)
(16)

66

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
21 PENSION AND OTHER POST-RETIREMENT COMMITMENTS (CONTINUED)
The	amounts	recognised	in	the	balance	sheet	are	determined	as	follows:	

Total	equities	
Total	bonds	
Total	other	assets	

Fair	value	of	plan	assets	
Present value of scheme liabilities 

Net liability recognised in the balance sheet 

UK 
£m 

407 
521 
76 

1,004 
(1,181) 

(177) 

US	
(medical) 
£m 

- 
- 
- 

- 
(128) 

(128) 

2012 

Total	
£m 

550 
623 
108 

Other 
£m 

143 
102 
32 

UK	
£m 

397 
436 
63 

277 
(371) 

1,281 
(1,680) 

896 
(1,092) 

(94) 

(399) 

(196) 

US
(medical)	
£m 

– 
– 
– 

– 
(133) 

(133) 

2011

Total
£m

511
509
92

1,112
(1,582)

(470)

Other	
£m 

114 
73 
29 

216 
(357) 

(141) 

Other represents the total of post-retirement benefits and Group defined benefit schemes not material for individual disclosure.

The	net	pension	liability	is	recognised	in	the	balance	sheet	as	follows:

Non-current asset:
	 Funded	scheme	surplus	
Non-current liability:
	 Funded	scheme	deficit	
	 Unfunded	scheme	liability	

Retirement benefit obligation 

Net pension liability 

None of the pension schemes’ assets includes an investment in shares or other instruments of the Company.

The	amounts	recognised	in	the	income	statement	are	as	follows:

Current service cost 
Curtailment gain 
Expected	return	on	pension	scheme	assets	
Interest on pension scheme liabilities 

Total	charge	to	the	income	statement	

UK 
£m 

(8) 
– 
48 
(51) 

(11) 

US	
(medical) 
£m 

(3) 
4 
– 
(6) 

(5) 

Other 
£m 

(11) 
– 
16 
(14) 

(9) 

2012 

Total	
£m 

(22) 
4 
64 
(71)  

(25)   

UK	
£m 

(8) 
– 
56 
(55) 

(7) 

Cumulative actuarial gains and losses recognised in other comprehensive income:

At	1	January	
Net actuarial loss recognised in the year (note 7) 

At 31 December 

The	movements	in	the	amounts	recognised	in	the	balance	sheet	are	as	follows:

2012 
£m 

27 

(184) 
(242) 

(426) 

(399) 

US
(medical)	
£m 

(3) 
– 
– 
(6) 

(9) 

2012 
£m 

(298) 
(64) 

(362) 

Other	
£m 

(9) 
– 
16 
(16) 

(9) 

Movement of net liability during the year   

Deficit	at	1	January	
Current service cost 
Curtailment gain 
Contributions 
Other	finance	income/(costs)	
Actuarial loss 
Exchange	adjustments	

Deficit at 31 December 

UK 
£m 

(196) 
(8) 
– 
70 
(3) 
(40) 
– 

(177) 

US	
(medical) 
£m 

(133) 
(3) 
4 
6 
(6) 
(2) 
6 

(128) 

2012 

Total	
£m 

(470)  
(22)  
4 
151 
(7) 
(64)  
9 

Other 
£m 

(141) 
(11) 
– 
75 
2 
(22) 
3 

(94) 

(399) 

UK	
£m 

(193) 
(8) 
– 
45 
1 
(41) 
– 

(196) 

US
(medical)	
£m 

(121) 
(3) 
– 
6 
(6) 
(7) 
(2) 

(133) 

Other	
£m 

(139) 
(9) 
– 
36 
– 
(36) 
7 

(141) 

The	actual	return	on	plan	assets	was	a	gain	of	£83m	(2011:	£34m	gain)	for	the	UK	scheme.	Included	within	contributions	above	are	employee	
contributions of £1m (2011: £1m).

2011
£m

32

(265)
(237)

(502)

(470)

2011

Total
£m

(20)
–
72
(77)

(25)

2011
£m

(214)
(84)

(298)

2011

Total
£m

(453)
(20)
–
87
(5)
(84)
5

(470)

67

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
21 PENSION AND OTHER POST-RETIREMENT COMMITMENTS (CONTINUED)
Changes	in	the	present	value	of	scheme	liabilities	are	as	follows:

Present	value	of	liabilities	at	1	January	
Current service cost 
Curtailment gain 
Interest cost 
Employee	contributions	
Benefits paid 
Actuarial losses 
Exchange	adjustments	

Present value of liabilities at 31 December   

Changes	in	the	fair	value	of	plan	assets	are	as	follows:

Fair	value	of	plan	assets	at	1	January	
Expected	rate	of	return	
Contributions 
Benefits paid 
Actuarial	gains/(losses)	
Exchange	adjustments	

UK 
£m 

US	
(medical) 
£m 

1,092 
8 
– 
51 
1 
(46) 
75 
– 

1,181 

133 
3 
(4) 
6 
– 
(6) 
2 
(6) 

128 

2012 

Total	
£m 

1,582 
22 
(4) 
71 
1 
(72) 
99 
(19) 

Other 
£m 

357 
11 
– 
14 
– 
(20) 
22 
(13) 

UK	
£m 

1,051 
8 
– 
55 
1 
(42) 
19 
– 

371 

1,680 

1,092 

UK 
£m 

896 
48 
71 
(46) 
35 
– 

Other 
£m 

216 
16 
81 
(26) 
– 
(10) 

2012 

Total	
£m 

1,112 
64 
152 
(72) 
35 
(10) 

Fair value of plan assets at 31 December 

1,004 

277 

1,281 

US
(medical)	
£m 

121 
3 
– 
6 
– 
(6) 
7 
2 

133 

UK	
£m 

858 
56 
46 
(42) 
(22) 
– 

896 

2011

Total
£m

1,507
20
–
77
1
(68)
52
(7)

Other	
£m 

335 
9 
– 
16 
– 
(20) 
26 
(9) 

357 

1,582

2011

Total
£m

1,054
72
88
(68)
(32)
(2)

Other	
£m 

196 
16 
42 
(26) 
(10) 
(2) 

216 

1,112

History	of	experience	gains	and	losses:

Experience	adjustments	arising	on	scheme	assets:
  Amount  
Percentage of scheme assets 
Experience	adjustments	arising	on	scheme	liabilities:
  Amount  
  Percentage of scheme liabilities 

Present value of scheme liabilities 
Fair	value	of	scheme	assets	

2012 
£m 

2011 
£m 

2010 
£m 

2009 
£m 

2008
£m

35 
2.7% 

(32) 
(2.9%) 

31 
2.9% 

70 
8.7% 

(191)
(26.9%)

(99) 
(5.9%) 

(52) 
3.3% 

(36) 
2.4% 

(172) 
14.7% 

106
(10.5%)

(1,680) 
1,281 

(1,582) 
1,112 

(1,507) 
1,054 

(1,172) 
801 

(1,011)
710

Net pension liability 

(399) 

(470) 

(453) 

(371) 

(301)

Expected	employer	contributions	to	be	paid	to	funded	defined	benefit	schemes	in	2013	are	£97m	for	the	UK	and	£3m	for	other	schemes.	

68

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
22 SHARE CAPITAL

Issued and fully paid
At	1	January	2012	
Allotments  

At 31 December 2012 

Issued and fully paid
At	1	January	2011	
Allotments  

At 31 December 2011 

Equity	
ordinary 
shares  

	Nominal	
value 
£m  

Subscriber		
ordinary 
shares 

Nominal
value
£m

728,621,602	
5,589,155 

734,210,757 

73	
– 

73 

2	
– 

2 

–
–

–

Equity	
ordinary 
shares  

	Nominal	
value 
£m  

Subscriber		
ordinary 
shares 

Nominal
value
£m

	725,853,970	
2,767,632 

728,621,602 

73	
– 

73 

2	
– 

2 

–
–

–

The	holders	of	ordinary	shares	(par	value	10p)	are	entitled	to	receive	dividends	as	declared	from	time	to	time	and	are	entitled	to	one	vote	per	share	at	
meetings of the Parent Company.

The	holders	of	subscriber	ordinary	shares	(par	value	£1)	have	no	entitlement	to	dividends.	Holders	have	no	right	to	attend	or	vote	at	any	general	
meeting	of	the	Company	unless	a	resolution	is	proposed	to	wind	up	the	Company	or	vary	the	rights	attached	to	the	subscriber	shares.

Allotment of ordinary shares
During	the	year	5,589,155	ordinary	shares	(2011:	2,767,632	ordinary	shares)	were	allotted	to	satisfy	vestings/exercises	under	the	Group’s	various	share	
schemes	as	follows:

Ordinary shares of 10p 

Executive	Share	Options	–	exercises		
Restricted	Shares	Awards	–	vesting	 	

Total	under	Executive	Share	Option	and	Restricted	Share	Schemes	
Senior	Executives	Share	Ownership	Policy	Plan	–	vesting	
Savings-Related Share Option Schemes – exercises 

Total 

Number 
of shares 

	 3,024,735 
	 1,405,345 

	 4,430,080 
20,000 
  1,139,075 

  5,589,155 

2012 

 Consideration 
£m  

74 
– 

74 
– 
24 

98 

Number 
of shares 

  931,462 
  1,493,061 

  2,424,523 
70,000 
  273,109 

  2,767,632 

2011

 Consideration
£m

22
–

22
–
5

27

Market purchases of shares
During	2012,	the	Company	established	a	share	buy	back	programme	and	purchased	14,991,643	equity	ordinary	shares	(2011:	nil)	all	of	which	are	held	
as	Treasury	shares.	The	total	amount	paid	to	acquire	the	shares	was	£535m	(including	stamp	duty)	which	has	been	deducted	from	Shareholders’	equity.		
No	Treasury	shares	were	released	in	2012,	leaving	a	balance	held	at	31	December	2012	of	14,991,643	(2011:	nil).

69

2012	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
		
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
The	Group	operates	a	number	of	incentive	schemes,	including	a	share	option	scheme,	a	restricted	share	scheme,	and	other	share	award	schemes.	 
All	schemes	are	equity	settled.	The	charge	for	share-based	payments	for	the	year	was	£49m	(2011:	£61m).

Executive Share Awards
Share	options	and	restricted	shares	(Executive	Share	Awards)	are	awarded	to	the	Top400	Management	Group.	Executive	share	awards	have	a	
contractual	life	of	10	years	but	vest	according	to	the	following	compound	average	annual	growth	(CAAG)	rates	in	earnings	per	share	over	a	 
three-year period:

CAAG	
per year (%) 

9 
8  
7  
6  

Earnings	per	share	
growth	over	
three years (%) 

%	of	options	and
shares vesting

29.5 
26.0 
22.5 
19.1 

100
80
60
40

The	cost	is	spread	over	the	three	years	of	the	performance	period.	For	Executive	Committee	and	Top40	members	vesting	conditions	are	not	retested.	 
For	remaining	Top400	members	the	targets	can	be	retested	over	four	or	five	years.	If	any	target	has	not	been	met	any	remaining	shares	or	options	
which	have	not	vested	will	lapse.	

Other Share Awards
Other	share	awards	represent	SAYE	Schemes	(offered	to	all	staff	within	the	relevant	geographic	area)	and	a	number	of	Senior	Executive	Share	Ownership	
Policy	Plan	(SOPP)	awards.	Other	share	awards	have	contractual	lives	of	three	to	seven	years	and	are	generally	not	subject	to	any	vesting	criteria	other	than	
the employee’s continued employment.

Individual	tranches	of	these	other	share	awards	are	not	material	for	detailed	disclosure	and	therefore	have	been	aggregated	in	the	tables	below.

All	outstanding	Executive	and	Other	share	awards	as	at	31	December	2012	and	31	December	2011	are	included	in	the	tables	below	which	analyse	 
the	charge	for	2012	and	2011.	The	Group	has	used	the	Black-Scholes	model	to	calculate	the	fair	value	of	one	award	on	the	date	of	the	grant	of	 
the	award.

Exercise	

price	 Performance	
period 

£ 

	Share	price	on	
grant	date	
£ 

Black-Scholes model assumptions

Volatility	
% 

Dividend	
yield	
% 

Risk-free	 Fair	value	of
one	award
£

interest	rate	
% 

Life	
years 

9.50  2002-04 
11.19  2003-05 
12.76  2004-06 
15.47  2005-07 
18.10  2006-08 
22.57  2007-09 
29.44  2008-10 
27.29  2009-11 
31.65  2010-12 
34.64  2011-13 
32.09  2012-14 
39.14  2013-15 

–   2006-08 
–  2007-09 
–  2008-10 
–  2009-11 
–  2010-12 
–  2011-13 
–  2012-14 
–  2013-15 

9.70 
10.96 
12.80 
15.44 
18.16 
23.00 
29.72 
27.80 
31.80 
34.08 
32.19 
39.66 

18.16 
23.00 
29.72 
27.80 
31.80 
34.08 
32.19 
39.66 

25 
25 
24 
23 
22 
20 
20 
25 
26 
26 
25 
20 

22 
20 
20 
25 
26 
26 
25 
20 

2.7 
2.7 
2.6 
2.3 
2.4 
2.2 
1.8 
3.1 
3.5 
4.3 
5.4 
4.3 

2.4 
2.2 
1.8 
3.1 
3.5 
4.3 
5.4 
4.3 

4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 

4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 

4.50 
4.50 
4.50 
4.88 
4.69 
4.65 
5.53 
2.78 
1.69 
2.16 
1.00 
0.61 

4.69 
4.65 
5.53 
2.78 
1.69 
2.16 
1.00 
0.61 

1.95
2.05
2.46
2.99
3.33
4.23
5.99
4.69
4.70
4.49
3.18
3.29

16.38
21.01
27.55
24.31
27.23
28.22
25.30
32.76

  Grant date 

17 December 2001 
22 November 2002 
08 December 2003 
06 December 2004 
05 December 2005 
08 December 2006 
11 December 2007 
08 December 2008 
07 December 2009 
01 December 2010 
05 December 2011 
03 December 2012 

05 December 2005 
08 December 2006 
11 December 2007 
08 December 2008 
07 December 2009 
01 December 2010 
05 December 2011 
03 December 2012 

Table 1: Fair value

Award 

Share options
2002 
2003 
2004 
2005 
2006 
2007 
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011  
2012 
2013 

Restricted shares
2006 
2007 
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 
2013 

70

Notes to the financial statements continued2012	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS (CONTINUED)

Table 2: Share awards movements 2012

Award 

Share options
2003 
2004 
2005 
2006 
2007 
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 
2013 

Restricted shares
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 
2013 

Other share awards
UK	SAYE	
US	SAYE	
Overseas	SAYE	
SOPP 

Options 
  outstanding 
at	1	Jan		

	 Fair	value	of	
one	award	
£ 

Granted/	
2012	 adjustments	
number 

number 

  Grant date 

Movement in number of options

Options
  outstanding
at	31	Dec
2012
number

Exercised	
number 

Lapsed	
number 

22 November 2002 
08 December 2003  
06 December 2004 
05 December 2005 
08 December 2006 
11 December 2007 
08 December 2008 
07 December 2009 
01 December 2010 
05 December 2011 
03 December 2012 

2.05 
67,319 
2.46  263,000 
2.99  398,511 
3.33  581,971 
4.23  1,516,358 
5.99  2,790,669 
4.69  2,991,334 
4.70  3,229,322 
4.49  3,559,047 
3.18  4,020,400 
3.29 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 

–
(67,319) 
(196,000) 
67,000
(233,000)  165,511
(318,671)  263,300
(1,000)  (355,000) 1,160,358
(3,000)  (943,590) 1,844,079
(5,353)  (813,696) 2,172,285
(91,202) 2,955,162
(6,257) 3,055,949
–  3,186,439
–  4,022,000

(182,958) 
(496,841) 
(686,800)  (147,161) 
– 

–  4,022,000 

08 December 2008 
07 December 2009 
01 December 2010 
05 December 2011 
03 December 2012 

24.31  1,338,916 
27.23  1,493,830 
28.22  1,620,015 
25.30  2,010,200 
32.76 

– 
– 
25,000 
(461,550) 
–  1,986,000 

(86,447) 
(243,371) 
(71,079) 
– 

–
(63,197) 1,344,186
(5,232) 1,396,412
–  1,477,571
–  1,986,000

(2,000) (1,336,916) 

Various	
Various	
Various	
Various 

Various	 754,823	 152,282	
Various	 722,362	 203,972	
Various	 1,975,152	
7,956	
Various  100,000  110,000 

(77,753)	 (166,366)	 662,986
(109,551)	 (173,047)	 643,736
(99,103)	 (799,662)	1,084,343
(20,000)  180,000
(10,000) 

Weighted average exercise price (share options) 

£29.53 

£38.11 

£33.46 

£24.37 

£32.13

Table 3: Share awards movements 2011

Award 

Share options
2002 
2003 
2004 
2005 
2006 
2007 
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 

Restricted shares
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 

Other share awards
UK	SAYE	
US	SAYE	
Overseas	SAYE	
SOPP 

Options 
  outstanding 
at	1	Jan		

	 Fair	value	of	
one	award	
£ 

Granted/	
2011	 adjustments	
number 

number 

  Grant date 

17 December 2001 
22 November 2002 
08 December 2003  
06 December 2004 
05 December 2005 
08 December 2006 
11 December 2007 
08 December 2008 
07 December 2009 
01 December 2010 
05 December 2011 

1.95 
22,843 
2.05  149,811 
2.46  284,000 
2.99  443,450 
3.33  664,971 
4.23  1,743,730 
5.99  3,213,685 
4.69  3,129,345 
4.70  3,424,162 
4.49  4,030,100 
3.18 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
1,283 
924 
– 
(373,250) 
–  4,020,400 

11 December 2007 
08 December 2008 
07 December 2009 
01 December 2010 
05 December 2011 

27.56  1,449,177 
24.31  1,427,350 
27.23  1,589,734 
28.22  2,000,050 
25.30 

– 
– 
– 
(334,150) 
–  2,010,200 

Movement in number of options

Options
  outstanding
at	31	Dec
2011
number

Exercised	
number 

Lapsed	
number 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

–
(22,843) 
(82,492) 
67,319
(21,000)  263,000
(44,939)  398,511
(83,000)  581,971
(2,000)  (225,372) 1,516,358
(11,899)  (412,400) 2,790,669
(34,462) 2,991,334
(4,954) 3,229,322
–  3,559,047
–  4,020,400

(104,473) 
(189,886) 
(97,803) 
– 

(5,000) (1,444,177) 

(45,334) 
(90,120) 
(45,885) 
– 

–
(43,100) 1,338,916
(5,784) 1,493,830
–  1,620,015
–  2,010,200

Various	
Various	
Various	
Various 

Various	 651,679	 321,297	
Various	 653,105	 243,704	
Various	 1,058,240	 1,157,569	
40,000 
Various  130,000 

(88,724)	 (129,429)	 754,823
(89,031)	 722,362
(85,416)	
(54,649)	1,975,152
(186,008)	
(70,000)  100,000
– 

Weighted average exercise price (share options) 

£28.75 

£31.83 

£31.14 

£23.54 

£29.53

For	options	outstanding	at	the	year	end	the	weighted	average	remaining	contractual	life	is	5.69	years	(2011:	5.59	years).	Options	outstanding	at	 
31	December	2012	that	could	have	been	exercised	at	that	date	were	5,672,533	(2011:	5,617,828)	with	a	weighted	average	exercise	price	of	£26.08	
(2011: £24.42).

71

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS (CONTINUED)
The	assumptions	made	within	the	valuation	calculation	with	respect	to	the	achievement	of	performance	criteria	are	based	on	the	Directors’	expectations	
in light of the Group’s business model and relevant published targets.

Under	the	terms	of	the	plans,	early	exercise	may	only	be	granted	in	exceptional	circumstances	and	therefore	the	effect	of	early	exercise	is	not	
incorporated into the calculation. 

The	calculation	also	assumes	that	there	will	be	no	leavers	in	the	following	year.	No	material	modifications	have	been	made	to	the	plans	in	2012	or	2011	
for the purposes of the valuation.

Volatility:	An	estimate	of	future	volatility	is	made	with	reference	to	historical	volatility	over	a	similar	time	period	to	the	performance	period	or	the	
contractual life as appropriate.

Historical	volatility	is	calculated	based	on	the	annualised	standard	deviation	of	the	Group’s	daily	share	price	movement,	being	an	approximation	to	the	
continuously compounded rate of return on the share.

National Insurance contributions are payable in respect of certain share-based payment transactions and are treated as cash-settled transactions.  
The	contribution	in	2012	was	£27m	(2011:	£19m).

The	weighted	average	share	price	for	the	year	was	£35.79	(2011:	£33.07).

Options and restricted shares granted during the year 
Options	and	restricted	shares	which	may	vest	or	become	exercisable	at	various	dates	between	2014	and	2020	are	as	follows:

Reckitt	Benckiser	Senior	Executives	Share	Ownership	Policy	Plan	
Long-Term	Incentive	Plan	2007	–	share	options	(July)	
Long-Term	Incentive	Plan	2007	–	restricted	shares	(July)	
Long-Term	Incentive	Plan	2007	–	share	options	(December)		
Long-Term	Incentive	Plan	2007	–	restricted	shares	(December)	

Total 

Savings-Related Share Option Schemes
UK	Scheme	
US	Scheme	

Total 

 Price to be paid £ 

–	
34.78	
–	
39.14	
–	

28.36	
28.36	

Number
of shares
  under option

	 110,000
1,600
800
	 4,020,400
	 1,985,200

  6,118,000

	 152,282
	 203,972

  356,254

Options and restricted shares unvested/unexercised at 31 December 2012
Options	and	restricted	shares	which	have	vested	or	may	vest	at	various	dates	between	2013	and	2020	are	as	follows:

Price to be paid £ 

  Number of shares under option

Executive share option and restricted share schemes	 	

Reckitt Benckiser 1999 Share Option Plan – Annual Grant   
Reckitt Benckiser Long-term Incentive Plan 2006 – Annual Grant – options 
Reckitt Benckiser Long-term Incentive Plan 2007 – Annual Grant – options 
Reckitt Benckiser Long-term Incentive Plan 2007 – Annual Grant – restricted shares 
Reckitt	Benckiser	Senior	Executives	Share	Ownership	Policy	Plan	

From	

12.76 

27.29 

To	

18.10 
22.57 
39.14 
– 
–	

2012 

  495,811 
  1,160,358 
 17,235,914 
  6,204,169 
	 180,000 

 25,276,252 

2011

1,310,801
1,516,358
16,590,772
6,462,961
100,000

25,980,892

Savings-related share option schemes	

UK	Scheme	
Overseas Scheme 
US	Scheme	

Total	

Price to be paid £ 

  Number of shares under option

From	

13.71	
21.95 
22.88	

To	

28.36	
27.99 
28.36	

2012 

	 662,986 
  1,084,343 
	 643,736 

	 2,391,065 

2011

754,823
1,975,152
722,362

3,452,337

Executive	Share	Options	are	awarded	at	an	exercise	price	determined	on	grant	and	payable	on	exercise	following	satisfaction	of	performance	criteria.	

Restricted	share	awards	entitle	the	recipient	to	receive	shares	at	no	cost	following	satisfaction	of	performance	criteria.

72

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
24 RETAINED EARNINGS AND OTHER RESERVES
Within	all	subsidiaries	of	the	Group	there	were	statutory,	contractual	or	exchange	control	restrictions	limiting	the	Parent	Company’s	access	to	
distributable	profits	of	£3,616m	(2011:	£4,137m).	The	reserves	of	subsidiary	undertakings	have	generally	been	retained	to	finance	their	businesses.

Reserves
The	merger	reserve	relates	to	the	1999	combination	of	Reckitt	&	Colman	plc	and	Benckiser	N.V.	and	a	Group	reconstruction	in	2007	treated	as	a	merger	
under Part 27 of the Companies Act 2006.

The	hedging	reserve	comprises	the	effective	portion	of	the	cumulative	net	change	in	fair	value	of	cash	flow	hedging	instruments	related	to	hedge	
transactions that are extant at year end.

The	foreign	currency	translation	reserve	contains	the	accumulated	foreign	exchange	differences	from	the	translation	of	the	financial	statements	of	the	
Group’s	foreign	operations	arising	when	the	Group’s	entities	are	consolidated.	The	reserve	also	contains	the	translation	of	liabilities	that	hedge	the	
Group’s net exposure in a foreign currency.

25 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 
On	31	May	2012	the	Group	acquired	the	remaining	non-controlling	interest	in	Beleggingsmaatschappij	Lemore	BV	(BLBV),	the	holding	company	of	OOO	
Medcom MP (Medcom) from Abraca B.V., for £104m including transaction costs. Medcom is the Group’s Russian distributor of condoms, footcare products 
and medical gloves and devices. Prior to acquisition the Group paid rental charges of less than £1m to a director of the non-controlling interest.

On	9	November	2012	the	Group	sold	its	investment	in	TTK-LIG	for	£18m	to	the	non-controlling	interest	(T.T.	Krishnamachari	&	Co)	and	simultaneously	
purchased	inventories	of	£9m	from,	and	paid	less	than	£1m	to	terminate	an	R&D	agreement	with	the	non-controlling	interest.	There	was	no	gain	or	loss	
on	disposal.	On	the	same	date	the	Group	purchased	the	non-controlling	interest	in	SSL-TTK	Limited	from	T.T.	Krishnamachari	&	Co	for	£2m.

In	2011	the	Group	transacted	with	the	non-controlling	interests	of	SSL-TTK	Limited,	TTK-LIG	Limited	and	OOO	Medcom	MP.	This	included	sales	of	£1m,	
the payment of packing and other charges of £1m, and rental charges of less than £1m. At 31 December 2011 the Group had receivables and payables 
balances	of	less	than	£1m	with	the	non-controlling	interests.	

Key	management	compensation	is	disclosed	in	note	5a.

The	principal	subsidiary	undertakings	included	in	the	consolidated	financial	statements	at	31	December	2012	are	disclosed	in	note	2	to	the	Parent	
Company financial statements. 

26 BUSINESS ACQUISITIONS AND DISPOSALS

a. Acquisition of Schiff
On 14 December 2012 the Group acquired control of Schiff by acquiring 100% of the issued share capital for a consideration of $1.3bn (£813m).  
Schiff	is	a	leading	provider	of	branded	vitamins,	nutrition	supplements	and	nutrition	bars	predominantly	in	the	US.	Schiff’s	vitamins,	minerals	and	
supplements	(VMS)	product	portfolio	includes	a	number	of	market	leading	brands	in	the	specialist	product	category	in	the	US.

The	Schiff	acquisition	provides	a	powerful	entry	into	the	large	and	growing	global	VMS	market	and	is	an	ideal	addition	to	the	Group’s	strategic	focus	in	
global	health	and	hygiene,	providing	immediate	scale	in	VMS	in	the	US.

This	transaction	has	been	accounted	for	by	the	acquisition	method.	

From	the	date	of	acquisition	to	31	December	2012	the	acquisition	contributed	£14m	to	net	revenue	and	£1m	to	operating	profit.	Had	the	acquisition	
taken	place	at	1	January	2012,	the	enlarged	Group	would	show	consolidated	net	revenues	of	£9,767m,	operating	profit	of	£2,422m	and	operating	
profit before exceptional items of £2,594m.

All	assets	and	liabilities	were	recognised	at	the	following	provisional	fair	values.	The	amount	of	consideration	transferred	over	the	net	assets	acquired	is	
recognised	as	goodwill	in	the	Group	financial	statements.	

Provisional
fair value
£m

Intangible assets  
Property, plant and equipment 
Inventories 
Trade	and	other	receivables	
Current tax receivable 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings		
Provisions for liabilities and charges (current) 
Trade	and	other	payables	
Deferred tax liabilities 
Provisions for liabilities and charges (non-current) 
Other non-current liabilities 

Net assets acquired 
Goodwill	

Total	consideration	transferred		

Total	cash	consideration	

Total	consideration	transferred		

Acquisition related costs of £9m are included in net operating expenses and disclosed as exceptional items in the income statement. 

The	intangible	assets	acquired	include	the	brand	assets	associated	with	Airborne,	Digestive	Advantage,	MegaRed,	Move	Free	and	Schiff	Vitamins.

811
9
27
27
9
6
(99)
(42)
(37)
(268)
(3)
(1) 

439
374	

813

813	

813

73

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
26 BUSINESS ACQUISITIONS AND DISPOSALS (CONTINUED)

The	fair	value	of	trade	and	other	receivables	is	£27m.	The	gross	contractual	amount	for	trade	and	other	receivables	due	is	£29m	of	which	£2m	is	
expected to be uncollectable. 

Included	within	provisions	are	contingent	liabilities	of	£26m,	which	has	been	recognised	in	respect	of	a	number	of	legal	claims	arising	in	the	normal	
course	of	business,	the	majority	of	which	is	expected	to	be	utilised	in	less	than	12	months.

Goodwill	represents	the	strategic	premium	to	enter	and	establish	critical	mass	in	the	VMS	market	in	the	US,	the	value	of	expected	synergy	savings,	and	
assembled	workforce.	None	of	the	goodwill	is	expected	to	be	deductible	for	income	tax	purposes.	

The	fair	value	of	identifiable	net	assets	are	stated	at	provisional	amounts	which	will	be	finalised	within	the	12-month	hindsight	period	following	
acquisition.	These	balances	remain	provisional	due	to	the	proximity	of	the	acquisition	to	the	year	end	date.	Provisional	fair	value	adjustments	cover	the	
recognition	of	acquired	intangibles	and	their	associated	deferred	tax,	accounting	policy	alignment	and	other	fair	value	adjustments	on	net	working	
capital,	property,	plant	and	equipment,	provisions	and	borrowings.

All	assets	and	liabilities	are	included	within	the	ENA	reportable	segment	and	the	health	category.

b. Acquisition of SICO
On 17 September 2012 the Group acquired a 100% interest in SICO by acquiring the trade and business assets of the leading Mexican condom 
manufacturer	for	cash	consideration	of	£70m.	Net	cash	acquired	was	£nil.	

c. Disposal of Paras personal care
On 29 May 2012 the Group sold the Paras personal care business for £81m, net of cash disposed. A gain of £32m is recognised in the income 
statement,	of	which	£15m	arises	from	deferred	tax.	

Refer	to	note	25	for	acquisition	and	disposals	with	related	parties.

27 DIVIDENDS

Dividends on equity ordinary shares:
2011	Final	paid:	70p	(2010:	Final	65p)	per	share	
2012 Interim paid: 56p (2011: Interim 55p) per share 

Total	dividends	for	the	year	

2012 
£m 

511 
405 

916 

2011
£m

472
401

873

In	addition,	the	Directors	are	proposing	a	final	dividend	in	respect	of	the	financial	year	ended	31	December	2012	of	78p	per	share	which	will	absorb	an	
estimated	£561m	of	Shareholders’	funds.	If	approved	by	Shareholders	it	will	be	paid	on	30	May	2013	to	Shareholders	who	are	on	the	register	on	 
22	February	2013,	with	an	ex-dividend	date	of	20	February	2013.	

28 POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS

On	8	January	2013	the	Group	obtained	control	of	Oriental	Medicine	Company	Limited,	a	manufacturer	of	traditional	Chinese	sore	throat	products,	by	
acquiring 100% of the share capital for cash consideration of £102m. A further £18m of cash consideration is deferred over the next three years. 

On	10	February	2013,	the	Group	entered	into	a	three-year	collaboration	agreement	with	Bristol-Myers	Squibb,	for	a	number	of	market-leading	
over-the-counter	consumer	health	care	brands	in	Brazil,	Mexico	and	certain	other	parts	of	Latin	America.		The	Group	will	make	an	upfront	cash	
payment	of	$482m	(c.£300m)	to	enter	into	the	arrangement	which	also	includes	personnel,	supply	contracts	and	an	option	to	acquire	legal	title	to	the	
related	intellectual	property	at	the	end	of	the	collaboration	period	for	a	multiple	of	earnings.		The	transaction	will	be	accounted	for	as	a	business	
combination and the Directors are in the process of revaluing the assets and liabilities acquired to fair value, including the value of any acquired 
intangible assets.

74

Notes to the financial statements continued2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
Five-year summary

Income statement 

Net revenue 

Operating profit 

Operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional	Items	

Operating profit 

Net	finance	(expense)/income	
Profit on ordinary activities before tax 
Tax	on	profit	on	ordinary	activities	
Attributable to non-controlling interests 

2012 
£m 

2011 
£m 

2010 
 £m 

2009 
£m 

2008
£m

9,567 

9,485 

8,453 

7,753 

6,563

2,435 

2,395 

2,130 

1,891 

1,505

2,570 
(135) 

2,487 
(92) 

2,231 
(101) 

2,435 

2,395 

2,130 

(15) 
2,420 
(587) 
(4) 

(19) 
2,376 
(622) 
(9) 

6 
2,136 
(566) 
(2) 

1,891 
– 

1,891 

1 
1,892 
(474) 
– 

1,535
(30)

1,505

(31)
1,474
(354)
–

Net income attributable to owners of the parent 

1,829 

1,745 

1,568 

1,418 

1,120

Balance sheet
Net assets 
Net	working	capital	

Statistics
Reported basis
Operating margin 
Total	interest	to	operating	profit	(times	covered)	
Tax	rate	
Diluted earnings per share 
Dividend cover† 
Declared dividends per ordinary share 
Adjusted basis*
Operating margin 
Total	interest	to	operating	profit	(times	covered)	
Diluted earnings per share 
Dividend cover† 

5,922 
(700) 

5,781 
(701) 

5,130 
(639) 

4,014 
(867) 

3,294
(724)

25.5 
162.3x	
24.3% 
249.5p 
1.9x 
134p 

26.9% 
171.3x	
264.4p 
2.0x 

25.3% 
126.1x	
26.2% 
237.1p 
1.9x 
125p 

26.2% 
130.9x	
247.1p 
2.0x 

25.2% 
n/a	
26.5% 
213.8p 
1.9x 
115p 

26.4% 
n/a	
226.5p 
2.0x 

24.4% 
n/a	
25.0% 
194.7p 
2.0x 
100p 

24.4% 
n/a	
194.7p 
2.0x 

22.9%
48.5x
24.0%
154.7p
2.0x
80p

23.4%
49.5x
157.8p
2.0x

†	Dividend	cover	is	calculated	by	dividing	earnings/adjusted	earnings	by	ordinary	dividends	relating	to	the	period.

*	Adjusted	basis	is	calculated	by	adding/deducting	the	exceptional	items	from	net	income	for	the	year.	

75

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Parent Company – Independent Auditors’ Report to the members of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc

Other Matter 
We have reported separately on the group 
financial statements of Reckitt Benckiser Group 
plc for the year ended 31 December 2012. 

Ian Chambers (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
London
8 March 2013

Opinion on Financial Statements 
In our opinion the Parent Company  
financial statements: 

•	 	Give	a	true	and	fair	view	of	the	state	of	the	
Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2012;

•	 	Have	been	properly	prepared	in	accordance	
with	UK	Generally	Accepted	Accounting	
Practice; and 

•	 	Have	been	prepared	in	accordance	with	the	
requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

Opinion on Other Matters Prescribed by 
the Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion: 

•	 	The	part	of	the	Directors’	Remuneration	
Report to be audited has been properly 
prepared	in	accordance	with	the	Companies	
Act 2006; and 

•	 	The	information	given	in	the	Report	of	the	

Directors	for	the	financial	year	for	which	the	
Parent Company financial statements are 
prepared	is	consistent	with	the	Parent	
Company financial statements. 

Matters on which We are Required to 
Report by Exception 
We have nothing to report in respect of  
the	following	matters	where	the	Companies	
Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in  
our opinion: 

•	 	Adequate	accounting	records	have	not	been	
kept by the Parent Company, or returns 
adequate for our audit have not been received 
from branches not visited by us; or 

•	 	The	Parent	Company	financial	statements	and	

the part of the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report to be audited are not in agreement 
with	the	accounting	records	and	returns;	or	

•	 	Certain	disclosures	of	Directors’	remuneration	

specified	by	law	are	not	made;	or	

•	 	We	have	not	received	all	the	information	and	

explanations	we	require	for	our	audit.	

We have audited the Parent Company financial 
statements of Reckitt Benckiser Group plc for the 
year	ended	31	December	2012	which	comprise	
the Parent Company balance sheet and the 
related	notes.	The	financial	reporting	framework	
that has been applied in their preparation is 
applicable	law	and	UK	Accounting	Standards	
(UK	Generally	Accepted	Accounting	Practice).

Respective Responsibilities of Directors  
and Auditors 
As explained more fully in the Statement of 
Directors’ Responsibilities set out on page 30, 
the Directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the Parent Company financial statements 
and for being satisfied that they give a true and 
fair	view.	Our	responsibility	is	to	audit	the	
Parent Company financial statements in 
accordance	with	applicable	law	and	
International	Standards	on	Auditing	(UK	and	
Ireland).	Those	standards	require	us	to	comply	
with	the	Auditing	Practices	Board’s	Ethical	
Standards for Auditors. 

This	Report,	including	the	opinions,	has	been	
prepared for and only for the Company’s 
members	as	a	body	in	accordance	with	Chapter	
3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for 
no other purpose. We do not, in giving these 
opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any 
other	purpose	or	to	any	other	person	to	whom	
this	Report	is	shown	or	into	whose	hands	it	may	
come	save	where	expressly	agreed	by	our	prior	
consent	in	writing.

Scope of the Audit of the Financial 
Statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about  
the amounts and disclosures in the financial 
statements sufficient to give reasonable 
assurance that the financial statements are  
free	from	material	misstatement,	whether	
caused	by	fraud	or	error.	This	includes	an	
assessment	of:	whether	the	accounting	policies	
are appropriate to the Parent Company’s 
circumstances and have been consistently 
applied and adequately disclosed; the 
reasonableness of significant accounting 
estimates made by the Directors; and the 
overall presentation of the financial statements. 
In	addition,	we	read	all	the	financial	and
non-financial information in the annual report
to	identify	material	inconsistencies	with	the
audited	financial	statements.	If	we	become
aware	of	any	apparent	material	misstatements
or	inconsistencies	we	consider	the	implications
for our Report.

76

2012Parent Company balance sheet

As at 31 December 

Fixed assets
Investments 
Current assets
Debtors	due	within	one	year	
Debtors due after more than one year 

Current liabilities
Creditors	falling	due	within	one	year	

Net current liabilities 

Total assets less current liabilities 

Net assets 

EQUITY
Capital and reserves
Called up share capital 
Share premium account  
Profit and loss reserve 

Total Shareholders’ funds 

Notes 

2012 
£m 

2011
£m

2 

3	
4 

5	

6 
7 
7 

14,680 

14,637

59 
8 

67 

(4,498) 

(4,431) 

10,249 

10,249 

73 
184 
9,992 

10,249 

46
7

53

(3,084)

(3,031)

11,606

11,606

73
86
11,447

11,606

The	financial	statements	on	pages	77	to	82	were	approved	by	the	Board	of	Directors	on	8	March	2013	and	signed	on	its	behalf	by:

Adrian Bellamy 
Director 

Rakesh Kapoor
Director

77

2012 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Parent Company financial statements

1 PARENT COMPANY ACCOUNTING POLICIES

Accounting Convention
The	financial	statements	are	prepared	on	a	going	concern	basis	under	the	historical	cost	convention	in	accordance	with	the	Companies	Act	2006	and	
applicable	UK	accounting	standards.	Accounting	policies	have	been	consistently	applied	to	all	the	years	presented	unless	otherwise	stated.

As permitted by s408 of the Companies Act 2006, no profit and loss account is presented for Reckitt Benckiser Group plc.

Foreign Currency Translation
Transactions	denominated	in	foreign	currencies	are	translated	using	exchange	rates	prevailing	at	the	dates	of	the	transactions.	Foreign	exchange	gains	
and losses resulting from the settlement of foreign currency transactions and from the translation at period end exchange rates of monetary assets and 
liabilities	denominated	in	foreign	currencies	are	recognised	in	the	income	statement,	except	where	hedge	accounting	is	applied.

Taxation
The	tax	charge/credit	is	based	on	the	result	for	the	period	and	takes	into	account	taxation	deferred	due	to	timing	differences	between	the	treatment	of	
certain items for taxation and accounting purposes. Deferred tax liabilities are provided for in full and deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent 
that they are considered recoverable.

A	net	deferred	tax	asset	is	considered	recoverable	if	it	can	be	regarded	as	more	likely	than	not	that	there	will	be	suitable	taxable	profits	against	which	to	
recover	carried	forward	tax	losses	and	from	which	the	future	reversal	of	underlying	timing	differences	can	be	deducted.

Deferred	tax	is	recognised	in	respect	of	all	timing	differences	that	have	originated	but	not	reversed	at	the	balance	sheet	date,	where	transactions	or	
events that result in an obligation to pay more tax in the future or a right to pay less tax in the future have occurred at the balance sheet date.

Deferred	tax	is	measured	at	the	average	tax	rates	that	are	expected	to	apply	in	the	periods	in	which	the	timing	differences	are	expected	to	reverse,	based	
on	tax	rates	and	laws	that	have	been	enacted	or	substantively	enacted	by	the	balance	sheet	date.	Deferred	tax	is	measured	on	an	undiscounted	basis.

Fixed Assets
Fixed	asset	investments	are	stated	at	the	lower	of	cost	and	their	recoverable	amount,	which	is	determined	as	the	higher	of	net	realisable	value	and	value	
in	use.	A	review	for	the	potential	impairment	of	an	investment	is	carried	out	by	the	Directors	if	events	or	changes	in	circumstances	indicate	that	the	
carrying	value	of	the	investment	may	not	be	recoverable.	Such	impairment	reviews	are	performed	in	accordance	with	FRS	11,	‘Impairment	of	Fixed	
Assets	and	Goodwill’.

Employee Share Schemes
Incentives	in	the	form	of	shares	are	provided	to	employees	under	share	option	and	restricted	share	schemes.	Any	shortfall	between	the	cost	to	the	
employee	and	the	fair	market	value	of	the	awards	at	date	of	grant	is	charged	to	the	income	statement	over	the	period	to	which	the	performance	
criteria	relate,	with	the	credit	taken	directly	to	the	profit	and	loss	account.	Additional	employer	costs	in	respect	of	options	and	awards	are	charged	to	
the	income	statement	account	over	the	same	period	with	the	credit	included	in	equity.	Where	awards	are	contingent	upon	future	events	an	assessment	
of the likelihood of these conditions being achieved is made at the end of each reporting period and reflected in the accounting entries made.

The	grant	by	the	Company	of	options	over	its	equity	instruments	to	the	employees	of	subsidiary	undertakings	in	the	Group	is	treated	as	a	capital	
contribution.	The	fair	value	of	employee	services	received,	measured	by	reference	to	the	grant	date	fair	value,	is	recognised	over	the	vesting	period	as	
an	increase	to	investment	in	subsidiary	undertakings,	with	a	corresponding	credit	to	equity	in	the	Company	accounts.

Debtors
Debtors are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently at amortised cost using the effective interest method less provision for impairment. 

Share Capital Transactions
When the Company purchases equity share capital, the amount of the consideration paid, including directly attributable costs, is recognised as a charge 
to	equity.	Purchased	shares	are	either	held	in	Treasury	in	order	to	satisfy	employee	options,	or	cancelled	and,	in	order	to	maintain	capital,	an	equivalent	
amount to the nominal value of the shares cancelled is transferred from the profit and loss account to the capital redemption reserve.

Cash Flow Statement 
Reckitt	Benckiser	Group	plc	has	presented	a	Group	cash	flow	statement	in	its	Annual	Report	and	financial	statements	2012,	therefore	as	permitted	by	
FRS	1	(revised	1996),	‘Cash	Flow	Statements’,	the	Directors	have	not	prepared	a	cash	flow	statement	for	the	Company.	

78

20122 INVESTMENTS

Cost: 
At	1	January	2012	
Additions during the year 

At 31 December 2012 

Provision for impairment:
At	1	January	2012	
Provided for during the year 

At 31 December 2012 

Net book amounts:
At	1	January	2012	

At 31 December 2012 

Shares in subsidiary
  undertakings
£m

14,637	
43

14,680

–
–

–

14,637

14,680

The	Directors	believe	that	the	carrying	value	of	the	investments	is	supported	by	their	underlying	net	assets.

Principal Subsidiary Undertakings
The	principal	subsidiary	undertakings	as	at	31	December	2012,	all	of	which	are	included	in	the	consolidated	financial	statements,	are	shown	below.

Reckitt Benckiser (Australia) Pty Limited 
Reckitt Benckiser (Brasil) Limitada 
Reckitt	Benckiser	(Canada)	Inc.	
Reckitt	Benckiser	Deutschland	GmbH	
Reckitt	Benckiser	España	SL	
Reckitt	Benckiser	France	SAS	
Reckitt	Benckiser	Healthcare	(UK)	Limited	
Reckitt	Benckiser	LLC	
Reckitt	Benckiser	Pharmaceuticals	Inc.	
Reckitt Benckiser (India) Limited 
Reckitt Benckiser Italia SpA 
Reckitt	Benckiser	Arabia	FZE	
Schiff	Nutrition	International,	Inc.	

.	

Product category 

health, hygiene, home 
health, hygiene, home 
health,	hygiene,	home	and	Food	
health,	hygiene,	home	
health,	hygiene,	home	
health,	hygiene,	home	
health,	hygiene,	home	
health,	hygiene,	home	and	Food	
Pharmaceuticals	
health, hygiene, home 
health, hygiene, home 
health,	hygiene,	home	
health	

Country of
incorporation	
or registration 
and operation 

Australia 
Brazil 
Canada	
Germany	
Spain	
France	
UK	
US	
US	
India 
Italy 
UAE	(Dubai)	
US	

Effective	%	of	
share capital
held by the Group

Ordinary 100
Ordinary 100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary 100
Ordinary 100
Ordinary	100
Ordinary	100

None of the above subsidiaries are held directly by Reckitt Benckiser Group plc. 

As	permitted	by	s.410	of	the	Companies	Act	2006,	particulars	of	other	subsidiary	undertakings	are	not	shown	above.	A	full	list	of	the	Company’s	
subsidiary	undertakings	will	be	annexed	to	the	Company’s	annual	return	to	Companies	House.

3 DEBTORS DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR

Amounts	owed	by	Group	undertakings	

Amounts	owed	by	Group	undertakings	are	unsecured,	interest	free	and	are	repayable	on	demand.

4 DEBTORS DUE AFTER MORE THAN ONE YEAR

Deferred tax assets 

Deferred tax assets consist of short-term timing differences.

5 CREDITORS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR

Amounts	owed	to	Group	undertakings	
Taxation	and	social	security	

2012 
£m 

59 

2012 
£m 

8 

2012 
£m 

4,491 
7 

4,498 

2011
£m

46

2011
£m

7

2011
£m

3,080
4

3,084

Included	in	the	amounts	owed	to	Group	undertakings	is	an	amount	of	£4,473m	(2011:	£3,064m)	which	is	unsecured,	carries	interest	at	LIBOR	and	is	
repayable	on	demand.	All	other	amounts	owed	to	Group	undertakings	are	unsecured,	interest	free	and	are	repayable	on	demand.

79

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
		
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Parent Company financial statements continued

6 CALLED UP SHARE CAPITAL

Issued and fully paid
At	1	January	2012	
Allotments  

At 31 December 2012 

Issued and fully paid
At	1	January	2011	
Allotments  

At 31 December 2011 

Equity	
ordinary 
shares  

	Nominal	
value 
£m  

Subscriber	
ordinary 
shares 

	728,621,602	
  5,589,155 

  734,210,757 

73	
– 

73 

2	
– 

2 

Equity	
ordinary 
shares  

	Nominal	
value 
£m  

Subscriber		
ordinary 
shares 

	 725,853,970	
  2,767,632 

  728,621,602 

73	
– 

73 

2	
– 

2 

Nominal
value
£m

–
–

–

Nominal
value
£m

–
–

–

For	details	of	the	allotment	of	ordinary	shares	during	2012	refer	to	note	22	of	the	Group	financial	statements	on	page	69.

The	holders	of	ordinary	shares	(par	value	10p)	are	entitled	to	receive	dividends	as	declared	from	time	to	time	and	are	entitled	to	one	vote	per	share	 
at meetings of the Parent Company.

The	holders	of	subscriber	ordinary	shares	(par	value	£1)	have	no	entitlement	to	dividends.	Holders	have	no	right	to	attend	or	vote	at	any	general	
meeting	of	the	Company	unless	a	resolution	is	proposed	to	wind	up	the	Company	or	vary	the	rights	attached	to	the	subscriber	shares.

7 RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS

Movements during the year:
At	1	January	2012	
Loss for the year 
Dividends 
Shares allotted under share schemes  
Capital contribution in respect of share-based payments 
Share-based payments 
Shares	purchased	and	held	in	Treasury	

At 31 December 2012 

Movements during the year:
At	1	January	2011	
Loss for the year 
Dividends 
Shares allotted under share schemes  
Capital contribution in respect of share-based payments 
Share-based payments 

At 31 December 2011 

Share 
capital	
£m 

73	

– 

73 

Share 
capital	
£m 

73	

73 

Share  
premium	
£m 

Profit and
loss	reserve	
£m 

86	

98 

184 

Share  
premium	
£m 

59	

27 

86 

11,447	
(54) 
(916) 

43 
7 
(535)	

9,992 

Profit and
loss	reserve	
£m 

12,315	
(56) 
(873) 

50 
11 

11,447 

Total
£m

11,606
(54)
(916)
98
43
7
(535)

10,249

Total
£m

12,447
(56)
(873)
27
50
11

11,606

Reckitt Benckiser Group plc has £9,725m (2011: £11,219m) of its profit and loss reserve available for distribution.

During	2012,	the	Company	established	a	share	buy	back	programme	and	purchased	14,991,643	equity	ordinary	shares	(2011:	nil)	all	of	which	are	held	
as	Treasury	shares.	The	total	amount	paid	to	acquire	the	shares	was	£535m	(including	stamp	duty)	which	has	been	deducted	from	Shareholders’	equity.		
No	Treasury	shares	were	released	in	2012	leaving	a	balance	held	at	31	December	2012	of	14,991,643	(2011:	nil).	

Other post balance sheet events are described in note 28 on page 74 of the Group financial statements.

80

2012	
	
	
	
	
	
	
		
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS

Reckitt	Benckiser	Group	plc	has	two	employees,	the	Group’s	CEO	and	CFO.	The	tables	below	include	details	of	their	share	awards	and	those	for	any	
individuals	previously	holding	these	roles.	Details	of	their	share	awards	that	are	not	fully	vested	are	set	out	in	the	Directors’	Remuneration	Report.	The	
charge	for	share-based	payments	for	the	year	was	£7m	(2011:	£11m)	and	national	insurance	contributions	were	£7m	(2011:	£5m).	The	Company	has	
used	the	Black-Scholes	pricing	model	to	calculate	the	fair	value	of	one	award	on	the	date	of	the	grant	of	the	awards.

The	fair	value	of	awards	with	options	outstanding	at	31	December	2012	is	shown	in	note	23	of	the	Group	financial	statements	on	pages	70	to	72.

Table 1: Share awards movements 2012

Award 

Share options
2007 
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 
2013 

Restricted shares
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 
2013 

Other share awards
UK	SAYE	

Total	

Options 
   outstanding 
	 Fair	value	of	 at	1	January	

Grant date 

one	award	
£ 

Granted/	
2012	 adjustments	
number 

number 

Movement in number of options

Options
   outstanding at
		31	December
2012
number

Exercised	
number 

Lapsed	
number 

 08 December 2006 
 11 December 2007 
 08 December 2008 
 07 December 2009 
 01 December 2010 
 05 December 2011 
 03 December 2012 

 08 December 2008 
 07 December 2009 
 01 December 2010 
 05 December 2011 
 03 December 2012 

4.23  800,000 
5.99  600,000 
4.69  693,077 
4.70  653,077 
4.49  600,000 
3.18  490,000 
3.29 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
–  400,000 

– 
– 
– 
(65,385) 
(265,385) 
– 
– 

–  800,000
–  600,000
(93,077)  600,000
(53,077)  534,615
–  334,615
–  490,000
–  400,000

24.31  346,538 
27.23  326,538 
28.22  310,000 
25.30  245,000 
32.76 

– 
– 
– 
– 
–  200,000 

– 
(32,692) 
(132,692) 
– 
– 

(346,538) 

–
(26,538)  267,308
–  177,308
–  245,000
–  200,000

	04	September	2006	

6.61	

1,011	

–	

–	

–	

1,011

Weighted average exercise price  

£29.15 

£39.14 

£34.05 

£28.87 

£29.79

Table 2: Share awards movements 2011

Award 

Share options
2007 
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 

Restricted shares
2008 
2009 
2010 
2011 
2012 

Other share awards
UK	SAYE	

Total	

Options 
   outstanding 
	 Fair	value	of	 at	1	January	

Grant date 

one	award	
£ 

Granted/	
2011	 adjustments	
number 

number 

Movement in number of options

Options
   outstanding at
		31	December
2011
number

Exercised	
number 

Lapsed	
number 

 08 December 2006 
 11 December 2007 
 08 December 2008 
 07 December 2009 
 01 December 2010 
 05 December 2011 

 11 December 2007 
 08 December 2008 
 07 December 2009 
 01 December 2010 
 05 December 2011 

4.23  800,000 
5.99  720,000 
4.69  720,000 
4.70  720,000 
4.49  600,000 
3.18 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
-  490,000 

– 
– 
(26,923) 
(66,923) 
– 
– 

–  800,000
(120,000)  600,000
–  693,077
–  653,077
–  600,000
–  490,000

27.56  360,000 
24.31  360,000 
27.23  360,000 
28.22  300,000 
25.30 

– 
– 
– 
10,000 
-  245,000 

– 
(13,462) 
(33,462) 
– 
– 

(360,000) 

–
–  346,538
–  326,538
–  310,000
–  245,000

	04	September	2006	

6.61	

1,011	

–	

–	

–	

1,011

Weighted average exercise price  

£28.78 

£32.09 

£30.40 

£29.44 

£29.15

Further	details	of	the	share	awards	relating	to	the	relevant	Directors	are	set	out	in	the	Directors’	Remuneration	Report	on	pages	31	to	37.

For	details	of	the	contractual	life,	performance	criteria,	valuation	assumptions	and	volatility	of	the	share	awards,	please	refer	to	note	23	of	the	Group	
financial statements.

The	weighted	average	remaining	contractual	life	of	the	outstanding	options	is	5.69	years	(2011:	5.59	years).

The	weighted	average	share	price	for	the	year	was	£35.79	(2011:	£33.07).

81

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Parent Company financial statements continued

9 AUDITORS’ REMUNERATION
The	fee	charged	for	the	statutory	audit	of	the	Company	was	£0.05m	(2011:	£0.05m).

10 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
The	Company	has	taken	advantage	of	the	exemption	within	Financial	Reporting	Standard	No.	8	‘Related	Party	Disclosures’	not	to	disclose	related	party	
transactions	with	wholly	owned	subsidiaries	of	the	Reckitt	Benckiser	Group.	There	were	no	other	related	party	transactions	(2011:	nil).	

11 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
The	Company	has	issued	a	guarantee	to	the	Trustees	of	the	Reckitt	Benckiser	Pension	Fund	covering	the	obligations	of	certain	UK	subsidiaries	of	the	
Group	who	are	the	sponsoring	employers	of	the	UK	defined	benefit	pension	fund.	The	guarantee	covers	any	amounts	due	to	the	pension	fund	from	
these subsidiaries if they fail to meet their pension obligations. 

Other contingent liabilities are disclosed in note 19 of the Group financial statements.

12 DIVIDENDS

Dividends on equity ordinary shares:
2011	Final	paid:	70p	(2010:	Final	65p)	per	share	
2012 Interim paid: 56p (2011: Interim 55p) per share 

Total	dividends	for	the	year	

2012 
£m 

511 
405 

916 

2011
£m

472
401

873

In	addition,	the	Directors	are	proposing	a	final	dividend	in	respect	of	the	financial	year	ended	31	December	2012	of	78p	per	share	which	will	absorb	an	
estimated	£561m	of	Shareholders’	funds.	If	approved	by	Shareholders	it	will	be	paid	on	30	May	2013	to	Shareholders	who	are	on	the	register	on	 
22	February	2013,	with	an	ex-dividend	date	of	20	February	2013.	

82

2012 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 
Notes

83

2012Shareholder information

Electronic Communications
The	Shareholders	passed	a	resolution	at	the	2008	AGM	enabling	the	
Company’s	website	to	be	used	as	the	primary	means	of	communication	
with	them.	Shareholders	who	have	positively	elected,	or	are	deemed	to	
have consented, to receiving electronic communications in accordance 
with	the	Companies	Act	2006	will	receive	written	notification	whenever	
Shareholder	documents	are	available	to	view	on	the	Company’s	website.

Shareholders	who	have	received	a	notice	of	availability	of	a	document	 
on	the	Company’s	website	are	entitled	to	request	a	hard	copy	of	any	such	
document at any time free of charge from the Company’s Registrar. 
Shareholders can also revoke their consent to receive electronic 
communications at any time by contacting the Registrar.

The	Company’s	2012	Annual	Report	and	Notice	of	the	2013	AGM	are	
available	to	view	at	www.rb.com/online-annual-report-2012.	

The	Investor	Relations	section	of	the	website	contains	up-to-date	
information for Shareholders including:

•	 	Detailed	share	price	information;

•	 Financial	results;

•	 Dividend	payment	dates	and	amounts;

•	 	Access	to	Shareholder	documents	including	the	Annual	Report;	and

•	 Share	capital	information.

Annual General Meeting 
To	be	held	on	Thursday,	2	May	2013	at	11.15	am	at	The	London	
Heathrow	Marriott	Hotel,	Bath	Road,	Hayes,	Middlesex,	UB3	5AN.	

Every	Shareholder	is	entitled	to	attend	and	vote	at	the	meeting.	 
The	Notice	convening	the	meeting	is	contained	in	a	separate	document	
for	Shareholders.	Shareholders	who	have	registered	for	electronic	
communication can:

•	 	Receive	an	email	alert	when	Shareholder	documents	are	available;	

•	 	View	the	Annual	Report	and	Notice	of	AGM	on	the	day	they	 

are published;

•	 Cast	their	AGM	vote	electronically;	and

•	 	Manage	their	shareholding	quickly	and	securely	online.

Final Dividend for the Year ended 31 December 2012
The	Directors	have	recommended	a	final	dividend	of	78p	per	share,	for	
the	year	ended	31	December	2012.	Subject	to	approval	at	the	2013	
AGM,	payment	will	be	on	30	May	2013	to	all	Shareholders	on	the	
register	as	at	22	February	2013.

Company Secretary 
Elizabeth	Richardson

Registered Office 
103-105 Bath Road 
Slough,	Berkshire	SL1	3UH 
Telephone:	+44	(0)1753	217800	 
Facsimile:	+44	(0)1753	217899

Registered and Domiciled in England 
No. 6270876 

Company Status
Public Limited Company

Auditors 
PricewaterhouseCoopers	LLP

Solicitors 
Slaughter and May

Registrar and Transfer Office
The	Company’s	Registrar,	Computershare,	is	responsible	for	maintaining	
and updating the Shareholder register and making dividend payments. 

If	you	have	any	queries	relating	to	your	shareholding	please	write	to,	or	
telephone,	the	Company’s	Registrar	at	the	following	address:

84

Computershare Investor Services PLC 
The	Pavilions,	Bridgwater	Road,	Bristol		BS99	6ZY	

Reckitt Benckiser Shareholder helpline: 0870 703 0118

Website:	www.computershare.com/uk

American Depositary Receipts
Reckitt Benckiser Group plc American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) are 
traded	on	the	over-the-counter	market	(OTC)	under	the	symbol	RBGLY.	
Five	ADRs	represent	one	ordinary	share.	J.P.	Morgan	Chase	Bank	N.A.	is	
the Depositary. 

If you should have any queries, please contact:

J.P.	Morgan	Chase	Bank	N.A. 
PO	Box	64504,	St	Paul,	MN	55164-0504,	US 
E-mail:	jpmorgan.adr@wellsfargo.com 
Telephone	number	for	general	queries:	(800)	990	1135 
Telephone	number	from	outside	the	US:	+1	651	453	2128

Key Dates
Announcement of quarter 1 interim 
  management statement 
Annual General Meeting 
Payment of final ordinary dividend 
Announcement	of	interim	results	
Payment of interim ordinary dividend 
Announcement of quarter 3 interim 
  management statement 
Preliminary	announcement	of	2013	results	
Publication of 2013 Annual Report and Accounts 
Annual General Meeting 

Analysis of Shareholders as at 31 December 2012

22 April 2013
2 May 2013
30 May 2013
29	July	2013
September 2013

22 October 2013
14	February	2014
April 2014
May 2014

Distribution of shares by type of Shareholder 

Nominees and Institutional Investors 
Individuals 

Total 

Size of shareholding 

1 – 500 
501 – 1,000 
1,000 – 5,000  
5,001 – 10,000 
10,001 – 50,000 
50,001 – 100,000 
100,001 – 1,000,000 
1,000,000 and above 

Total 

No. of 
holdings 

9,316 
14,974 

24,290 

No. of 
holdings 

14,399 
4,267 
3,979 
451 
559 
165 
376 
94 

24,290 

Shares 

716,868,132 
17,342,625 

734,210,757

Shares

3,062,966
3,138,604
8,168,333
3,206,995
13,011,989
11,421,562
125,823,685
566,376,623

734,210,757

‘Boiler Room’ Scams
Shareholders	who	are	offered	unsolicited	investment	advice,	discounted	
shares, a premium price for shares, or free company or research reports, 
should take these steps before handing over any money:

1.  Get the name of the person and organisation.

2.		Check	the	FSA	Register	at	www.fsa.gov.uk/fsaregister	to	ensure	they	

are authorised.

3.	Use	the	details	on	the	FSA	Register	to	contact	the	firm.

4.		Call	the	FSA	Consumer	Helpline	on	0845	606	1234	if	there	are	no	

contact details on the Register or if they are out of date.

5.		Search	the	FSA’s	list	of	unauthorised	firms	and	individuals	to	avoid	

doing	business	with.

Using	an	unauthorised	firm	to	buy	or	sell	shares	or	other	investments	will	
prohibit	access	to	the	Financial	Ombudsman	Service	or	Financial	Services	
Compensation	Scheme	(FSCS)	if	things	go	wrong.

2012 
 
This	report	is	part	of	an	integrated	approach	to	reporting	our	total	
performance. Our family of reports also includes the Annual Report 
Highlights,	the	Sustainability	Report	on	our	social	and	environmental	
responsibilities, and regularly updated corporate responsibility information 
at www.rb.com

Left:	Annual	Report	Highlights	2012

Right:	Sustainability	Report	2011	(2012	report	to	be	published	at	www.rb.com)

The following are trade marks of the Reckitt Benckiser group of companies:  
Airborne, Air Wick, Aqua Mist, Bang, Calgon, Cherry Blossom, Clearasil, d-Con, 
Dermicool, Dettol, Digestive Advantage, Durex, Easywax, Filter & Fresh, Finish,  
Flip & Fresh, Frank’s Red Hot, French’s, Freshmatic, Gaviscon, Harpic, Harpic 
Hygienic, Lysol, MegaRed, Move Free, Mortein, Mucinex, No-Touch, Nugget, 
Nurofen, Our Home Our Planet, Performax Intense, Power Plus, Quantum, 
Quantumatic, Resolve, Schiff, Schiff Vitamins, Scholl, Spray ‘n Wash, Strepsils, 
Suboxone, Subutex, Tiger’s Milk, Vanish, Veet, Veja, Woolite as	well	as	 
Reckitt Benckiser and the RB kite logos. 

Designed	and	produced	by	The	Workroom	www.workroom.co.uk	 
Printed	by	The	Colourhouse
The	paper	used	for	this	report	is	produced	using	a	Elemental	Chlorine	Free	(ECF)	
bleaching	process	with	FSC	(Forest	Stewardship	Council)	Mix	Credit	certified	pulp	
from	sustainable	forests	with	a	verifiable	chain	of	custody.	The	envelope	used	for	
postal	distribution	of	this	report	is	made	from	FSC	certified	sustainable	forest	stocks.

Reckitt Benckiser Group plc 
103-105 Bath Road 
Slough,	Berkshire	SL1	3UH 
United	Kingdom

www.rb.com